when he arrived to his Kingship and Supremacy then this other Beast became his False Prophet serving and Advancing him by Lying Miracles and Wonders 14 For they three Frogs are indeed the Spirits 25 of Devils like Frogs workâ—ng 26 lying Miracles 2 Thes 2 9-11 Rev. 13.13 14. which go f rth unto the Kings of the Earth i. e. the Antichristian Potentates and Enemies of Christ's Kingdom Psalm 2.1 2. Judg. 5.3.19 Rev. 20 7-10 and of the whole World Chap. 20.8 to gather them by exciting and engaging them to the 27 Battle of that 28 great day of God Almighty Chap. 19.19 25 These Wicked Agents for Paganism and Aneichristianism are called Spirits of Devils because they are acted and influenced by the Devil and his Angels who ever since their Fall have been permitted to make bold Attempts full of Malice and Rage against God and Christ's Kingdom 26 They are permitted according to the Example of the Aegyptian Magicians to work Lying Wonders as the Devil had frequently done in the Times of Paganism and Antichristianism 27 This is the first Battle of Gog and Magog before the coming of Christ's Kingdom now ready to appear wherein they are overcome and the Wisdom and extraordinary Power of God styled here upon that account 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the Lord of Hosts in respect of his Rule and Dominion over all things and his Power by which he is able to perform them is manifested in the Defeat of the Devil who had summoned all his Force and Power together under the Wise Holy and Incomprehensible Justice and Vengeance of God to shew his utmost Malice and Rage against Christ's Kingdom See on Chap. 19.19 and on the Three Last Chapters 28 Wherein he would manifest his uncontroulable Power and absolute Dominion after the most extraordinary manner beyond any thing which had as yet appeared 15 Behold 29 says Christ I come or am just ready to come in my Thousand Years Kingdom as 30 a Thief i. e. on a suddain and after a surprizing manner chap. 3.3 10 11. Blessed in that happy state Dan. 12.12 is he that 31 watcheth in this time of trouble and temptation and they who shall be found so doing when I come Luke 12 35-40 and 32 blessed also is he that keepeth his Garments i. e. his purity righteousness and innocency chap. 19.8 lest loosing his righteousness he walk naked and they see his shame i. e. his shameful nakedness be discovered to his utter confusion and he be driven out of Paradise as his naked first Parents were Gen. 3. 2 Cor. 5.3 29 These Words are a Parenthesis spoken by Christ to those who professed his Religion as appears from the Gentleness and tender care of them commanding them to watch over themselves with great diligence and signifying what their state should be in his Kingdom just approaching intimated by the Word Blessed taken from Dan. 12.12 which is a place of the like import with this 30 Christ is every where represented (a) Matth. 24. 1 Thess 5.2 in Scripture as coming of a sudden to his Kingdom notwithstanding the many Prognosticks given of it and preparations to it because his actual appearing will be on a sudden and by surprize 31 32 Hereby is signified that all they shall be blessed who have watched for Christ with Oyl in their Vessels as well as their Lamps and shall be found really united to him and having on his Righteousness when he comes in his Kingdom See Chap. 3. 16 And he 33 i. e. the Spirits of Devils under the justice and Vengeance of Almighty God in order to his Glory and the punishment of his Enemies Judg. 4.7 Joel 3.11 12. gathereth them i. e. the Kings of the Earth and of the whole World together by their instigations and power ever them into a place called in the Hebrew tongue 34 Armageddon i. e. there was a most Powerful and Diabolical Confederacy against Christ's Kingdom Psal 2. 33 It is evident from Verse 14. that this gathering together is performed by the three Evil Spirits where yet as well as in this Verse a Verb of the Singular Number is made use of according to the Custom of the Greek Language when a Noun of the Neuter Gender is referred to And this gathering together is some desperate Attempt managed by the Wicked of the Old Earth at the instigation and by the help of the Evil Spirits against Christ's Kingdom just ready to appear in which they are discomfited after some extraordinary and miraculous manner as Sisera was at Megiddo Judg. 4 15.5 20. and are confined by God in a miserable and most contemptible condition during the Thousand Years of Christ's Kingdom upon the expiring of which Satan and his Wicked Kings and Nations are again loosed See Chap. 20. 34 The Word signifies the Hill of Megiddo called Megiddon by the (a) Zech. 12.11 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 LXX Prophet a Royal City in the Tribe of Issachar but belonging to Manasseh which (b) Josh 17.11 12. Judg. 1.27 the Canaanites inhabited in despight of the Children of Manasseh and was (c) Judg. Chapters 3 and 4. famous for the miraculous Defeat of Sisera and the Kings of Canaan a Type of the Kings of the Earth in this Prophecy by Barak and the Israelites who came down from Mount Tabor which was not far from that place and discomfited them at the Waters of Megiddo in the Hilly as (a) In loc Grotius thinks and Mountainous parts of that place and also for the Death of (b) 2 Kings 9 27. Ahaziah but especially of (c) 2 Kings 23.29 30. 2 Chron. 35 20-27 Josiah who received his deadly Wound with a great slaughter in the Valley of Megiddo where he was bewailed with so great a Lamentation that the Mournings in that Valley are used by way of a proverbial speech by the Prophet Zechariah and Megiddo is interpreted by the LXX the Valley of the slain or cut off as if it signified a place of great grief and slaughter And the Name of this place is made choice of here perhaps to signifie 1. That Satan shall be discomfited and that although he make choice of the most advantageous places to defend himself signified by the Mountains encompassing the Valley of Megiddo For the Canaanites having had a Terrible Defeat in the Valley Satan the Leader of these Wicked Kings of the Earth may be supposed now to make choice of New Stratagems signified by the Hill of Megiddo according to the (d) 1 Kings 20.23 Notions received amongst Idolaters that the Gods of the Hills were stronger than the Gods of the Plain 2. With reference to what is prophesied of by (e) Chap. 39.4 Ezekiel concerning Gog the Type of these Kings of the Earth that he shall fall upon the Mountains of Israel 3. Megiddo is chosen as the Type and Symbol of the place of this Battel of Decision to shew that Satan intended the Destruction of Christ's Kingdom now ready to succeed
Lombards and the Franks were removed by him to make way for his Dominion in Italy VVhich is plainly foretold Dan. 7.8 24. by the coming up of a Little Horn amongst the Ten Horns by whom three of them were humbled subdued and pluckt up by the Roots 8. May not the Pope according to Daniel 7.24 be fitly called a King diverse from all the rest of the Kings which are united with him Is not his Supremacy an Image as it is called Rev. 13.14 of Imperatorial power not a true and real one and does not he subsist meerly by the Will of the Princes and Kingdoms of whom he is the Spiritual Head so that they may according to (b) Dan. 8.24 Prophecy be fitly said to give their power to him and his power to be mighty but not by his own power 9. Antichrist is called the Son of Perdition in Scripture And is it not notorious in all (c) See the Lives of the Popes and the Histories of the Papacy before quoted Foulis of RomishVsurpat Overals Convocat Book lib. 3. Bp. Stillingfl of Idolatry p. 314-337 History that Perdition Mischief Wars and Bloodshed has attended the Rise and Progress of the Papacy For it was founded upon the Perdition and Ruines of the Empire it was raised to a Supremacy by approving the Murther of the Good Emperour Mauritius and advanced it self above the Civil powers and all that is called God by trampling upon Kings and Emperours raising VVars and Seditions against them and by anathematizing persecuting and killing all that opposed it 10. The Times of the Beast are most admirably divided in Scripture into a Time Times and an half Time to de note the several Steps and Advances of it and its Declination in the half Time which being a Division or breaking of Time is an intimation of its broken and divided State as hath been shewn on Chap. 12. Now it is plain from the History of the Papacy that its Power was most considerably broken at the Reformation A. D. 1517 So that we may very well date its half Time from that Year after which so many Nations fell off from it if from that Year we ascend to the beginning of its Two Vnited Times which are 720 Years we arrive at A. D. 797. when his first time ended consisting of 360 Years the half of which is 180 Years and there according to Expectation we find this Man of Sin in the great strength and vigour of Manly Age having conquered all the Obstacles which opposed his Establishment For in that very (a) Zonar Cedren Sigebert Petav. Rationar Tempor Year remarkable for a horrible Darkness for Seventeen Days together the whole Race of Leo Conon called Iconomachus was utterly extinguished by the cruel Empress Irene who had all along opposed the Pope in the Controversie about Images whereby he was freed from his Enemies on all hands his Power in the West being then also setled by the (b) Mezeray pag. 99. It may be observed that the Kings of France were the first Kings that embraced Christian Religion as it was professed at Rome and that they contributed the most of any Kings upon the Earth to the raising and supporting of the Papacy as appears from an Inscription on a Marble-Stone still extant at Ravenna where it is acknowledged that Pepin was the first King who gave example to Posterity how the power of Holy Church was to be amplified and encreased and as they have all along afforded Refuge to Persecuted Popes as Monsieur Mezeray speaks so is it a thing remarkable that France although it hath no great Obligation or dependency upon Rome except with relation to the priviledges of the Gallican Church yet interests her self more warmly in her Affairs and sends more Stately Embassies thither than any other Princes whence it may be observed that it is upon all accounts the chief part of the Decem-principality and that her Kings are the most remarkable of the Ten. Mezeray pag. 15. 223. Rycaut's Preface to the Lives of the Popes Kings of the Franks to whom as we may observe by the way the Popes chiefly owe their Temporal Grandeur And if we ascend again from thence to the beginning of its first Time which must accordingly be A. D. 437. we arrive to a very remarkable Year in which we find the World very busie in setling the Lunar Year as on purpose to point out unto us that the Beast's Months were then just entring in whose Times compared with the Days of the Witnesses there is observed the exact Mathematical proportion betwixt the Motion of the Sun and Moon a thing very (a) See before on Chap. 11. 2. admirable and worthy observation And further not only the beginning and end of the first Time where the Two Times also begin are remarkable for some notable things relating to the Papacy but also the Year 1157 the very Joynt of Time in which the Two Vnited Times meet is very Famous for (b) Baron Heidegger histor Papat cap. 4. Foulis of Romish Vsurpat 4.4 Pope Hadrian's setting up in the Vatican a Picture of the Emperour's Vassalage who was fain to hold the Pope's Stirrup before he could be crowned and for his insolent Letters to him wherein he asserts that he was set up by God to destroy Kingdoms and Countreys and that the Roman Empire was held as a Feif of the Papacy whereby he sufficiently shewed his Antichristian Spirit and his Mouth speaking great things So remarkable is each Joynt of the Beast's Times divided by the Wisdom of the Holy Spirit into a Time Times or Two Times united into One and half a Time to denote the different States of Antichrist and his Kingdom who was the whole first Time in his Growth and Ascent to an Idolatrous Power which he was fully established in at A. D. 797 ten Years after his finishing the Iconoclastick War in the Second Council of Nice and because after that Time until 1517. his Kingdom continually encreased and received no decay and he went on and prospered in one and the same Kingly State therefore are the Two next Times given in One united Line of Time called Times because it was One and the same Kingly State the first Time measuring out a different State from this having a distinct Time to it self and being then ended And his last State beginning at the Reformation A D. 1517. is very appositely measured by half a Time because it was a divided and a broken one Seeing therefore that the Doctrine Name Number Image Place Times and all the other Characters and Notes of Antichrist given in Scripture do all agree to the Papacy and to that alone it will follow that the Papacy is The Antichrist Q E D. But that the Rise Progress and Times of Antichrist may be the better understood I shall give this brief Scheme of them referring to the several places in the Annotations where they are particularly discoursed of 1. Antichrist (a) See
of the Witnesses especially at the Reformation 1517. 46 This refers to some second space of Repentance afforded the Apostasie before the pouring out of the Vials which may be probably the time allotted to the uttering of the Voices Chap. 14. by which Babylon was called to Repentance 23 And I will kill her Idolatrous Children 47 i. e. her Proselytes and Followers with death i. e. I will certainly and utterly destroy them and by the greatness of the Punishment all the Churches of the World shall know that I am he which 48 searcheth the Râ—iâ—s i. e. the Desires and Hearts i. e. the Thoughts and can discern the Sincerity of them and I will give unto every one of you according to your works and not according to your subtile and fair pretences 47 As the Disciples of the Prophets are called the Sons of the Prophets and as Timothy and Mark are called Paul's Sons in Scripture because they were his Disciples and were converted by him so are the Proselytes of Jezebel called here the Children of her spiritual Whoredom as being brought over to the Apostasie by her subtile Enticements and by the power of those Kings and Princes especially who were of her Communion and thereby had committed Adultery with her 48 From whence it appears that the Apostasie made use of plausible Insinuations to seduce Men to their Communion and an appearance of Piety and Religion 24 But unto you I say and 49 to the rest in Thyatyra that is the Remnant of this Succession which shall continue until I come in my Kingdom Verse 25 26. as many of you I mean as have not held and approved this Idolatrous 50 Doctrine of the Apostasie before-mentioned Verse 20. and which have not known so as to hold and approve the depths 51 of Satan i. e. the Antichristian Mysteries and Policies as 52 they of the pure Church of Thyatira speak or call them I will put upon you no other burthen 53 of Command 49 The Church of Thyatira is distinguished into Two Intervals viz. one before and at the Reformation the other after it which is to last until Christ's Coming in his Kingdom when upon the appearance of that Succession their last works shall be greater than their former The first Interval is denoted here by You that is you who are now in being the second by 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the Rest or the Remnant See Chap. 3 2.11 13. 50 By 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 are meant in Scripture Sentences or Parables and Precepts or Discourses tending to Doctrine and Manners for so the Word is frequently used in the New Testament of which sort there were many false and erroneous ones amongst the Jews as appears from Heb. 13.9 and amongst the Primitive Christians falsly attributed to the Apostles and Apostolical Men. 51 The profound Mysteries such as Transubstantiation and Infallibity and the deep Politick Devices of the Apostasie are called here Satanical Depths in opposition to the Mysteries of Christianity called deep things of God and the Depth Rom. 11.33 1 Cor. 2.10 52 It was the chief Accusation of the Waldenses the pure Christians of this Succession that they called the Papacy Babylon and Antichrist and adapted the Prophecies of this Book to that Church as may be seen in a Treatise put forth by them A. D. 1120. and printed in Perrin's History of them 53 A Phrase taken from Acts 15.28 Where Ordinances or Commandments are called Burthens as they are also Matth. 23.4 And Christ here assures them that he would not charge them with any Injunctions of doing their first Works or repenting as he had done the other Churches but bids them only stick close to what they held and maintained approving thereby their Integrity and Purity 25 But that or those necessary things Acts 15.28 which ye have already believed and held hold fast till I come in my Kingdom 26 And he i. e. that Body of Men or those Persons that overcometh the Corruptions of this State and keepeth my 54 Works or the Precepts and Commandments which I have given them and enabled them to perform unto the end of time when Christ's Kingdom shall come Rev. 10.6 7. to him will I then give power over the 55 Nations or Gentiles that is the Apostasie and their Abettors 54 They are called Christ's Works in opposition to the Depths of Satan which are the Works of the Devil John 8.41 44. And by his Works are meant Holy Worship and Practice and the most vigorous Opposition of the Apostasie 55 As being no better than meer Gentiles by reason of their Idolatry 27 And he or the Saints of this Church-State shall rule them the Antichristian Party and their Abettors with a Rod of Iron that is with just Severity and as the Vessels of a Potter shall they be broken to shivers i. e. their Church-State shall be dissolved easily and irreparably and I will give him power over the Nations even as I received Power of my Father Psalm 2.9 for they shall reign with me 28 And I will give him the 56 Morning-Star i. e. these Witnesses shall first arise and give early Notice of the approaching glorious State of Christ's Kingdom 56 A Phrase made use of by the Holy Ghost in 2 Pet. 1.19 with reference to this very matter where Prophetical Scripture is likened unto a light shining in a dark place which yet notwithstanding its Obscurity was a more sure word then a Private Voice from Heaven and which might be understood notwithstanding the dark state we are in provided they be not interpreted according to our own Natural Vnderstanding called there the VVill of Man nor according to a Private Interpretation but according to the VVill of God speaking in and by the Holy Penmen which is a Publick Interpretation because it is taken from the Common Analogy of Scripture Rom. 12.6 and is agreeable to the VVritings of All the Holy Men of God whose Spiritual Things are to be compared one with another that so we may have a Publick Standard of Interpretation in the Church and because it proceeds although in an ordinary manner from the same (a) 1 Cor. 6-16 12 4. spirit which alone knows the things of God which at first moved the Holy Prophets which is One and agreeable to it self in all its Gifts and Operations and which when it incited them to speak and write gave them not Prophecies of a private Sense as relating only to private and particular persons but which were to be understood in a Publick Sense concerning Christ his Church and Kingdom But although they may be understood by us yet the Apostle tells us that it will not be without great difficulty until the Day shall dawn and the Day Star arise in our Hearts by which the appearance of Christ in his Kingdom is meant who is called Rev. 22.16 the bright and Morning Star the first Dawnings and Approachings of whose Kingdom may be meant by the Morning Star as the Kingdom in its
interpreted thus to come and worship God before thy Feet according to a parallel place of the Apostle 1 Cor. 14.25 10 Because thou hast kept and observed the word 25 or precept of my patience i. e. of the Patience which I taught and practised especially in expecting with me the coming of my Kingdom and that in a low and mean condition I also will keep thee or this Church State entire from the hour or suddain and unexpected time of 26 Temptation or general Tryal which shall come upon all the World to try them that dwell on the Earth whether their Church States are pure or no and to purify some and destroy others Dan. 12.1 Malach. 3.2 3. 2 Pet. 2.9 1 Cor. 3 11.-15 25 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signifies a Precept or Doctrine of Patience in the sense that 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or Word is taken 1 Cor. 1.18 and to keep the Word as the Phrase is frequently used in John's Gospel is to observe that Precept and that chiefly with reference to a patient Expectation of Christ's Coming as the Phrase is taken 2 Thes 3.5 and Rev. 1.9 26 This I suppose is to be understood concerning the pouring out of the Vials as shall be endeavoured to be shewn when they come to be considered 11 Behold I come to try and judg them quickly or on a sudden after this period of the Church begins to appear hold that fast which thou hast received and kept that no man take 27 thy Crown i e. rob thee of that reward thou shalt have in my Kingdom 27 No Churches so perfect but that it is possible for them if left to themselves to be perverted and no Man so nigh the Goal but he may lose the Prize if he be not by the Grace of God made watchful and careful And here we are to observe that these Promises are taken from the New Jerusalem-state in Christ's Kingdom and that they are made after the most ample and plainest manner to this Church-state because of its greatest purity and patience in expecting that Kingdom and its fitness to receive it in the near approach of it in the New Jerusalem 12 For Him that overcometh the temptations of this poor and despised Church State will I make a 28 Pillar in the Temple of my God i. e. he shall be a Member of a strong fixt and stable Church State and he shall go no more out of it for it shall not be changed And I will write 29 upon him or upon this Pillar the Name of my God Jehovah and the Name of the City of my God The Lord is there Ezek. 48.35 which is 30 new Jerusalem i. e. the prefect Gospel State in Christ's Kingdom Hebr. 12.22 which cometh down out of Heaven from my God i. e. shall be established by God's more immediate Power and by abundant Manifestations of Gifts and Graces Ezek. 43.4 5 6 7 8. Gal. 4.26 see on Rev. 21.2 3. and I will write upon him my new Name Rev. 19.16.22 4. i. e. he shall be 31 a Member of my Kingdom who am King of Kings and Lord of Lords See before on verse 8. and Isa 56.5 Rev. 19.12 28 In allusion to the Two Pillars before Solomon's Temple called Iachin and Booz from their strength and stability 1 Kings 7.15 21. The Apostles also are called Pillars Gal. 2.9 and the Church the Pillar of Truth 1 Tim. 3.15 and Christians are compared to a Temple and its Stones or Pillars Eph. 2.21 1 Pet. 2.5 29 This may perhaps be an Allusion to the Inscriptions which were used to be put upon Pillars Hence the Title of the sixteenth Psalm is in the Greek rendred An Inscription upon a Pillar and Absalom's Pillar 2 Sam. 18.18 might have probably his Name graven on it 30 New is often in Scripture put for excellent or perfect And this State may be called New because the visible Glory of it did then first appear and it was a strange or new thing it being known or believed before by few 31 For to be called and to be are of the same import in the Hebrew Phrase 13 He that hath an ear let him hear what the Spirit saith unto the Churches 14 And unto the Angel of the Church of the 32 Laodiceans write these things saith the Amen 33 i. e. The God of Truth Isa 65.16 who will perform what he has promised 2 Cor. 1.20 and will in this period put a final end to all things the Faithful and True Witness who hath performed punctually what hath been hitherto promised by the Father and will go on to do so to the end although the Truths he hath delivered may seem never so incredible Chap. 1.5 the beginning 34 of the Creation of God i. e. of the First Creation of all things and of the New Creation or Constitution of things after the Resurrection of which he was the first Born from the Dead Col. 1.18 Rev. 1 5.21 1. 32 This State succeeds the Philadelphian State and therefore must be after the Thousand Years Kingdom of Christ or the New Jerusalem of which Philadelphia is a Type as appears from Verse 12. It seems to be a State in which there was a great Remissness of the extraordinary Zeal which was shewn in the former Succession during Christ's Kingdom and its Name denoting as Grotius remarks The Judging of the People it may from thence be probably concluded that it is that State during which the great Judiciary Act of Judging the People or Nations is to be performed Rev. 20 8-15 where occasion will be given of discoursing more largely of this Matter It was once a most Famous and Rich City as this Church-state is described to be at the seventeenth Verse but is now only a heap of Ruines and inhabited by none but wild Beasts so that Monsieur Spoon after all his search could not find out where its Church stood Christ having spewed it utterly out of his Mouth 33 Amen signifies Truth and denotes also the End or Conclusion and being put before what follows concerning the beginning of the Creation of God implies that what concerns the End of Church-states is the chief thing typified by this Church 34 Christ is said to be the beginning of the Creation of God 1. Because he was in the beginning with God when all things were made by him John 1.1 as being the first born of every Creature that is being above and before all Creatures whatsoever and the Cause of them Col. 1 15-17 2. because he was the beginning of the New Creation or Constitution of things under the Gospel Col. 1.18 2 Cor. 5.17 and the Author of the New Heavens and New Earth or the New and Excellent State of things in his Kingdom upon Earth And 3. because he is the Beginning the First Born from the dead Colos 1.18 which Title he here takes because this Church-Period extends until the End of all Earthly Things when follows the beginning of the New Creation or Constitution of
and knowest not such is the ignorance of Man when left to himself that thou art wretched or The wretched full of wants and defects and miserable or The miserable in a helpless condition and poor in grace and glory and blind or ignorant seeing not thy wants nor the remedy of them and naked or iâ— a shameful condition in respect of the former now the Bride and her Husband are retired and God dwelleth not with thee Rev. 20 11.21 2 3 4. 39 Here is shewn the Ground of their Lukewarmness and the Reason why Christ would spew them out because they thought that their present State was as Glorious as their former and as much to be chosen as that which had the full Glory of the New Jerusalem 18 And therefore I counsel thee out of my Love to thee verse 19. to buy or obtain and procure of me what I will freely give thee if thou will be sensible of thy own unworthiness and inability of thy self to procure it Isa 55.1 2. Gold tried in the fire i. e. the most precious and most pure Wisdom of my Kingdom in Heaven above Prov. 2 4.3 14. Zeck 13.9 Math. 13.44 45 46. 1 Pet. 1.7 that thou mayest be rich in good and perfect works before God Luke 12.21 1 Tim. 6.17 18. and white raiment i. e. unspotted and perfect Holiness such as is required in my Kingdom that thou mayest be Cloathed with my Righteousness Rev. 19.8 and the shame of thy nakedness or thy shameful nakedness do not appear when I come to Judgment Rev. 20 12-15 and anoint thy eyes with Eye-Salve i. e. with clear knowledg that thou mayst see and discern betwixt the dark and imperfect state thou art in and the glorious entire light and perfection of the former Rev. 21.23 24.22 5. 19 Thou art the Camp of my Saints upon Earth and the beloved City and therefore have I permitted the Nations to gather themselves to Battel against thee and to encompass thee Rev. 20.8 9. for as many as I Love and whom I Love I Love unto the end John 13.1 I rebuke as I have done thee for thy lukewarmness and chasten by afflictions as thou hast been by the coming up of Gog and Magog against thee Rev. 20.8 9. be zealous therefore after a higher and a more glorious state and that in Heaven and repent of thy lukewarmness for to this end have I rebuked and chastened thee 20 And to shew what Love I have for thee Behold and let it be taken special notice of I stand waiting with an unwearied patience at the door of the Heart and Conscience of each person amongst you and 40 knock or use frequent and loud importunities by the motions of my Holy Spirit Cant. 5.2 Prov. 1.20 if any 41 man or any one of the Saints of this beloved City for to them and concerning them I now speak and not of their Church State which I will certainly spew out of my Mouth hear and obey my 40 voice and all that I have loved will do so John 10.27 28 29.13 1. and open the door of his Heart by removing all wilful impediments I who have now withdrawn my glorious presence will come unto him and will sup with him and he with me i. e. I will dwell with him possessing his Soul with my Gifts and Graces and will communicate my self after a friendly and a familiar manner unto him in my Heavenly Kingdom Luke 14.15 John 14.20 23. Rev. 19 9.21 3. 40 40 It was the antient custom to knock and call aloud at the same time 41 Christ before spoke to the Church of Laodicea here he speaks to the Members of it to whom he promises higher and more intimate communications of himself altho he had resolved to ease himself of their imperfect Church State 21 To him or that person that overcometh the evils of this State by hearing and obeying my voice and opening unto me will I grant to sit with 42 me in my Throne in my Kingdom whilst I judg the Nations Satan Death and Hell and then to reign with me to all Eternity John 17 22-24 Rev. 20 8-15 even as I also overcame Temptations Sin Death and Hell and am 43 set down with my Father in his Throne in Heaven John 17.5 42 Here Christ and his Saints are represented as sitting in one and the same Throne in allusion to the Thrones of the antient Eastern Kings which were very large and in the form of a Bed or Couch so that many persons might sit in them at once Cant. 3.7 43 Mr. Mede (a) Pag. 905. observes on this verse that although the glorified Saints are said to sit here with Christ on his Throne that yet none but Christ God-Man is said to sit with the Father on his Throne because no Creature is capable of the priviledge of sitting on God the Father's Right Hand in his Throne that being a Godlike Royalty altogether incommunicable 22 He that hath an ear to hear let him hear what the Spirit saith unto the Churches CHAP. IV. The Text. 1 AFter this * first Prophetick Vision of the Seven Churches I looked or I was seeing 1 in a Prophetical Vision Dan. 4.10 and behold a door was opened in Heaven i. e. a Discovery was made of Divine secrets and the first voice or the former 2 voice of Christ which I heard at first Chap. 1.10 was as of a Trumpet i. e. full of Power and Authority Chap. 1.10 talking with me which said come up hither unto me to have a nearer access to and participation of Heavenly Secrets and I for none else can will shew thee in Symbols and representations things which must be hereafter in a Succession one after another Annotations on CHAP. IV. * The foregoing Vision contained in the Second and Third Chapters may be called The Church-Prophecy because that in it the several successive States and Periods of the Church from the beginning of it at Christ's Resurrection until the Kingdom of Christ and the End of all things are represented under the Types of Churches the most proper Emblem of them and that the following Vision which may be called the Book-Prophecy from its Events being represented in a Book with Seals to which this and the next Chapter are a Preface is of the same signification and extent shall be argued hereafter as occasion shall require and may at present be gathered from some Congruities observable in the Prefaces to each of them as that John is spoken to here by a Trumpet as he was in the former Preface in the first Chapter and is in the like Spiritual Extasie as he was then in which being Circumstances peculiar to these Two Visions may argue them to be of the like Nature and Import And here it is not improper to observe that in this and the following Chapter is chiefly contained 1. A Representation of the Throne Divine Consistory or Court of Judicature of Almighty God which is to pass Judgment upon the State of
thousands i. e. innumerale Heb. 12.22 12 Saying with a loud Voice and suitable affection worthy is the Lamb that was slain to receive the Acknowledgment and Possession of power and Authority over all things especially his Church Matth. 11.27.28 18. John 17.2 and of Riches i. e. the inheritance of all things Heb. 1.2 and of Wisdom to govern his Church as being the Eternal Wisdom of his Father Prov. 3.16 and of strength to conquer his Enemies and honour from all Creatures and glory from his Father John 17.1 5. and blessing from Angels and Saints and all creatures Psalm 145.10 11. Psalm 148. 13 And every 16 Creature Phil. 2.10 which is in Heaven and on the Earth and under the Earth and such as are in the Sea and all that are in them heard I saying Blessing and Honour and Glory and Power be unto him that sitteth upon the Throne and unto the Lamb i e. to God the Father and his Son Christ for ever and ever 16 Even inanimatt Creatures are frequently in Scripture called upon to praise God by a common Figure usual to all Authors and Nations that because they would praise him if they could and are the Objects and Occasions of Praise to Angels and Men and are under the command of God and subservient to his Glory and his Churches good and because the very Order and Beauty of the Creatures especially as they shall be in the Restitution of all things is a Real and Virtual Praising of God And all Creatures Saints and Angels themselves are here brought as making this Acknowledgment to signifie that God and Christ are the alone Objests of Worship and not any Creature whatsoever Exod. 20.4 5. 14 And the four Beasts i. e. the Christian Church said Amen to this new Song i. e. consented and approved of it And after the Christian Church to shew that they received the clear and explicit Knowledge of Chrisi from the Christian Church and to testifie the Agreement there is betwixt the Old and New Testament the Four and Twenty Elders i. e. the Jewish Church fell down and worshipped him 17 that liveth for ever i. e. God the Father 17 Here it is to be observed that as the Christian Church began Chap. 4.8 9. with Hymns and Worship to God the Father so the Jewish Church here Ends after they had joyned with the Christian Church in Praises and Acts of Worship to Christ who has the same Worship here given him with the Father with an Act of Worship to the Father to shew that as all things are Of Him so are they also To Him and His Glory and that the Kingdom is to be delivered up unto him and that all things are to be subject unto him who is All in All 1 Cor. 15 24-28 which is signified by their falling down and worshipping him in token of their Obedience and of the Subjection of all things unto him all Creatures also are as themselves bowing or being subject unto him in the sense that they praise him Psal 2.10 11. CHAP. VI. The Text. 1 AND Christ being now possessed of the Right to his Kingdom and his sole and absolute Power and Dominion having been acknowledged by all Creatures in the former Chapter I saw or was in a Vision when the Lamb i. e. Christ having now the Right and Administration of the Affairs of his Kingdom opened 1 one i. e. the first Chap. 5. 5. of the Seals i. e. he revealed what was before hid and accomplished what was represented under each Seal and I heard as it was the noise or a Clap of 2 Thunder i. e. a powerful and a terrible Voice and efficaciously productive of its Effects See on Chap. 1. 10. 3 one i. e. the first of the four Beasts or the Apostolical Ministry saying Come and see and consider the Mysterious Sculpture which is to be seen in the first Roll of the Book and the great Event represented by it Annotations on CHAP. VI. 1 The Seals are as so many Stops and Delays to Christ's Kingdom and the opening of them signifies not only the making of the Visions known wnich before were concealed whereupon Prophecy is called a sealed Book but also the Effect of every Vision as the Prophet Ezekiel Chap. 12.23 Phrases it or the several Steps and Advances made towards the Kingdom of Christ this being the Book of Christ's Kingdom whirh he opened as King with Power and Authority and by actually effecting the things signified in their due and proper times 2 Hereby is signified the great Power and Efficacy which accompanied the first preaching of the Gospel whence Mark 3.17 James and John are called the Sons of Thunder and the utmost Force of God's Power is called the Thunder of God's Power Job 26.14 3 One as is usual in this Prophecy signifies the first of the Beasts like a Lyon whose Station being in the Eastern part of the Jewish Camp hereby is signified the coming forth of the Gospel from Jerusalem which is in the Eastern parts of the World whence the Gospel was first preached and the first Apostolical Church gathered according to the Prediction of the Prophets Isa 28.16 Micah 4.2 Acts 2.41 2 And I saw and behold I perceiv'd engraven on the first Roll a white 4 Horse signifying the pure and merciful power and conquest of the Gospel Dispensation Psal 45.4 and he 5 i. e. Christ that sat on him i. e. who had the Power and management of that Dispensation had a Bow 6 i. e. the Gospel Psal 45.5 and a Crown was given unto him as King and Conqueror and he went forth from Jerusalem Mic 4.2 conquering 7 by the efficacy of his Gospel and his Ministers and to conquer by degrees untill the completion of his Kingdom Psal 2 6.-8 4 Horses being a swift and warlike Creature according to the admirable Description of them given in Job Chap. 39. the Scripture does signifie by them some active and powerful Dispensation of his Providence brought to pass by his Angels and Ministers the Nature and Quality of which is denoted by the divers Colours attributed to those Horses as appears plainly from Zach. 1.8 10.6.2 3.10 3. Now the Dispensation here pointed at being that of Christ's Kingdom a (a) Bochart Hieros 2.7 white Horse is attributed unto him 1. to denote his Power Princes and Honourable Persons being used to Ride and that on White Beasts whilst Inferiours went on Foot as appears from Judg. 5.10 Eccles 10.7 2. To signifie the Mercifulness of his Conquest Psalm 45.4 Zech. 9 9.10 3. it being usual for Conquerors to ride on white Horses on the Days of Triumph Rev. 19.11 14. 5 That Christ is hereby signified is evident from Rev. 19.11 12 13. compared with Psalm 2. and 45. from whence these Symbols are taken 6 As an Archer with his Bow according to the Description given by the Psalmist 7 12.11 2. first menaces and threatens at a distance before he shoots so Christ first appeared with a peaceable
arrived to and that his Kingdom should have appeared of Right at those times if a stop had not been put to it according to the determinate Counsels of God and Christ's Submission unto them Dan. 12.7 For the Kingdom of Christ which should have come in its Glory upon the Ascension of our Saviour was retarded by the Times allotted to Paganism and Antichristianism and was thereupon delayed until the Time of the End Dan. 12. Only Christ at some certain seasons puts in as it were his Claim to his Kingdom by some more than ordinary Appearances of it Now the Appearance here referred to seems to be plainly that of the Christian Church under the Christian Empire which was the next remarkable Event after the Fall of Paganism described at the close of the foregoing Chapter and was so glorious a one that it might justly be described by the State of the Kingdom it self Paganism having been overthrown by it the Church delivered from Persecution and exalted into an unexpected and sudden State of Prosperity and the Man of Sin withheld for some time 2 Thes 2.6 7. And yet becxuse this glorious State of things would not continue long in purity but would be soon corrupted by Pride and Ambition and by the bringing in of Pagan Rites into the Church under the Specious Pretences of a well-meaning Prudence and Zeal therefore it pleased God to give an intimation of this early Corruption by sealing a pure Church even before he gives the glorious appearance of the Visible Church that a competent Number of sealed Witnesses might be set apart and preserved betimes in purity and integrity before their Minds could be corrupted by the Glory and Honours of this Exalted Church and by the Mystery of iniquity which had been working in secret for a long time and was advanced to a Satanical Synagogue even in the foregoing times of Persecution 24 Whereby is pointed out the great Number of Professors in the Christian Empire 25 A Psalm is the Symbol of Victory amongst all Nations whence in Ezekiel's Vision of the Temple Ch. 40 and 41. Palm Trees are so often mentioned which signifie the Conquests True Christians are to make over Sin and Persecution and the Conquest they had now gained over Paganism 10 And cryed with a loud 26 Voice to denote the Affectionateness and the Publick Freedom of their Worship saying 26 Salvation be unto our God i. e. let the Glory of our Deliverance be ascribed unto him the sole Author of it Psalm 3.8 Hos 13.4 which sitteth upon the Throne and unto the Lamb the sole Purchaser of it to them alone let it be given and not unto our own Merits or any Creature 26 26 Hereby also is intimated the Publick Freedem of Worship they enjoyed in the Christian Empire and their Deliverance from their Persecutors 11 And all the Angels stood round about the Throne and about the Elders and the four Beasts and fell before the Throne on their Faces and worshipped God i. e. all the whole Church consisting of Angels Patriarchs Prophets Apostles Jews and Christians Heb. 12 22-24 joyned in the Praise of God 12 Saying Amen Blessing and Glory and Wisdom and Thanksgiving and Honour and Power and Might be unto our God for ever and ever Amen Chap. 4 8-11.5 11-14 13 And one or the first of the Elders or Representatives of the Jewish Church now fully instructed by the Christian and one with it answered or said Matth. 11.25 saying unto me to excite my enquiry after a thing worthy of it and out of a desire to inform me what are these that are arrayed in white Robes and whence came they 14 And I said unto him Sir thou knowest for I do not and am desirous to be taught by thee And he said unto me these are they which came out of 27 the great Tribulation and have 28 washed their Robes i. e. their imperfect performances Luke 15.22 Rev. 19.8 and made them 29 white or pure and shining in the Blood of the Lamb Christ i. e. they are purified delivered and rewarded by Gods acceptance of their actions and sufferings upon Christ's Merits Isa 52.1 27 With reference to the New Jerusalem State this Tribulation noted with a double Greek Article The Tribulation The Great to shew the Remarkableness of it refers to the Days of extraordinary Trouble mentioned Dan. 12. Matth. 24. Mark 9. and Luke 21. which shall precede Christ's Kingdom perhaps at the pouring forth of the seventh Vial and the Earthquake attending it from which the Saints shall be delivered but with reference to the Christian Empire it has a relation to the Ten Days Tribulation under Diocletian mentioned Chap. 2.10 from which they were delivered by Constantine and to their Escape from out of the Great Day of God's Wrath against Paganism Chap. 6.17 28 These are the Saints and Martyrs who had white Robes given them Chap. 6.11 and were bid to tarry in expectation of Christ's Kingdom which they and their Successors here enjoy whereby is set forth the Advancement of the before Persecuted Church and of its Confessors and Witnesses 29 They are made White or Shining by his Blood as Wooll receives a more Noble and shining Colour by being died in Purple And here is an Allusion to Joshua's Change of filthy Garments and his putting on White and Clean Priestly Vestments as these Saints do here in Christ's Kingdom in which they are Priests unto God and Christ. 15 Threfore because they persevered under Persecution and trusted in Christ's Merits are they before the Throne of God in communion with him and under his particular care in a State of Prosperity and serve him 30 Day and Night i. e. continually and incessantly in his Temple of the New Jerusalem in the General Assembly and Church of the First-born and he that sitteth on the Throne i. e. God shall dwell among them or pitch his Tent amongst them i. e. they shall be his people and he will afford them his continual Presence Conduct aad Defence Isa 4. Ezek. 48.35 John 1.14 Rev. 3 12.21 3. 2 Cor. 6.16 Levit. 26.12 30 A Metaphor taken from the constant Service and Attendance of the Priests and Levites in the Temple some of which were always present in it Day and Night 1 Chron. 9.33 Psal 135.1 2. Luke 2.37 16 They shall hunger no more neither thirst any more that is they shall always enjoy God's Ordinances and his Gifts and Graces Isa 49.10 John 4.13.6 27. neither shall the 31 Sun light on them nor any scorching heat i. e. they shall be delivered from Persecutions and Sufferings Isa 49.10 Psalm 121.6 7. 31 The Jews express all manner of inconveniencies by Heat because of its Extremity in those Eastern parts both from the Sun and burning Winds Jonas 4.9 17 For the Lamb which is in or about the midst of the Throne i. e. Christ shall feed them and shall lead them as a good Shepherd Psalm 24.1 4. John 4 10-14 and 21 15-17 unto
Rev. 17.12 And therefore about half of that space seems here to be signified by about half an hour which will reach from 395 unto 437 which is about the half of this whole Line of Time and falls upon that Time when the Barbarous Nations who had been before often successfully repulsed began to make their most Furious Impressions upon the Roman Provinces on all sides under the weak Government of a Woman Placidia the Empress and her Son Valentinian who was a Child when he began to Reign insomuch that Genserick came then to be so powerful as that he severely persecuted the Orthodox from the very Year (b) Ricciol Chronol 437. unto 476. when he died And furthermore it is very remarkable that about 430 and odd the Apostasy which began in Image-Worship about 360. palpably increased as Mr. (c) Pag. 589. Mede has observed So that the Year 437. is very remarkable on all Hands as being about the middle Point or about half of the whole Hour or Aera reaching from the entire Defeat of Heathenism to the entire Fall of the Western Empire and because it may be justly accounted the Exact Year from which the actual sounding of the Trumpets are to be reckoned which were but in preparation from 395. until that time and also because it may be with great Reason thought to be the beginning of the Antichristian Apostasy which from that time generally increased until it gained a Kingdom with the Ten Kings arising out of the Ruines of the Roman Empire A.D. 476. and that at One Hour that is One entire Hour made up of Two Halves the first reaching from 395 to 437. the latter at the End of which this Kingdom began from thence to 476. See on Chap. 11 2.13.5.17 12. 12 The Fourth Kingdom which is the Roman Empire is called Dan. 7.23 The Kingdom upon the Earth to distinguish it from Christ's Kingdom the Heavenly and Everlasting Kingdom and Luke 2.1 it is called all the World or Earth because most of the then Known World was subject to it 13 It is the Opinion of Mr. Mede that by the Fourth of the Earth Chap. 6.8 is meant almost all the Roman Empire which upon due Compute says Dr. Moor was then one third part of the Earth upon which account they take the Third part to be the Symbolical and Cabbalistical Character of the Roman Empire according to the Genius of this Mystical Book and the Custom of the Ancient Eastern Nations who gave Characters from Numbers and Proportions But to interpose a Conjecture not altogether groundless I am apt to imagine that as the Roman Empire is called the Fourth Chap. 6.8 whilst it had its Imperial Seat fixed at Rome the Head then of the Fourth Kingdom So that after Constantine removed the Seat of the Western Empire to Constantinople it is called the Third because its Imperial Seat was then in the Greek or Eastern part of the Roman Empire which was the Third Kingdom of the Earth in Daniel From which time Constantinople or New Rome became the Chief Seat of the Civil Empire Old Rome being abandoned to the New Ecclesiastical Empire of the Pope the Western Emperours seldom coming at it and by degrees leaving it to them So that even the Western Empire may be Charactered by the Third because that Old Rome the Chief Seat of it and of the Transactions of this Vision had lost its Civil Imperialism over the Fourth part of the Earth and was now forced to truckle to the third part or Constantinopolitan Roman Empire where the Chief Majesty of the Empire was seated Old Rome being never able to gain its Preheminence and the Ruin of its Civil Jurisdiction being owing to this Action of Constantine which will appear also the more probable if we consider that the Rise and Fall of Empires is dated in Prophecy from the like Fate of the Imperial Seats of them See Chap. 9 15.12 4. 14 This is taken from Exod. 9.25 where we read that the Thunder Storm of Hail smote every Herb of the Field and broke every Tree of the Field By which is here signified all the Members and People of the Roman Empire denoted by Metaphors taken from those things which suffer most by Storms And Trees here according to the Prophetical Scheme of Speech signifie the Great Ones and Grass by the like Analogy signifies the Common People 8 And the second Angel sounded and as it were a great 15 Mountain or City Jerem. 51.25 burning with fire was cast into the Sea and the third part of the Sea i. e. the Roman Empire became Blood 16 i. e. was ravaged with bloody Wars Exod. 7.17 18. 15 This Type is taken from Jerem. 51.25 where it is used concerning Babylon by which all along in this Book Rome is understood A Mountain denotes a Kingdom or a City from its Strength and Lofty Edifices and Towers as Annotators have observed on Isa 13.2 Jerem. 51.25 Zechar. 4.7 And the Sea signifies a Body Politick because Seas are in Scripture-Phrase a gathering together of Waters which in this Book are put to denote People and Multitudes as appears from Chap. 18.15 And therefore by the Type in this Verse the Confusions and Desolations represented by the Psalmist Psalm 46.2 by Mountains carried into the midst of the Sea which the State and City of Rome then lay under may be fitly signified it being at this time as a great Mountain burning in the Sea but not actually burnt that is in a consuming Condition but not utterly destroyed For 1. (a) Zosim Oros August Civit. 5. 23. Radagaisus was entirely defeated by Stilicho and he himself and almost his whole Army was destroyed by Sword or Famine Stilicho being made an Instrument by God of preserving the Empire when he designed nothing but his own Interest and the usurping of it which appeared also in another Memorable Instance when he (b) Zosim Oros Hieron Rubeus Hist Raven lib. 2. saved the Empire from total ruine by succouring Saul the General of the Army under him at the very time that he was put to flight by Alarick 2. When (a) Oros lib 7. Socrat. 7.10 Sozom. 9 6-9 Jornand Cap. 30. Alarick took Rome he sackt indeed and rifled it but burnt only some part of it and that contrary to the wonted Custom of the Goths as Jornandes hath particularly observed and left the large Church of Peter entire for an Asylum for the Christians 3. When Athaulphus the Goth not long after had pillaged Rome and was resolved entirely to root out the whole Roman Power he was opportunely diverted by Placidia the Emperour's Sister and perswaded to make a (b) Petav. Ration Temp. lib. 6. Peace and retire into Spain where he married her A. D. 414. 4 Attila the Hun and Genserick the Vandal were both hindered from firing and destroying Rome by the Eloquence and Prudent Behaviour of Leo the Great And (c) Procop. pag 359 360 398 474. ex ed.
Continent which lay Eastward of them and by Sea whatsoever lay to the West Continent as well as Sea Which way of Speech is to this day Observed by the Chinese who upon that account call all the World except Tartary Si Yam or the VVestern Sea from whence Siam a Countrey in the Indies takes it's Name as being Situated towards the Sea Westerly of China And therefore by this action of our Saviour seeing that in all other Places of Scripture the Earth is mentioned before the Sea may be Intimated that the Gospel which was now almost extinguished in the Eastern parts by Mahometism Should appear First in its Purity and Strength in the Sea or the VVestern Parts of the World signified by the mention of the Sea in the First Place and by Christ's putting his right Foot upon it the Strongest and the Honourablest of the two Which came to pass at the Reformation foretold in this Vision as shall beshewn hereafter And that there sbould be in the latter Days which Doctor Pocock (a) On Hosea 3.5 Pag. 618. extends from Christs First to his Second Coming some Wonderfull and Amazing motion of the People of God from the VVest is evident from Hosea 11.10 Where the Prophet foretells that the Lord shall roar like a Lion an Expreson which very Remarkably Answers to the Roaring and Thundring in this Vision and that thereupon or then the Children shall tremble from the VVest or from the (b) Dr. Pâ—cock on the Place Sea as the Word in the Hebrew Signfies that is from the VVestern Parts and from Remote and Distant Countreys and even the uttermost parts of the Earth which is encompassed with the Sea Which strange motion or conversion is to come to pass near Christ's Second Coming which Dr. Pocock asserts to be a Received Opinion as to the Jews in his Kingdom which was to have appeared when Christ set his Right Foot upon the Sea if the Thunders the Effect of the Lord 's Roaring had not been sealed that is if a stop had not been put to the Efficacy of them for Christ's Kingdom when it comes in its full force will prevail to the placing of the Jews in their Houses Verse 11. and to the bringing in the fulness and perfection of the Gentiles 3 And cried with a loud Voice i. e. proclaimed his Right as when a Lion 8 roareth i. e. terribly and with Majesty Isa 31.4 Amos 3.8 Joel 3.16 Prov. 20.2 and when he had cryed seven Thunders 9 uttered their Voices declaring the appearance of his Kingdom 8 Christ called the Lion of the Tribe of Judah Rev. 5.5 is here understood whose Roaring denotes as Dr. Pocock has shewn upon Hos 11.10 the Efficacious power of the preaching of the Gospel resembled to the Voice of a Lyon because of its calling Christians together to partake of it and its Promises as the Lyon does those of its own kind to partake of the prey and because it is accompanied with a Terror and an Awe and extends it self to the uttermost parts of the Earth with great power as the Voice of a Lyon is terrible and loud And hereby also as appears from the Texts I have quoted is signified the Anger of God when he appears for the Vindication of his Kingdom against the Enemies of it 9 Thunders as I have before shewn on Chap. 6 1.8 5. signifie the Power and Efficacy and signal Appearances of Christ's Kingdom which Seven the Number of Perfection peculiarly denotes and which Hannah prophesied would be exalted by the Lord's Thundering out of Heaven 1 Sam. 2.10 4 And when the seven Thunders had uttered their Voices I was about to write that which they had uttered and I heard a Voice from Heaven saying unto me 10 Seal up those things which the Seven Thunders uttered and write them not i. e. conceal them as things which are to come to pass hereafter and hinder them from coming immediately into Effect Dan. 8 26.12 4 9. 10 Here Sealing and Writing are plainly opposed Writing signifying the bringing of the Vision into Effect and Sealing the delaying of the Acccmplishment of it as I have shewn on Chap. 5.1 So that here is a plain stop put to the Kingdom of Christ insomuch that his Roaring did not prevail to make the Children come trembling from the West 5 And the Angel which I saw stand upon the Sea and upon the Earth lifted up his hand to Heaven the Throne of God in the posture and manner of Swearing Gen. 14.22 Dan. 12.7 6 And swore by him that liveth for ever and ever who created Heaven and the things that therein are and the Sea and the things which are therein i. e. by the Eternal Omnipotent God who created all things and therefore can alter them and their Times and Seasons that there should be such time 11 no longer as that which the Prophet Daniel foretold Chap. 7 25.12 7. 11 Time in general here called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is divided by Daniel into several distinct 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is appointed Times or Seasons which he calls Time Times and the Dividing of Time or a part that is an half of Time which Distribution is also used in this Book Chap. 12.14 By Time is meant in Daniel the most signal and perfect part of the appointed Times and seasons viz. a Year as appears from Dan. 4.16 and 11.13 where Times plainly signifie Years By Times absolutely put must be meant Two Times or Two Years because it is the Dual Number i. e. the next Plural Number to Time or One Year and then by consequence by The Division or cutting off or Half of Time must be meant Half a Year as I think all Interpreters agree Now The Prophetical Day being put for a Year in Scripture the Prophetical Year must by consequence be put for a Year of Prophetical Days that is a year of years consisting of as many years as a Year doth of Days viz. of Three hundred and Sixty Years in round and equal Numbers according to the degrees of a Circle and then (a) 360 a Time 720 Times 180 half a Time 1260. Times must be Two Years of Years i.e. Seven hundred and Twenty Years and the half Time must be half a year of years that is One hundred and Eighty Years all which amounts to Twelve hundred and Sixty Years Rev. 11 3.12 6. Now Christ's Oath here having a clear reference to Daniel 12.7 by no more Time must be meant no more such Time or of the same Nature with the Times there given to Antichrist which were to cease and no more time to be except when Christ's Kingdom appeared which is the import of the following Verse when there should be Time indeed but of a quite different Nature dated and reckoned from the glorious Reign of Christ and not from the Abominations and Servitude of Antichrist and ending in that which is not so properly Time as the completion and perfection of it Eternity For
in the foregoing Chapter For the Spirit here affording us a Prophetical View of a Series of Events in their orderly Succession it cannot be thought that so great a one as the Reformation should not at all be mentioned or if it were that it should not be mentioned in its proper and due place and season Now allowing but Threescore and Four Years as a space of Repentance allotted by God Chap. 9.20 21. which comes nigh the term of the years of his Indignation against Jerusalem Zech. 1.12 for the correcting although not killing of the Western Apostasy by the great Success of the Turks and the next thing Remarkable is the Reformation begun by Luther A. D. 1517. when at his first preaching against Indulgences he out of a small Spark kindled such a Fire as set all Europe in a Combustion as (a) Ration Temp. lib. 9. 11. Petavius speaks who also remarks that in the same year which is pitched upon generally by Chronologers for the Aera of the Reformation Sleidan beginnning his Commentaries at it at the Conclusion of the Lateran Council an Expedition against the Turks was resolved upon for the carrying on of which Indulgences (b) Fox's Book of Mart. Vol. 2. pag. 47. Mezeray pag. 562. were pretended to have been granted Upon which it is that Mezeray observes that the First Evil meaning the Turks gave occasion for the Birth of the Second Evil as he calls the Reformation Now upon the great success of the Turks at a Time when Selymus had made extraordinary preparations against the Christians and just before the appearance of that great and successful Warriour Selyman the Magnificent who over-run Hungary and bâ—sâ—â—ged Vienna it self it pleased God to give Birth to the Reformation which was not only to be a Scourge although of another yet not of a less Formidable Nature than the Turkish to the Western Apostasy for its impenitency but also a most Notable Apperance of the Kingdom of Christ whereby there might be a Recompence made for the Loss Christianity in general had suffered by the destruction of the Eastern Church For although that was sufficiently made up in the true Value and intrinsick Worth of the Reformation yet God for the sake of his Son's Name is so far tender of Christianity as not to let the Turk destroy the Western Empire by taking Rome or even Vienna it self because it is the Seat of the Christian Emperour as appears from the Vain Attempts of Solyman A.D. 1529. and A.D. 1532. when he fled out of (a) Bizarus de reb Persicis pag. 360 361. Hungary the Vengeance of God following him in a dreadful Plague and from their late Defeat fresh in our Memory And by the Reformation also Christ was pleased to intimate That Cbristians were not to despond at the great progress of Mahometism as if it had been such an extraordinary Encroachment upon his Kingdom seeing that was of a quite different Nature from that Religion generally professed in the parts of the Eastern and Western Empire which were over-run by it and was rather of such a pure and spiritual Nature as that of which the Reformation had given a Specimen 2. The Reformation is here meant because then it might be truly sworn that Time should be no longer that being so great a Breach upon the Power given to Antichrist that it could not happen during his Times But if it be said that his Time could not be then sworn to be past because his Power still remains It may be answered that by Time here in the 6th Verse cannot be meant all Time whatsoever in general but such Divisions as are made of it Dan. 12.7 into Time Times and a half and that therefore when the Time Times and any the smallest part of the half Time was past it might be then truly affirmed that Time that is such Time should be no longer Half Time broken and diminished being no longer in propriety of Speech Half Time and the Time and Times being already wholly past And that the full Expiration and Actual End of all manner of Antichristian Time cannot be here understood is plain from the next Verse where it is affirmed that this is not to come to pass until the Voice of the Seventh Angel And from hence it is that a Worthy Person asserts That this Oath took place as soon as ever Half Time was entred and the first minutes of it were past because that was the first opportunity in which it could be in Truth declared that such Times sbould be no more which Christ laid hold on to give a timely notice of his approaching Kingdom and to lay a Claim to it as he had done before at other Apperances and that space enough might be afforded for the Transactions to be performed in the Remaining Parts of Half Time Now if the half Time began at (a) 1517 180 1697 1517. then seeing that consists of One hundred and Eighty Years it must end together with the whole twelve hundred and sixty years at 1697. when the Seventh Trumpet shall sound and all things shall tend to the finishing of the Mystery of Christ's Kingdom according to Verse 7 which must also according to the same Reason have begun A. D. 437. for there the Aera of the twelve hundred and sixty years must be fixed if we reckon backward from (b) 1517 437 1080 1080 437 1517 1517. deducting from it One thousand and Eighty Years the full Sum of the Time and Times then elapsed 3. The Action of Christ's setting his Right Foot upon the Sea agrees very well to the Circumstances of the times when the Reformation began and to the Events which have followed upon it For it began in the Western parts viz. Europe fignified by the Sea as I have already shewn and when the New Western World of America was just found out which was first attempted by Columbus A. D. 1492. and discovered by Americus Vesputius AD. 1498. the Streights and Sea of Magellan being found A. D. 1518. the very year after the beginning of the Reformation upon which there followed continually large discoveries and a New World whither the Gospel hath been carried and where the Reformation hath found a Refuge and made a considerable progress All which seems to be the Effect of Christ's setting his Foot upon those places whereby he took possession of the whole Globe and made a passage for his Kingdom through the Sea extending it to the utmost parts of the Earth 4. The Reformation was a remarkable and powerful appearance of Christ's Kingdom and therefore may be very well here specified by the magnificent appearance of Christ by his coming down from Heaven by his having a Book open by his loud Voice by his Roaring and the Seven Thunders By all which are signified in Scripture as I have already hinted some remarkable manifest and efficacious appearances of Christ's Kingdom For the Reformation was as (a) In Prefat Apolog· Sleidan truly
observes one of the most Illustrious Events which has come to pass and not to be parallell'd since the Apostles times which none can think of without astonishment and the utmost degrees of admiration and wonder there being in it great Discoveries made of God's Almighty Power and admirable Counsels which being designed as the Creation and all his providential Works are chiefly with reference to his Son's Kingdom he hath been pleased to give us Visible Marks and Characters of it in the Reformation such as are 1. The Agreement and Consent which there was in the Substantials of Doctrine at first betwixt the Reformers Vnity (a) John 17 11-23 Eph. 4.3 4. in truth being a Mark of Christ's Kingdom and one of the most powerful external means to convert the World For this great Work was begun about the same time in two distant places by Luther in Germany and by Zuinglius at Zurich and although they held no Communication with one another Zuinglius on purpose abstaining from reading of Luther's Books when they began to be common amongst them yet they differed in no Doctrine of any very considerable moment as the French Historian (b) Pag. 946. Mezeray confesses concerning the Protestants in general but in that of the Sacrament where also their difference was not so great but that they both (c) Sleidan pag. 97 121 159. edit Anglic. agreed in the Substance of the Article that Christ's Body was taken spiritually with the Heart and not corporally with the Mouth and resolved at a Conference they had about it to refrain from all Contention concerning the manner how Christ was present in the Sacrament Whereby it came to pass that the people amongst whom Luther 's Writings were at last common by hearing and reading of them did see the same Spirit in both of them according to the Scriptures and did submit the more willingly to the Truth although it seemed something New to them which was Zuinglius's Design in abstaining from reading of Luther's Books as (a) Melchior Adam Vita Zuingl pag. 28. Melchior Adamus particularly testifies in his Life 2. The Reformation began on a sudden with a surprise and at unawares when men were most secure and were the least prepared for it which are the Signs of the coming of Christs Kingdom in Scripture Matth. 24 36-51 1 Thes 5.3 For Leo (b) Father Paul's History of the Council of Trent pag. 4 5.9 Fascicul rerum expetend passim Bishop of Meauxe's History of Variat pag. 1 â— the tenth was then Pope a most Voluptuous Libertine as loose in his Religion as his Manners whose Example also was followed by almost the whole Clergy who were then as the Popish Writers of those Times unanimously confess very ignorant and very vicious And the Church also was then at ease and quiet the Schism as Father Paul speaks being absolutely extinguished and no considerable Adversary appearing When all on a sudden whilst the Pope was at rest in his House and flourishing in his Palace dissolved in Ease and Luxury the Reformation broke out to his great astonishment and disquiet at an unexpected time and by an Accident very observable his Factors being then busie in selling Indulgences to supply his excessive Prodigality and to raise a Portion for his Sister All which came to pass according to what the Scripture has assured us That when Men say Peace and Safety then sudden Destruction cometh upon them and that the coming of the Son of Man shall be when Men are eating and drinking marrying and giving in marriage and so was it at this his remarkable coming 3. The Reformation proceeded from small beginnings and yet made a wonderful progress in a short time notwithstanding the most powerful Endeavours to the contrary being sometimes carried on by Men who designed nothing less and by Means and to Ends unthought of even by those who begun it Which are plain Characters of the Kingdom of Heaven in (a) Matth. 13. Mark 4.26 27. Scripture which is likened to a Grain of Mustard-Seed the least of all Seeds which yet when it is grown up is the greatest of all Herbs and to Seed sown in the ground which springs and grows up and yet the Sower himself knoweth not how For (b) Father Paul's Hist of Counc of Trent pag. 6-12 15 17. 71. Sleidan in Prefat pag. 31. Luther was a Person of no great Fame or Interest who designed at first only to preach against the Scandalous Abuses of Indulgences and was carried on contrary to his Expectation from one Controversie to another and against his first Inclinations and Resolutions chiefly by the forward Oppositions of his Adversaries he having often professed that he was ready to let the Cause fall if his Enemies would but permit him And if some few (c) Father Paul's Hist pag. 20-23 Bishop Burnet's Histor Reform part 1. pag. 255. things had been at first granted which Pope Hadrian was inclinable to but was diverted from his purpose by others it is generally thought that a stop had been put to the Reformation But God ordered things otherwise making the sins of Men subservient to his Will as is apparent from the Actions of Henry the Eighth who intended (d) Fox's Rook of Martyrs Vol. 2. pag. 273. Vol. 3. pag. 92. nothing less at first than the throwing of the Pope's Power and seems in all his Actions to be lead on by Providential Circumstances to do that which he least designed But as its Beginnings were mean and contemptible so was its Progress (e) Sleidan 133. 160. Basnage Histoir de la Religion pag. 421. wonderful for by the year 1532. Seven Princes and Twenty Four Cities had received Luther's Doctrine and as Erasmus tells us it had spread all over Germany and had stretched it self from the Ocean as far as Switzerland Neither did it contain it self only within Germany but the sound of it reached Sweden and Denmark the former receiving the Reformation A.D. 1525. the latter A. D. 1537. and its progress was so sudden and so swift rouzing the whole World as Erasmus speaks of it out of its Lethargy that I could never think of it without reflecting upon the Question made by our Honest Martyrologist John (a) Vol. 2. pag. 80. Fox viz. how it should come to pass that although the Romish Bishop hath had great Enemies and Gainsayers continually from time to time both speaking and working preaching and writing against him yet notwithstanding never any could prevail before the coming of Luther To which weighty Question although he gives there several good Conjectural Resolutions as he calls them yet the Chief Reason is to be assigned to the Thunders and Voices which were then uttered and to the wonderful Efficacy which prophetical Times and Seasons have upon the Affairs of Christ's Church it being Necessary as Father (b) History pag. 4. Paul judiciously observes upon this very occasion for the effecting of any thing that the time come
Resurrection Matth. 27 51.28 2. 43 Which is called Earth in this Prophecy 44 By 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 may be meant 1. The Tenth part of the City 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 being understood and then it may denote Rome as under the Papacy which Mr. Mede supposes to be the Tenth part of Old Rome or rather because it is doubted whether Mr. Mede's Dimensions of Old and Modern Rome be exact some One most Notable Kingdom of the Ten into which the Western Roman Empire was divided as is observed on Chap. 17. Whereby the Kingdom of France may most peculiarly be denoted which was the Tenth part of the City that is the last of those Ten Kingdoms which arose out of the Ruines of the Roman Empire and gave their Power to the Beast as may be seen in the Catalogue of them given by the Judicious and Learned Author of the Book de (a) Pag. 17. Excidio Antichristi Or 2. By the Tenth of the City may rather be meant the whole Papal Jurisdiction called the Tenth because it is symbolized in Prophecy by Ten Toes Ten Horns Ten Kings united under the Papacy as will be shewn on Chap. 17. For 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 may signifie not the tenth part of the City but the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or Decem-Principality the State of the Antichristian Jurisdiction or City after it came to have Ten Kings as 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Chap. 6.8 signifies not the fourth part of the Earth but the fourth Earthly Kingdom or Monarchy which is a Sense of the Phrase more comprehensive than the former and more suitable to the symbolical Genius of this Prophecy And it is said to fall that is to be ruined and destroyed in the Commotion as Babylon is said by the Prophets to be fallen or destroyed 45 In the Greek it is were slain Names of Men seven thousand By Names of Men as Dr. Moor observes may be meant Titles Dignities Offices and Orders of Men by which they are named and distinguished or the Men themselves who were Men of Name or Repute upon those and such like Accounts as Vile or Base Men on the contrary are called Men of No Name Job 30.8 And by seven Thousand of them being slain is meant that there shall be a Perfect Total and Solid Overthrow of the Popish Hierarchy and Jurisdiction which shall entirely be slain or cease to be what it was before which is signified by Seven a Perfect Number multiplied into a Thousand a Cubical Solid Number as 1 Kings 19.17 18. from whence this Expression is taken God saith that he had seven thousand left in Israel That is a perfect Number of pure Worshippers reserved entire in secret See Notes on Chap. 1 4. 7 4 5. 9 5. 20 4. 46 To give Glory to God is to confess their Faults and acknowledge the Righteousness and Justice of God in his Punishments as Achan did Josh 7. 19 20. and Nebuchadnezzar Dan. 4 34-37 and thereupon to Honour and Worship him after his own manner and to forsake their former Idolatry Rom. 1.21 25. 14 The second Wo 47 of the sixth Trumpet viz. Turkish Mahometism chap. 8 13 9 12 is past already and behold the third 47 Wo viz that of the sevenâ—h Trumpet upon Antichrianism chapters 14.15.16 cometh quickly 47 into event and execution after the second is past upon the sounding of the seventh Angel chap. 10 7. 11 15. 47 The First Wo is that of the Locusts or Saracens the Second of the Horsemen of Euphrates or the Turkish Mahometans the Third is the Wo of the seventh Trumpet or Angel upon Antichristianism which is largely related in some of the following Chapters And in this Verse is plainly asserted 1. That during or rather after the Earthquake and the Effects of it upon the Ascent of the VVitnesses into Heaven the second Wo or Turkish Mahometism should pass off and that more particularly from the Grecian Churches and their Empire or Imperial Seat For it is here said after the Vision of those Events that the second Wo is past that is it was then past in Vision and consequently was to pass off in the Event and Completion at the time immediately following the fulfilling of the foregoing Vision 2. That the Third Wo of the seventh Angel upon Antichristianism was to follow quickly upon the passing off of the second VVo that is upon its ceasing to be a Wo or a Scourge to Antichristianism for which End it was designed by God who will then inflict Woes of another Nature upon them And 3. That the Effects of the seventh Trumpet shall not take up any long time in their accomplishing but shall be performed with speed and of a sudden which may perhaps be the meaning of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 for as a Judicious Person hath acutely observed the sixth Trumpet comes immediately after the Fifth as well as the seventh after the sixth and therefore it cannot be distinguished from the others by its immediate Succession which is common to them all but by the speed of its Motions and the quickness of its Events 15 And the seventh 48 Angel sounded and there were great or loud voices of acknowledgment of the Kingdom of Christ and of Thanksgiving for it in Heaven or in the Heavenly pure state of the Christian Church num 41. saying The Kingdoms of this World are becometh Kingdoms of our Lord God the Father and of his Son Christ and he shall reign for ever 49 and ever Dan. 2 44. 7 14 18 26 27. 48 Seven is a Number of Perfection and hath a reference in this Vision to the Kingdom of Christ which is here foretold should come upon the sounding of the seventh Angel and is to consist not in destroying but in reducing the Kingdoms of this World that is the several Civil Governments of it to a Constitution suitable to Christ's Gospel whereby they become his Kingdoms and in Christ's Reign over these Kingdoms thus modelled which shall be for ever and ever That is to the End of all succeeding time here upon Earth no other Empire or Kingdom being to succeed it 1 Cor. 15 24-29 But of this we shall have Opportunity to discourse more fully hereafter or the three last Chapters 49 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 (a) Dr. Hammond on Matth. 24.3 and Luke 1.70 signifies in Scripture an Age of the VVorld or some eminent Period of it more particularly that of the Jewish Church and State and therefore by 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 seems here to be denoted the End of all the Periods or Divisions of Time consummated in that of the Messias which is called the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 VVorld or Age to come by the Jews 16 And the four and twenty 50 Elders or representatives of the Jewish Church chap. 4. 4 9 10 which sat before God on their seats in a posture of Authority as being to reign with Christ yet fell upon their Faces with great humility and reverence and worshipped God
which it came to be called the third part whereupon the Grecian Monarchy was cast to the ground it 's very Seat and Power becoming thereupon Roman Constantine (b) Cave's Introduct to the Lives of the Fathers vol. 2. pag. 13. Rycaut's Pref. to the Lives of the Popes commanding by a Law that it should be called New Rome and having Peopled it with the best Families he could draw from Old Rome and the Inhabitants of it being called Romans 13 Here is implied that the fourth Empire Subdued all the rest and bore Rule over all the Earth after it had Subdued the Grecian Monarchy which stood in competition with it according to what was foretold by Daniel chap. 2. 39 40. 7 7 19 32. 14 This refers to the Persecutions which fell upon the Christian Church by the Instigation of the Devil and his Instruments in the Roman Empire especially to their last and most cruel Effort in the ten Years Persecution under Dioclesian when the Woman was as it were teeming with a Glorious Church State in a Christian Empire which was brought forth under Constantine as a short Specimen and imperfect Representation of the Kingdom of Christ as hath been shewn on chap. 7 9.-17 5 And yet notwithstanding all his opposition Psal 2. she brought forth a 15 Manchild i. e. Christ reigned then as King and Lord of his Church and there was on Earth a lively and manly representation of him and his Kingdom for a short time Psal 2.7 8. Is 9 6.66 7 8. Acts 4 23.-30 who was to rule all Nations with a rod of Iron i. e. was to have an universal Kingdom Psalm 2 8-12 and her Child was caught 16 up unto God and to his Throne i. e. Christ and his Kingdom were advanced and his Church was in a State typical of his glorious Kingdom which yet not long continued Psal 110.1 15 Here the Kingdom of Christ is plainly set forth in Expressions chiefly taken from the second Psalm which contains a Description of it as all Interpreters agree And by the Man-child is meant 1. Christ himself who is said to be brought forth or born because he at this time obtained as King of his Church a Conquest over Paganism and a great increase to his Kingdom whereby he was begotten in the Phrase of the Psalmist Psalm 2.6 7 8. that is the holy Child Jesus was manifested and declared to be Lord and King 2. The Church and Christian Empire under Constantine may be called the Man-child as Cyrus is called the Lord's Christ or Messias Isa 45.1 because he was a Type of Christ and as Christians are said to be Christ's Body and to have Christ formed in them Gal. 4.19 And if the Roman Empire it self may in some sense as Grotius has well noted on Dan. 7.13 be not unfitly called an Image or Type of Christ much more may the Christian Empire under Constantine who was a greater Restorer of Christ's Kingdom than Cyrus was be styled a Mystical Christ and be an Emblem of his Glorious Kingdom on Earth 16 Christ after his Resurrection which is called his Birth in Scripture was taken up into heaven as we also shall be caught up thither 1 Thes 4.17 where the same word is used insomuch that this Phrase is taken from Christ's Ascent into heaven and alludes to it And its import may be 1. That Christ was then actually King of the Roman Heathen Empire which he had newly conquered signified by his being caught up to the Throne of God whereby some Ascents of his Throne in the Heavenly Places or Advancements of his Kingdom may be signified in which he was installed and inaugurated at his Ascension when he was caught up into Heaven 2. Hereby may be signified also the advancing of the Christian Religion to the Imperial Throne as Christ was advanced at his Ascension to the Throne of his Father at his Right Hand Psalm 110.1 But as Christ was of a sudden taken up in a Cloud out of the sight of the Apostles whilst they were looking on him Acts 1.9 so may also hereby be signified the short space of the continuance of the Roman Christian Empire Rev. 17.10 answerable to Christ's being seen of the Apostles only for Forty Days Acts 1.3 and the sudden depravation of Religion by a growing Antichristianism upon its advancement by Constantine whereby in a short time the true Primitive and Apostolical Christianity was obscured and could not be seen pure and unmixt which as (a) And on John 1.1 Grotius has noted on the place may be signified by being caught up to God those things being said in Scripture to be with God which are invisible and appear not unto Men. 6 And 17 or but yet it was not long before the Woman or Church thus delivered from Persecution and advanced in the Christian Empire * fled into the Wilderness 18 i. e. was in a secret and obscure state and condition in the midst of the encreasing Apostasy where she hath a place prepared by God i. e. she is secured by him that they 18 should feed her there or that she should be nourished and preserved there after a wonderful manner a thousand 19 two hundred and threescore days i. e. Years See chap. 11. 2 3. 17 When Christ was caught up to God and the Heavenly State he designed became thereupon invisible the Church soon retired into the Wilderness i. e. into an obscure and invisible State too as being bereft of that Presence and Power of Christ which was necessary to advance it into that perfect and heavenly State which his Kingdom requires Here the Flight which was after the War in Heaven is mentioned before it by a Prolepsis or Anticipation frequent in (a) Grot. in Gen. 1.27 Ecclus 48.1 Scripture and in this (b) See Pererius on the Revelations Grot. on Rev. 21.2 Prophecy the Holy Spirit being wont to hasten to the chief point it is about and to mention what intervenes of lesser consequence afterwards as is manifest from the History of the Creation where Paradise which was planted on the Third Day is not described until afterwards in the second Chapter and the full and particular Relation of the Creation of Mankind but briefly touched upon in the first Chapter is deferred unto the second which Figure is here observed to shew that the Man child Christ's Kingdom was not to succeed upon the Glorious Pre appearance of it Verse 5. and that the Church the Woman was to be in an obscure condition and that immediately after her Delivery and that she was presently to prepare for her Flight she being not to appear in Visible Glory until 1260 Years after it * So the Children of Israel went up in haste out of Aegypt Exod. 12.31 33 39. 18 This Type is taken from the Children of Israel's sojourning in the Wilderness after they had escaped out of the hands of Pharoah who is expresly called Psalm 74.13 14. Isa 51.9 the Dragon or Crocodile lying
according to what had before come to pass in the destruction of Josiah who was a Type of Christ as the godly Kings of Judah and Israel were and was slain near that place just when he had prepared the Temple of God the Emblem of Christs Kingdom 2 Chron. 35.20 4. To shew that God who over-rules evil Designs for good and who declares Judg. 4.7 the place here alluded to that he drew Sisera and his multitude together had ordained that these Kings should be totally overthrown as the Kings of Canaan were at Megiddo and that Christ's Church should triumph over them and bless God for the great Victory in the Song prepared for it in the preceeding Chapter as (a) 2 Chron. 20.26 Jehoshaphat and the Israelites did in the Valley of Beracah or Blessing for the Defeat of that great multitude of Wicked People which confederated against Israel Whereupon this place of Decision is called the Valley of Jehoshaphat in (b) Chap. 3.2 12 14. Joel The Battel being described sometimes as if it were to be in a (c) Joel 3. Ezek. 39 5. Valley or Plain and sometimes as on a (d) Ezek. 39.4 Mountain and confined to no particular place Jehoshaphats (e) Fullers Pisgah Sight pag. 280 294. Valley being far distant from the Valley of Megiddo but expressed so as to typifie other things unto us and to shew that they shall be totally defeated as men driven from their several Fastnesses and Retreats Mountains as well as Plains and Valleys 5. To shew that both Jews (f) Zech. 12.3 6 9 10 11 12 13 14. and Gentiles should mourn at the sight of Christ now ready to appear in his glorious Kingdom as there was a great Mourning for Josiah by the Jews and the Assyrians whom he then assisted which may probably be the meaning of Hadadrimmon Zech. 12.11 which according to (a) On Zech. 12.11 Grotius signifies the Glory of Rimmon an Assyrian Idol 17 And the seventh Angel poured out his Vial into the 35 Air and there came a great voice out of the Temple 36 of Heaven from the Throne i. e. there was an extraordinary manifestation of the intimate and more immediate presence of God saying it 37 is done i. e. this is the last vial and Judgment upon the wicked Nations Ezek. 39.8 See on chap. 20. and 21.6 35 By Air is meant in (b) See Dr. Hammond on Psalm 148.4 Scripture the Aerial Expansum or Firmament consisting of Air and Clouds ballanced by the Weight of it Job 37.16 which being the Place of Meteors the Angel pours his Vial upon it and thereupon follow Thunder and Lightning and a Great Earthquake which commonly accompany each other the Islands and Mountains fly away and so great Hail falls which is a usual Attendant of Thunder-storms as if the Clouds with all their (c) Job 38.22 23. Treasures of Meteors were thrown down from Heaven Whereby the more immediate preparations to the Dissolution of the Old Earth seem to be described according to the Prediction of the Apostle Peter and the Description given of it in Dr. Burnet's Theory who yet very (d) 3.3 7. prudently admonishes us not to be too positive or presumtuous in our Conjectures about these Things because if there be an invisible Hand Divine or Angelical that touches the Springs and Wheels of Nature it will not be easie for us to determine with Certainty the Order of their Motions 36 Called so in remembrance of the Throne and Temple in Ezekiel 37 A Phrase evidently taken from Ezek. 39.8 where it is used concerning Gog and Magog whence also it appears that their Destruction is here referred to concerning whom read Chap. 20. and Ezek. 38. and 39. 18 And there were voices and thunders 38 and lightning aad there was a great Earthquake such as was not since men were upon the Earth so mighty an Earthquake and so great i. e. there were very high manifestations of Christ's glorious Kingdom and a time of trouble such as never was before the powers of the Earth and Heavens being shaken to make way for a new Heaven and a new Earth Dan. 12.1 2. Matth. 24.29 Heb. 12 26-22 See on chap. 4.5 and on the three last chapters 38 See Dr. Burnet's Theory of the Earth Book 3. 19 And the great City i. e. the whole Antichristian Jurisdiction and Kingdom chap. 14 8.18 10 21. was divided by the Earth-quake into 39 three parts i. e. the whole strength of the Antichristian State was dissipated and overthrown and the Cities of the wicked Nations of the whole World verse 14. chap. 20.8 fell and great Babylon 40 i. e. Rome chap. 14.8 came in special remembrance before God to give unto her the cup of the Wine of the feirceness of his Wrath i. e. to destroy her with a most severe and an utter destruction See on chap. 14 8-11 39 The general Type of Three Parts seems to be taken from Ezek. 5.2 12. where Jerusalem when it was designed for Destruction is marked out into Three Parts which Three parts here are the Three United Forces of the Antichristian Kingdom viz. 1. The Dragon or Devil with his Three Vnclean Spirits 2. The Beast and his False Prophet who as being united in Force and Interest have one punishment 3. The Kings of the Earth See on Chap. 19 19-21 40 Hence it appears that the Conflagration is here pointed at because it is plain from this Prophecy that Rome shall be destroyed by Fire as hath been before observed 20 And every Island fled away and the Mountains were not found i. e. the 41 old Earth was dissolved 2 Pet. 3. See on chap. 21.1 41 See Dr. Burnet's Theory of the Earth B. 3.9 whose ingenious Hypothesis gives great light to this place according to which as is here foretold the Mountains are to be destroyed in the last place and there are to be no Islands because no Sea in the New Earth which is to be plain and level 21 And there fell upon the wicked Kings and men of the Earth who were gathered together against Christ's Kingdom verses 14.16 a great Hail out of Heaven 42 i. e. an extraordinary Tempest of Divine Wrath inflicted by the more immediate command of God every stone about the weight of a Talent i. e. each stroak of God's Wrath was extraordinary great heavy and insupportable Ezek. 38.22 Matth. 23.44 and yet these men Blasphemed God because of the Hail i. e. were still obdurate and impenitent for the Plague thereof was exceeding great upon which they should therefore have humbled themselves under the mighty hand of God 42 Hail was one of the Plagues of Aegypt and the wicked Kings of Canaan were destroyed by great Hailstones from Heaven Joshua 10.11 as the Antichristian Aegyptians and Kings of the Earth here are But this place more immediately referrs to Ezek. 38.22 where God foretells that Gog and Magog shall be destroyed by a Thunder storm of Rain and Great Hailstones
Isa Chap. 54. and 62. Hos 2. Psalm 45. the Book of Canticles and Bp. Patrick's Preface to it in Scripture as a Bridgegroom and the Church as his Spouse and Wife to whom he is actually married when his Kingdom appears in its Glory as is plainly asserted Chap. 21.2 The Time from his Death and Resurrection until then being rather the Time of betrothing or Espousals than of Marriage Consider Canticles 3.11 and the Mystical Sense of the Captive Spouse Deut. 21 10-14 which may perhaps have some reference to this matter 8 And to her was granted 7 by Christ in virtue of his Death Eph. 5.25 26. that she should be arrayed in fine Linen clean and white or bright and Royal 8 Garments see on chap. 3.4 For the fine Linen is i. e. signifies the 9 Righteousness of the Saints who now come down from Heaven with Christ in his Kingdom chap. 21.2 7 Her Nuptial Garments and Ornaments are here said to be Granted or Given unto her to shew that all the Righteousness we have is of Free Gift and Grace even the preparing or making our selves ready by putting on Christ's Righteousness by Faith which as subjected in our Faculties may be called Our Righteousness whereby we become perfect through the Comliness which God puts upon us Jerem. 23.6 Ezek. 16.14 Zech. 3.4 Rom. 3. and 10.3 4. Phil. 2.12 13. 8 See Grotius on the place Christ was now about to present his Church without spot or wrinkle Ephes 5. and therefore is she cloathed in fine white Linen of which sort also Royal Robes were wont to be whereby is signified that the Saints were now to Reign with Christ. 9 By 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is meant in Scripture the (a) Grot. in Matth. 22.11 Luke 1.6 and Hammond on Rom. 8.4 Rom. 2.26 Precepts of the Law and Holy Actions conformable to those Precepts in which sense it is here taken which are said to be given unto the Saints to shew that the Justification and also the inherent Holiness of Saints is wholly from Christ our Righteousness and is given and communicated unto them out of his Fullness 1 Cor. 1 30.15 10. Gal. 2.20 John 1.16 Doctor Hammond's Interpretation of these Words The Ordinances of the Sanctuary cannot possibly be true because the Holy Spirit expresly says that the fine Linen which the Priest used when he went into the Sanctuary which is here alluded to is that is signifies which is the constant meaning of that word in this Prophecy Righteousness and therefore the fine Linen it self cannot be here meant but the Righteousnesses of Saints signified by those Ordinances of the Sanctuary 9 And he i. e. an Angel chap. 22. 8. saith unto me write this Truth and seal it not for it will immediately be brought into effect see on chap. 5 1.10 4. blessed are they which are 10 called unto the Marriage Supper of the Lamb which is the Kingdom of Heaven Matth. 22.2 and he i.e. the Angel saith unto me (a) Or these true words are of or from God these 11 are the true sayings of God i. e. certain infallible and most important Truths as incredible and as inconsiderable as they may seem to men 10 The Righteous Saints who are called the Wife of the Lamb that is the Church of Saints collectively taken in the Two foregoing Verses come down with Christ out of Heaven as is evident from comparing those Verses with Chapt. 21.2 and therefore by the called in this Verse seems to be meant the Saints who shall then be alive upon Earth who are said to have but a part in the first Resurrection Chap. 20.6 and are represented here only as Guests bidden but not as the Companions and Followers of the Bridegroom See on Chap. 20.6 11 These being not ordinary Scripture-Truths but of an high and Prophetick Nature therefore a particular Asseveration of the Truth of them is here used that they might gain belief the more easily and to ascertain the Revelation of them as the Angel particularly asserts the Truth of Daniel's Visions Dan. 8 26.10 21.11 2. And this Phrase is afterwards twice used upon the same account in this very Prophecy Chap. 21 5.22 6. 10 And I being transported 12 with the Vision I had seen of the glorious state of Christ's Kingdom fell through incogitancy and surprise at his i. e. the Angel Feet to Worship 13 him And he i. e. the Angel said immediately with 14 great Zeal and in great haste to prevent me as soon as he could I am thy fellow 15 Servant and therefore am not to be Worshipped Worship being to be given to Superiors and not Equals not to Angels who are but Fellow Servan s and Fellow Creatures with Men and Ministring Spirits to the great God and I am the Fellow Servant of thy Brethren the Prophets and Witnesses chap. 12 17. 22 9 that have received the Testimony of Jesus in his Gospel chap. 1. 2. Worship therefore * God and him alone and not his Servants and Instruments whatsoever their Excellencies and Perfections may be for they are but your Fellow Creatures And even as to their Ministrations and Offices they are not Superior to you for the 16 Testimony of Jesus which your Brethren the Witnesses have from the Scriptures concerning things future chap. 1. 1 2 3. is of the same esteem and value with immediate Prophecy it self because that the very 16 Spirit and Life of Prophesy consists in the Communication of it from Christ and it matters not as to the value of the Prophecy or of the Persons who recive it whether it come from the Testimony of Christ in Scripture or from immediate Revelation And therefore seeing that thou and thy Brethren here received the Testimony of Christ you are equal unto us although you have it not immediately from Christ but by our Ministration or from his Apostles and Disciples chap. 1. 1-4 22 6. 12 This Action seems to be chiefly (a) Of this Nature are many Actions of the Patriarchs thought to be by Justin Martyr who calls them 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Dial. cum Tryphon pag. 364 371. Symbolical and is transferred as in a Figure to the Apostle to teach and represent unto us under the Person of the Apostle himself that the best men are very apt to he surprized and drawn by the Example of others and by false pretences into Creature-Worship and that such Worship is unlawful let the pretences be never so plausible and that the only way to avoid all manner of Idolatry is to keep to the Precept here given of Worshipping God alone See on Chap. 22.8 9. 13 As being an Angel employed in a great Ministry and upon the most pleasing and most grateful Message of shewing him the New Jerusalem-State consisting of Gentiles and Jews his Countreymen Brethren and Kinsmen for whom the Apostle Paul could have wisht himself accursed from Christ Rom. 9.3 united together and reigning with Christ in his Kingdom 14 All this seems to be included
all the wicked are at last consigned at the final consummation of all things Chap. 20. 10-15 So that hereby is signified the Eminency and Transcendency of their punishment and the utter and total Abolition of that Antichristian State which as being the base and Hypocritical Counterfeit of Christianity is most peculiarly abhorred by God and is accordingly consumed and abolished so as never to appear again immediately at the very First Approach or Dawning of Christ's Kingdom as the shadows fly away when the Day breaks and the Chaff is suddenly driven away with the wind Psalm 1.4 Hos 6 4.13 3. Canticl 2.17.2 Thes 2.8 21 And the 31 Remnant i. e. the Kings of the Earth and their Armies verse 18 19 were slain 32 with the Sword of him that sate upon the white Horse verse 11. which Sword proceeded out of his Mouth i. e. they were Condemned by the Light Evidence and Convictions of Christ's Gospel according to which God will then judge the Secrets of Men by Jesus Christ Rom. 2.16 and all the Fowls were filled with their Flesh i. e. all the Saints were fully satisfied with the Justice of their Condemnation and the high Praises of God were in their Mouths for it Psalm 149 5.6 31 The Beast and False Prophet the Chief Enemies of Christ's Kingdom are first sentenced and are cast into the Lake at the first Appearance of Christ to which punishment also all their Adherents are expresly adjudged Rev. 14 9-11 although not at the same time as seemeth to appear from their bewailing the Ruine of Babylon afterwards Chap. 18. or not to the same degrees of it Whereupon it follows that if under the Beast and the False Prophet their Armies and Adherents are to be comprehended who must needs be vanquished with their Cheiftains then by the Kings and their Armies must be meant all the other wicked of the Earth besides the Antichristian Counterfeit who are vanquished and condemned by Christ and his Armies And although the Devil and his Angels and Armies are not here mentioned yet it is evident from Chap. 20.2 that the Dragon was laid hold on or taken Captive which Phrase respects the Issue of a Battel and must consequently relate to this at Armageddon But because those Enemies are Invisible Instruments and acted in and by the others therefore are they not particularly named here but only their Instruments and Agents who openly appeared and resisted Christ's Kingdom 32 These are not cast alive into the Lake because they are to appear again after the Thousand Years Kingdom of Christ but are said only to be slain by the Brightness Efficacy and Power of Christ's Kingdom whereby is meant a Spiritual Slaughter accompanied with Bodily Torments proceeding from Anguish of Mind in the sense of the Psalmist Psal 59.11 13.104 35. concerning which see more on the following Chapter Here it may be noted That there are Three Enemies of Christ to be vanquished by his coming which may also be the Three Parts of the great City 1. The Dragon or Satan and his Angels by whose Diabolical Spirit all the Enemies of Christ's Kingdom were influenced who are bound and sealed up during the Thousand Years Kingdom of Christ and are afterwards cast into the Lake Chap. 20.2 3 10. 2. The Kings of the Earth and their Armies i. e. those who had a bare Enmity and Hostility against Christ's Kingdom and not under the pretence of advancing it who are slain at this Battel and then make Second Assault upon Christs Kingdom in which they are overcome and at last utterly abolished and cast into the Lake Chap. 20.9 10. 3. Antichristianism consisting of Beastianism and False Prophetism which State is utterly abolished by the first Appearance of Christ and all its Votaries and impenitent Adherents lye under the severe Judgments of God during the whole time of Christ's Glorious Kingdom being never able to make any the least opposition against it CHAP. XX. The Text. 1 AND I saw an Angel come down from heaven i. e. a very particular and peculiar Ministry of Angels deputed by God for this purpose having the Key of the bottomless pit i. e. a Power to open and shut the Pit of Hell Luke 8.31 Rev. 1 18.9 1. and a great chain in his hand i. e. Powerful means to restrain the Evil Spirits 2 Pet. 2.4 Jude 6 2 And he laid 1 hold on i. e. seized upon and secured Matth. 14.3 the Dragon that Old Serpent which is the 2 Devil and Satan Gen. 3. Rev. 12.9 and bound him i. e. restrained him from 3 deceiving the Nations a thousand years i. e. during the Reign of Christ See on Verse 4. Annotations on CHAP. XX. 1 An Account having been given in the former Chapter how Two parts of the great City or Two of the Three Enemies of Christ had been disposed of the Holy Spirit does in this Chapter from Verse 1 to 4. particularly describe the Event of that Battle with reference to Satan or the Devil and his Angels the Third Enemy or Third part of the Great City or Idolatrous and Wicked Polity of the Kingdom of Darkness 2 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 (a) Grot. in Marc. 3.26 Vniversitas Satanica the Devil and all his Evil Angels called The Dragon as he presided over and influenced the Pagan Empire and Emperours and lived in the Imperial Supremacy of the Antichristian King Chap. 13.4 and That Old Serpent in respect of his Deceiving our First Parents in Paradise in that Shape and his working in and by Antichrist with all lying Wonders and deceivableness of Vnrighteousness 2 Thes 2.9 10. Rev. 12.3 14 and the Devil and Satan as he is the Accuser and Adversary of Mankind Rev. 12.9 Under whom are comprehended the several Sorts and Orders of Wicked Spirits mentioned Eph. 2 2.6 12. acting as one Power under one Prince and Chief of them who are here restrained from all manner of Power whatsoever either from themselves or as influencing others during the glorious Kingdom of Christ 3 As he had done our first Parents in the first Paradise so that there is no fear of being driven out of this New Paradise or of being deceived by Diabolical Temptations in it it being very (b) Burnet's Theor. 4.2 probable that the New Earth will be Paradisiacal 3 And he 4 cast him into the bottomless pit which is also a place of Torment Matth. 8.28 29. Luke 8.31 and 4 shut him up and set a 4 Seal upon him i. e. closely confined him after the most secure manner that he should deceive the Nations Verse 8. no more as he had hitherto done by the Lye of Idolatry and other deceitful Wickednesses and Temptations till the thousand Years of Christ's Reign should be fullfilled or ended and after that he must according to the secret Counsel and Will of God be loosed from this Restraint for a 5 little season 4 4 4 By these several Expressions is intimated that the Devil should be confined after the closest
12.25 and of which it is a Pattern Heb. 9.1 the True Temple built without hands where our hopes is and of which we are Citizens and which is the Bride the Lamb's Wife and the Mother of all True Christians Gal. 4.26 3 And I heard a great Voice out of Heaven proclaiming a great Truth and shewing me a New and Extraordinary Thing which had never been before saying Behold with thine eyes and hear with thine ears and set thy heart upon all that I shall shew thee Ezek. 40 4.44 5. the Tabernacle of G d i. e. the Kingdom of Heaven of which the Tabernacle was a Type See the Notes on Chap. 13.6 15 5. is now with 7 men in the New Heaven and New Earth into which it is come down from God out of Heaven Verse 2. and he i. e. God will 8 dwell or Tabernacle a second time John 1.14 with them in a State of Glory Ezek. 37 26-28 9 and they shall be his sanctified Ezek. 37.28 1 Thes 5.23 Rev 19.8 People and God himself shall be with them in Christ by peculiar extraordinary perpetual and Glorious Manifestations of Presence and Conduct and be their God to sanctifie them wholly and then to unite them unto himself in his Kingdom of Eternity John 17.19 21. 1 Cor. 1.8 1 Thes 5 23. 7 It comes down from God and is with Men and therefore a State in the highest Heavens cannot be here meant for it is not said that it Ascends or that the Tabernacle of Men is with God but that the Tabernacle of God is with Men. 8 God in Christ had dwelt with Men before in a State of Humiliation and his Glory appeared but to some few chosen ones for the World knew him not and his own did not receive him John 1.10 11. and that only at some transient Manifestations of it such as the Transfiguration on the Mount but now very great and glorious (a) Burnet 's Theory 4.7 appearances of Divine Majesty and Presence are promised to be continued for evermore in Heaven after a Thousand Years duration in the New Heaven and New Earth which are to fly away into Eternity Ezek. 37.26 9 Expressions taken from the Covenant made with Abraham Gen. 17.7 8. and the New Covenant mentioned Jerem 31 31-34 32 40 44. Ezek. 36.26 27.37 26 27 28 Heb. 8. whereby is shewn that the Promises of that Covenant are not fully accomplished but in the Glorious Kingdom of Christ the Minister of the Sanctuary and of the true Tabernacle which the Lord pitched and not Man which comes down from Heaven in this Vision Compare Heb. 8. with the first Verses of this Chapter 4 And God shall wipe away all Tears from their Eyes i. e. shall remove all Causes and Occasions of Sorrow Is 25.8.60 20. and there shall be no more death or it shall be destroyed by Christ Is 25.8 1 Cor. 15.26 54. neither Sorrow nor crying neither shall there be any more pain i. e. it shall be a state of (a) Dr. Burnet 's Theory 4.7 Indolency free from pain and want for the former things of the first Heaven and first Earth the World of the first Adam i. e. Sin Diseasâ—s Want Satan and his wicked Agents Hell and Death are passed away out of the Limits of the first Heaven and first Earth 5 And he that * sat on the white Throne i. e. Christ whom I had seen sitting on his own distinct Throne at the delivery up of the Kingdom Chap. 20.11 said behold for it is a thing much to be observed I am now about to make all things new i. e. to make a New Heaven and a New Earth and to renew and fully sanctifie Humane Nature John 17.19 And he said unto me 10 Write for these Words are true and faithful i. e. the New Things declared by me in these Words are now ready to be made by me whereby all my Words Promises and Declarations will receive a full compleâ—ion and will appear to be True and Infallible * There are Three Thrones ascribed to Christ in this Prophecy 1. The Throne of the Father in which Christ sits with him from the Resurrection until the Appearance of his own Throne in his Kingdom Chap. 3.21 2. Christ's own Throne or the Throne peculiar to his Humane Nature in his Glorious Kingdom called his Throne Chap. 3.21 and the Throne of the Lamb Chap. 22.3 3. The White Throne Chap. 20.11 in which Christ appears at the last Judicial Act of his Kingdom jâ—â—hen he is about to deliver it up to his Father Which appâ—â—â—â—â—ce having been seen but just before although it be after this in Time and in the Order of Completion is here referred to to shew that the same person whom he had by way of Prolepsis or Anticipation a Figure frequent in this Prophecy seen dissolving all things was now to appear as making all things New the same Christ being the Omega and End who shall dissolve all things and the Beginning or Alpha who is the Efficient Cause of the New Creation the New Heaven and New Earth and of (a) Psalm 22 27-31.102 18. the Generation of Saints the people which shall be created to inhabit it 10 To write is to bring into Effect as hath been often (b) See on Chap. 19.9 observed before whereby is signified that all the New things he had promised and declared in his Word were just ready to be made hy him 6 And he said unto me 11 It is done i. e. what I was about to do is now performed I have now sanctified and renewed my Servants and delivered the Creation from its Vanity Corruption and Bondage I the Eternal Word in Humane Nature am Alpha and Omega the Beginning and the End of Prophecy who made all things in the beginning and have now created them anew and am therefore able to say it is done Chap. 1 8.3 14. I who am able will also give unto him i. e. unto the Saints of all Ages that is a thirst i. e. that earnestly desire the full glory of mâ— Kingdom of the Fountain of the Water of Life i e. full and lasting Communications of Grace and Glory to all the Living in this New Jerusalem Isa 4 3. John 4 10 14.7 37. freely i. e. out of my mere Grace and Favour Isa 55.1 2. 11 Christ here at the completion of what he was to do for his Servants uses the same Expression he had before used Chap. 16.17 after the Destruction of his Enemies by the Vials which may thereupon he lookt upon as (a) See on Chap. 3.12 Monumental Inscriptions upon Two Pillars placed as it were at Two remarkable Boundaries of Prophecy of which the one respects Christ's making his Enemies his Footstool the other the Blessed State and Lot of the Saints at the End of Days mentioned Dan. 12.13 7 He that overcometh i e all of each Church-State who overcome the Temptations of it See Chapters 2 and 3. shall inherit as Sons all
watchful over such Pretenders especially at a time and in a Nation so prone to Enthusiasm and so easily transported into irregular Practises upon any new or unusual Occurrence But although due caution be commendable yet a settled aversion to or a careless neglect of searching into Scripture Prophecies may be of as ill effect to the Publick as the Confidence of false Pretenders to the Interpretation of them or the rashness of the giddy Multitude can possibly be And I cannot see what excuse Learned Men can have for not weighing and considering what is offered from Scripture History and Reason towards the clearing up of that Prophecy to the Study of which the reward of Blessedness is promised in it Rashness and groundless Confidence and pretences to immediate Impulses when not agreeable to Scripture or Reason are indeed to be Despised and it is fit that even those who propagate Truths after a Turbulent and Zelotick manner should be restrained but when things which may seem something strange and uncommon are offered by Men of Piety and Learning although with an Air of some more than ordinary assurance it is very commendable to search into the grounds of them and not wholly to slight them although there may be a mixture of Frailty and Error in them For God doth not now ordinarily assist after an infallible manner and sometimes permitted even his Prophets (a) 1 Sam. 16.6 2 Sam. 7.3 2 Kings 4.27 to Err when their desires were too eager and their approbation even of a good design too hasty and they spake as Men not as Prophets Enthusiasm which arises from an overheated Imagination is indeed a dangerous Disease of the Soul and it is I must confess something difficult for the best and wisest Men to avoid all taint and infection of it whilst they are too intent upon the Study of Prophetical Scripture especially of those parts of it in which God who hath afforded us in Scripture suitable matter for the exercise of all our Intellectual Capacities has condescended to the Fancy and Imagination of Mankind and has entertaired them as he hath done in this Book if I may so speak with a Divine Opera representing the greatest transactions belonging to his Church in Sacred Emblems and Hieroglyphicks Upon which consideration câ—re hath been taken that no interpretation should be inserted into the Paraphrase upon the Text which was not thought to be justly grounded upon the Scriptures quoted in it and bare Imagination hath not been in the least indulged but in the Annotations where it is Lawful to Exspatiate to propose conjectures to the Learned World and to give the raines to Fancy but under the curb and restraints of Reason and Prudence But although Enthusiasm which is a false pretence to extraordinary Impulses and Inspirations from God be very pernicious to the Souls of Private Persons as well as to the Publick yet it is certainly of very ill consequence rashly to reject every thing as Enthusiastick in the performance of which good sober and judicious persons profess themselves to have found sometimes more than ordinary assistance upon the due use of proper means Because it tends to the disparagement of the Gifts of the Holy Ghost encourages Men in a Jejune dry formality of Religion without inward Life and Spirit and robs them of much of that Joy and Comfort they might otherwise find in hearkning what God the Lord will say unto them by bringing natural and revealed Truths into their Minds and by opening and awakening their Ears to Discipline and Instruction for God speaketh once yea twice but man perceiveth it not For let Men of narrow Souls or those who have accustomed themselves only to dry Reasoning think what they will it is evident enough from some Mens Experience and from the very Spirit and Majesty which appears in their Discourses that they are raised sometimes above themselves and are afforded a clearer and larger prospect of useful great and momentous Truths than their Faculties do ordinarily arrive to or could have reached without Divine Assistance And extraordinary Truths are not only to be expected from those who have an happy Concurrence of all the Endowments which compleat a Great Genius but are frequently bestowed upon men of meaner abilities such Oar being often found amidst much Dross and many Imperfections especially of Style and other Ornaments which the World too much values and unreasonably dotes upon God for the Exaltation of free Grace and that men might not Glory in themselves and attribute things to their own Skill sometimes making use of the foolish weak and base things of the World to confound the Wise the Mighty and most valuable things in the esteem of Men. And therefore I hope that men of Wit and Natural Accomplishments will not disdain to look into Authors whose way of management may at first sight promise little much less rashly despise great Truths for not being cloathed in a modish Dress For many men who have true and just Thoughts of things are very unhappy in expressing them and they who much Study the Prophetical Writers whose Style as the ingenious Theorist of the Earth truly observes is rather Bold and Noble than Just will contract a swelling obscure and Metaphorical Style which elevated Minds and even Plato himself could not avoid nor the generality of the first (a) Plutarch 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Philosophers who are observed to have admitted a Divine Principle into their Philosophy the want of which is an unpardonable fault in Aristotle and others as if an uncommon and freer Style were the effect of Noble and Divine Thoughts and a too close and jejune one were the sign of a narrow and an Atheistical Disposition But whatsoever may be thougnt of the Interpreters of this Prophecy the Prophecy it self is certainly worthy the utmost thoughts of all Pious Learned and Ingenious Persons whose pains will be sufficiently rewarded by the pleasure Spiritual Profit and Advantages they will reap from it For what can afford greater pleasure to Pious Minds than to have a view in lively Emblems of the Throne of the Majesty of tne great God and to see his Glory and Goodness pass before them in Mystical representations of his Attributes of the Mystery of our Redemption and the Glorious Kingdom of Christ the Lamb slain from the Foundation of the World Who can forbear breaking forth into Praises and Thanksgivings upon reading the Songs of Victory which the blessed Spirits sing before the Throne or God at the several Exaltations and Triumphs of Christ's Kingdom And who is so in Love with this present World as not to wish that he were Dissolved that he might be with Christ in his holy Mount (a) Chap. 14. 1. And that even this Earth and Heavens might meit and pass away although he himself should suffer Loss thereby and be saved but so as by Fire that he might be with Christ and the blessed Saints in a New World wherein Righteousness shall
dwell What more grateful Entertainment for an Ingenious Mind than to have a prospect of all the great Transactions of the World since Christ's Resurrection represented as in Scenes shifted by the Ministry of Angels at each great change upon the Stage of this World For this Book is a Divine Drama full of holy Art and sacred Ornaments taken from Prophetick Symbols and Eastern Hieroglyphicks into which the Holy Spirit hath transferred most of the Beauties Excellencies and Magnificence of the Old Testamens and the greatest part of the Types and Figures of the Law the Throne of God and the Kingdom of Christ being the True Tabernacle of which Moses saw the Pattern in the Mount And the Art observed in it is very admirable and much like that of a true and just Poem the design of it being one great Action viz. The Kingdom of Christ to which all the lesser Actions are Subservient as to one great End which is carried on after a delightful as well as an Instructive manner by Descriptions Narrations a Chorus of Angels and blessed Spirits and by Christ himself speaking on great occasions as by so many Episodical Ornaments And may God inspire some Pious and Devout Soul with a Poetical Spirit suitable to the greatnest of the Subject with a Spirit like that which came from him upon his Servants David and Solomon when in Divine Raptures they set forth the glories of his Kingdom for the Subject well deserves an inspired Pen and will outlive all which have been hitherto undertaken as affording the most proper matter for the Devotion and Contemplation of the New World and therefore may be justly recommended to all Ingenious Persons as worthy their most serious Thoughts and pious Meditations Ribera a learned Romanist resembles this Prophecy to a vast Ocean full of Deep Gulphs receiving and swallowing up all Human Wisdom and the Metaphor although something bold hath much of Truth in it there being few of the Liberal Arts and Scienâ—es which the Eternal Word the Wisdom of God hath not made use of in it to exercise the understanding of those who have Spiritual Wisdom and to confound the Wisdom of those who are wise in their own conceits Here the Sacred Orator may find the most Magnificent Idea's of Divine things and the most lively Images of what can most effectually raise Admiration Love and Fear the most prevailing Passions of Mankind viz. the Glory of God and of Christ's Kingdom and the horror and dread of the Punishments denounced and executed in it And all this expressed in a Style (a) Stylus five Structura Orationis qualis nunquam à Mortalibus usurpata fuit nec apud quenquam Humanum Auctorem Extat 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 hic vides non Humanam Cotton apud Poli Syn. more than Human whereby some of the wisest and best of all Ages have been induced to search into it for the Providential Fate of God's Church and to admire and acknowledg its profound depth and Divine Authority as that great Critick (b) Euseb Hist Eccles 7.25 Dionysius Alexandrinus did even when they professed that they could not fathom the meaning of it which is no slight Argument of the peculiar Majesty and Excellen of this Book Neither let nice VVits be offended at the Paronomastical Allusions may he found in it for they are frequent in (c) Vid. Maimonid Duct Dubit 2.43 Gen 9 27.49 8 16 19. Jerem. 1.11 12. Dan. 5.25 29. Zephan 2.4 and the Notes on Chap. 2. 1 3. Scripture as they know who have skill in the Original Languages and were much in use in the Eastern Nations Those who have skill in History and Chronology may here exercise it with great Delight and Satisfaction and every mind that hath Wisdom whether it be in Numbers Geometry Architecture Colours Precious Stones Meteors or any other parts of Knowledge here hinted at or alluded to ought to contribute their skill to it For united Endeavours best promote Knowledge and God himself usually joyned (a) Exod. 31.2 3 6. 36 1 2. Eccles 4.9 Mark 6.7 1 Cor. 12.8 many together Two at least in every great and Weighty Work He gave Aholiab to Bezaleel joyned Aaron to Moses and Christ sent forth his Disciples by Two and Two and raised up Two Witnesses to testify to the Truths of this Prophecy And therefore I cannot but earnestly entreat all that are Wise-hearted in whose Hearts God hath put Wisdom and skill in Arts for they are from him and may thereby be Sanctified to stir up the Gifts which are in them and to joyn heartily and unanimously together for the service of the approaching Sanctuary and Kingdom of Christ for the work hath been long retarded by the noise of (b) 1 Kings 6.7 Axes and Hammers that is by Divisions and Contentions amongst Christians which ought not to be heard in the Building of God's House whatsoever hath been hitherto permitted under imperfect and lower Dispensations But further if the Hypothesis here advanced prove true and this Book be found to contain the great Events belonging to the Christian Church from the Reformation to the End of Time and to the Kingdoms of this World as they have a relation to it will it not afford a most cogent and most illustrious Proof for the Being of a God and a Providence and for the Divine Authority of the Scriptures and most effectually silence the little and unreasonable Cavils of Atheists and Antiscripturists For how could so long a Series and so great a variety of Events depending on rational Instruments and free Agents seemingly independent on each other and yet all tending to One End be revealed so long before their accomplishment but by One Infinite Mind or Understanding comprehending all things at one View and over-ruling and conducting them all to One End What but infinite Mind and Wisdom could foresee and so exactly describe the Orderly (a) See Chap. 6. Succession of the Roman Emperours by the very particular Countries from which they came and the great occurrences which happened under them or so exactly (b) See Chap. 2 10 6 9-17 foretell the very Period of the Persecution under Dioclesian and at so long a distance shew the Souls of the Martyrs under the Altar and the fatal overthrow of Paganism What else but the Eternal Knowledg could foretel and that so particularly in exact agreement with all History the Destruction of the Roman Empire and the (a) See Chap 8. Various Fate of Rome so often taken and retaken so often Burnt and yet not utterly Consumed What else but Wisdom it self could so livelily (b) See Chap. 9. represent the innumerable swarms of Tormenting Saracens the Locusts and Scorpions of the Earth and the mighty inroads of the Turkish Cavalry passing the River Euphrates and foretel the very manner and precise time of their taking Constantinople which cannot therefore be the Beloved City as Dr. Hammond supposes in agreement with the Opinions of the
latest and best Chronologers after a doubt concerning it What else could Connect the Saracenick Wo with the Idolatry of the Christian Church as a Scourge to it and foresee that Mahomet a Counter-Antichrist to the Papal One should arrive to a Supremacy in the East soon after the Christian (c) See page 136 137. Chalifs or pretended Vicars of Christ had Usurped one of another Nature in the West What but (a) Is 41 21-29 44 6 7.45 21. Wisd 8. 1. that infinite Wisdom which reacheth from one end to another and doth sweetly Order all things could thus declare the end from the beginning and from ancient times the things which are not yet done and unite together so many distant Events in agreement with the Prophecies and Types of the Old Testament and the Truth of all Profane History and make them conspire to One End the Kingdom of his Son Let the Oracles of the Heathens shew any thing like this or the most daring Wit demonstrate and no less evidence ought to satisfy him of the contrary how this could otherwise come to pass And if this Book be of Divine Authoriâ—y why should the Divinity of our Saviour be doubted of Who is expressly called (b) See Chap. 1. 8 14.3 21.5 6 c. 17 14 19 9 10 12 13.20 6 12.21 6 7.22 6 13. God in it receives Divine Worship from Angels and Men and has the same Attributes given him with God the Father and is always represented in it as One with him For such plain Testimonies ought to outweigh the contrary prejudices which proceed chiefly from the Imperfection of our finite and limited Understandings and their utter inability to comprehend an Infinite Being But as this Prophecy is Instructive in great Truths so does it afford satisfaction also in many doubts For from hence men may learn not to be too much disquieted at great Changes and Revolutions in Churches and States and may the more readily be induced to submit to what is not evidently sinful in them because they are from God and that all such great Events are some way or other conducive to Christ's Kingdom God often makeing use of the Sins of Men to bring to pass the Wise and Good but Mysterious Counsels of his Will And from hence also much may be learnt with relation to the Government (a) Read the Epistes to the Seven Churches Chap. 2. and 3. And Chapters 5. 6. 7. 10. 13 18. 21 10-27 VVorship and Reformation of the Church and to the abating of the warm Contentions about them amongst Protestants for seeing that all Church States are as yet imperfect and like the Jewish Dispensation but Temporary Ordinances until the time of the Reformation in order to the Kingdom of Christ the best ought to bear with the worst because they themselves are but Imperfect and instead of violent Heats and Animosities should endeavour to shew each other the Pattern Form and Fashion of God's House the Apostolical Model frequently mentioned in this Prophecy that so they may all according to the expressions of Ezekiel (a) Chap. 43. 10-12 in whom there is a Type of Christ's pure Church whatsoever some triumphant VVriters may with scorn enough have said to the contrary be ashamed of what they have done and of their Iniquities and Deviations from it And in the mean time until God shall reveal even this unto them what should they do but in obedience to the Apostolical Precepts Bear one anothers Burthens please others rather than themselves in Honour Prefer one another do all their things in Charity and to edification and Peace as well as for Truth Decency and Order And let not any sincere and conscientious person of the Romish Communion be offended at some harsh expressions he may find in this Book for they are no other then the Holy Spirit makes use of to give them a true and just Idea of the deformity and odiousness of Idolatry Cruelty and Church Tyranny in God's sight that so they might be the more effectually deterred from them and to create in the minds of Protestants a due abhorrence of such Practises by Notions and Symbols apt to raise a just indignation against them which have also by God's Providence been so deeply imprinted in the minds of the Vulgar that all endeavours of some Learned Men to the contrary have been unsuccessful and sometimes of fatal consequence and why should men speak peace where God does not and give complemental Names to those whom the Holy Ghost hath stigmatized and made infamous So that if the Romish Church be Idolatrous Usurping and Cruel he bringeth not a railing accusation against it but speaketh the words of Truth and Soberness who applyeth to it the Titles of Beast Whore and Antichrist And altho this charge against the Church of Rome hath been managed by diverse arguments yet I think by none more successfully than by those which are taken from this Prophecy which I hope ingenuous Men of that Communion and many such are there of it will be pleased to read and consider for I dare promise them that they will meet with many (a) Especially Chapters 13. and 17. clear and unexpected Proofs in it and such as may give them satisfaction for I can truly say that I have experienced their efficacy for the removing of some of their Prejudices which I lay under As for the present performance altho I find upon a cursory review some mistakes and many Imperfections in it which cannot be avoided in a work of so great length and difficulty yet I can assure the Reader that the utmost sincerity hath been used and all the diligence possible amidst frequent indispositions of Body and many avocations And as for the main gounds upon which the Interpretation proceeds viz. The gradual defection of the Church the Antichristian Apostasy especially of the Romish Church and the future glorious Kingdom of Christ I hope that they have been fully and plainly proved in their several places (a) Read especially Chapters 2. 3. 7. 13. 17. 20. 21. 22. but other less material or abstruse things must take the common Fate of such disquisitions and all that I shall desire from the Reader is that he use diligence in search read the Book throughout and be true to his Convictions and then I Hope Pray and Believe that he will not miss of Satisfaction humbly desiring him to remember him in his Prayers who hath spared no Pains nor cost in this matter for his good God's Glory and the Promoting of Christ's Kingdom AMEN Even so come Lord Jesus THE Argument THis Book is a Dramatick Prophecy wherein is represented as in Visionary Scenes the great Events belonging to the Church of Christ from his Resurrection (a) Chap 1. 10. pag. 11. In Comaedia sive Tragaedia nequaquam Spectatur Tempus illud quo Actio datur sed potius tempus rei ipsius cujus datur Actio Alcas pag. 6. to the Delivery (b)
Chap. 20. 11. up of his Glorious Kingdom (c) Chap 1 7 and Chap. 20. 21. 22. to God and the Father Which Kingdom is the chief Action or End of the Prophecy to which all the other Actions represented in it are conducive and the whole is embelished by many accidental Ornaments as by so many Episodes As by a description of the (a) Chap. 4. Throne of the Majesty of God Songs (b) Chap. 5. chap. 7. 10 c. 11 16. c. 12. 10 c. 14 1. Chap. 15. and 19.1 c. of Triumph Praise and Thanksgiving (c) Chap. 7. 9-17 pre-representations of Christ's Kingdom Christ himself and Angels speaking voices from Heaven together with Thundrings and Lightnings and frequent Interlocutory passages too many to be here particularly mentioned It consists of two Tomes (d) See chap. 4 1. c. 5 1. of Prophecy the former (e) Chap 2. and 3. of which and the more general one may be called the Church-Prophecy the latter (f) Chap. 5. and more particular the Book-Prophecy both reaching from the Resurrection to the same Period of Time and describing the same events but after a different manner the first by Symbols (g) Chap. 2. c. 3. of Churches the latter (h) See Chap. 6. 1. c. by Symbols often taken from the Civil Occurrences of the Roman Empire and from others relating to the Church as Seated in it which principally respect the Affairs of the Church and Kingdom of Christ and yet are taken from civil Occurrences that each event might be the better distinguished as by so many notable Characters of time It begins with a general (a) Chap. 1. 1-12 Preface or Prologue wherein the Epoch (b) Chap. 1. 10. of the Prophecy is setled and the (c) Chap. 1. 5 6 7. Period of it the Kingdom of Christ And it ends with a general Conclusion (d) Chap. 22. 7-21 or Epilogue relating to some of the great events but especially to the Vials Besides the general Preface there are also two Particular ones the one (e) Chap. 1. 11 -20 prefixed to the Church-prophecy in which Christ is represented in a Priestly and Kingly Habit as Supreme Lord of the Church the Epistles are declared to be Mystical and are ordered to be sent to the Churches and their Angels The other (f) Chap. 4. and 5. is placed before the Book-Prophecy in which the Throne of God is described the Divine (g) See page 70. Court of Judicature which is to pass Sentence upon all the Actions in the Prophecy is setled Christ is declared the Supreme Director of them and appears (a) See pag. 83. as ready to receive his Kingdom But because Christ according to the Mysterious Agreement betwixt him and the Father had promised by (b) Dan. 12 7. pag. 83. 87. 112. chap. 10. 6. Oath that the Beast should have his Times therefore is the Book given into his hands Sealed with (c) Chap. 5. and 6. seven Seals which are as so many stops or delays to it and the several openings of them as so many removals of obstacles to it concerning which see Chap. 6. After the opening of the Sixth (d) Chap. 6. 12. c. Seal upon the downfal of Paganism the Succession of a Christian Emperour and the advancement of Christ's Church in the Empire there is given a representation (e) Chap. 7. 9-17 of Christ's Kingdom which as being the cheif end of this Prophecy is always kept in view in it of which the Christian Empire and Church thus advanced were an Emblem But because the Mystery of Iniquity began then to increase therefore (a) Chap. 7. 1-9 Chap. 11. 1. and Chap. 12. are the Servant of God Sealed the Woman prepares for her Flight into the Wilderness the Worshippers begin to retire into the Temple and the Witnesses prepare to put on their Sack-cloath which Visions are cotemporary and parallel and not long after are Persecuted by the (b) Chapters 11. c. 12. c. 13. c. 17. Beast which carries the Woman A pure Church being Sealed i. e. (c) See on Chap. 7. 3 4. Chap. 8. 1 -6 covered and secured amidst the growing Corruptions and the Seventh (c) See on Chap. 7. 3 4. Chap. 8. 1 -6 Seal being opened at the final Victory over Paganism by Theodosius there appear at the opening of that Seal on the back-side (d) See on Chap. 5. 1. of the seventh Roll of the Book seven Angels with seven (e) See Chap 8. and 9. Trumpets Symbols of so many Judgments upon the Antichristianizing Church and Empire The Judgments of the four (f) Chap. 8. 6-13 first Trumpets were executed by the Northern Nations which ended in the fall of the Western Emperours and the Succession of the (g) Chap. 9 1. Chap. 13. and 17. 8-13 Papal Empire the Fifth (a) Chap. 9. 3-12 by the Saracens and the sixth (b) Chap. 9. 12-21 by the Turks who destroyed the Antichristian Eastern Empire and still continue as a Wo upon the Western Quickly after the passing of the Mahometan Wo which is the second Wo the Wo of the sixth Trumpet before which (c) Chap. 11. 14. 15. the Witnesses will rise the ten Kings will hate the VVhore the Antichristian Hierarchy will fall and there shall be great Conversions the feventh (d) Chap. 11. 12 c. 17 16. See the Notes on Chap. 18. 21. and last Trumpet sounds out of which there proceed seven (e) Chap. 11. 15. Voices which are the (f) Chap. 14. Voices of the seven Thunders unsealed which were sealed at the beginning of the Reformation described chap 10. and are as so many preparations to the Blessed Millenuium out of the seventh (g) Chap. 14.19 See Notes on chap. 14. 2. of which Voices there issue seven Vials containing the final Judgments upon Antichristianism and all the enemies of Christ's Kingdom raised to Judgment whereupon a Monumental (h) See pag. 329. and chapters 15. 16 18 and 19. Pillar as it were is erected with this Inscription It is done to shew that the Prophecy aims at a certain time of Christ's Victory over his enemies and of his appearing in Glory to his Friends and Servants whereupon also anotner such Inscription is given chap. 21. 6. After the pouring forth of the seventh (a) Chap. 16. 17. Vial the thousand (b) Chapters 20-21 22. years Kingdom of Christ begins which being Expired Satan (c) Chap. 20. 3. is loosed for a little space but the final Judgment comes on at the end of which the Kingdom is (d) Chap. 20 11. delivered up to God And here it is to be observed that because the same things are represented in the Chutch Prophecy and in the Book Prophecy that therefore there are many Synchronisms or Contemporary Visions in this Book And because the Kingdom of Christ and Antichrist are Opposite that therefore there are many 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉
Propriety of the Titles attributed to Christ for he is said to be the faithful Witness that the following Prophecy might be the more readily believed and in Opposition to the Pretences of Antichrist to New Traditions distinct from those delivered by him in his Gospel the intire Revelation of his Father 's Will. 2dly His Resurrection is mentioned because it was the chief Proof of his Divinity and the Ground of our Faith and chiefly because that from thence is taken the Epocha or the beginning of the Account of the Times and Seasons of this Prophecy The other Titles plainly relate to the Efficacy of his Blood alone to our Justification and Sanctification and to our Praises due to him alone in opposition to Merits and Satisfactions Prayers to Saints and Angels and the other Corruptions of the Opposite Antichristian Kingdom 6 And hath made us Kings to Reign on the Earth in his Kingdom Dan 7.27 Rev. 5 10.20 6. and Priests to offer Spiritual Sacrifices 1 Pet. 2.9 Rev. 20.6 unto God and his Father and not unto Saints and Angels to him Christ be Glory i. e. Praise and Acknowledgment of his Perfections and Kingly Dominion for ever and ever in his Everlasting Kingdom Dan. 2.44 Revel 11.15 Amen So be it and so it will be 7 11 Behold he cometh 12 i. e. he will as certainly come as if we saw him now a coming with Clouds i.e. with Power and great Glory Dan. 7.13 Matth. 24.30 and every Eye of all Men shall see him coming and they also which pierced him i. e. the Jews shall see him feel his Power and acknowledge him Isa 40.5 Zach. 12.10 John 19.37 and all Kindreds Tribes or People of the Earth i.e. of the wicked worldly and 13 Antichristian Part shall wail because of him their Judg whom they had provoked Even so 14 Amen i. e. this is a certain Truth to be expected and desired 11 This Verse relates to the coming of Christ in his Kingdom at the last Day when the Jews who crucified him and all other his Enemies shall appear and be judged by him And it is worth noting That according to the Precepts of Art observed by the most Judicious Writers we have here from Verse 5. given us in short at the very entrance of this Prophecy a brief Representation of the chief End and Design of it The Kingdom of Christ of which upon all fit Occasions we are presented with a short View because it is the thing which all the Events Typified in this Book were designed to produce and as it were the Catastrophe of this 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of the World according to Plotinus's Phrase or of all the Transactions which have appeared on the Stage of it 12 A Form of Speech in use with the Prophets denoting the Infallible certainty of what they foretold Or cometh may here signifie he beginneth to come as Verse 1. See * Pag. 145. 150. Dr. Pocock on Joel 13 Earth is taken in this sense sometimes in this Prophecy as we shall see hereafter 14 This Word in Scripture is put to affirm that the thing will be as well as to wish for it and approve it 8 And do not doubt of the Truth and Extent of this Prophecy for I Christ who have revealed it am Alpha 15 and Omega the beginning and the ending who am before all things and shall abide after them for ever saith the Lord Christ which is or The That is and which was and which is to come the Almighty as well as Eternal Jehovah who can bring to pass the Words of this Prophecy from the beginning of it to the end of Time 15 These are the first and last Letters of the Greek Alphabet whereby the Beginning and Consummation of all Things Times and Seasons is ascribed to Christ as the incommunicable Attributes of God also are viz. his Name Jehovah and his Almightiness So that this Verse contains a plain Declaration of the Divinity of our Saviour 9 I John who also am your Brother in the same Faith and Companion in tribulation i. e. a Fellow-sufferer with you and in the Kingdom and patience or patient 15 expectation of the Kingdom of Jesus Christ delayed unto the time of the end Dan. 12 4-13 Rev. 10.4 7. was in 17 Banishment in the Isle that is called 18 Patmos for preaching the word of God and for the testimony of Jesus Christ i.e. the Gospel 16 For so the words seem to signifie and may very well be Translated by a figure common in Scripture for this Kingdom was to have begun in its full Power immediately at Christ's Resurrection and was then expected by the Apostles Acts 1.6 but was still patiently to be waited for until the time of the end to which it was deferred Altho the words may more properly relate to the Patience of Christ or to his own patient Expectation of his Kingdom until the times agreed on with his Father See Chap. 3.10 17 In the time of Domitian about the end of the year of our Lord 95 or the beginning of 96 as Chronologers generally agree 18 Situate in the Archi-pelago about 40 Miles from the Continent of Asia towards Ephesus in the Sea next to the Churches to which he wrote And as Ezekiel and Daniel had their Visions when they were in Captivity so also might it be by way of Correspondence Ordained by God that John should receive this Prophecy in a place of Exile Restraints and places of Recess and Retireme◠from the wicked World affording the fittest dispositions and opportunities for Divine Communications 10. I was in the Spirit 19 i. e. under the immediate Power of it on the 20 Lord's day and 21 heard that is perceived in my Spirit unexpectedly and as it were from behind me a great voice as of a Trumpet i. e. a very loud voice as the sound of the Trumpets on the solemn Festivals Psal 47.5 or in the time of War Zechar. 9.14 to raise my attention and to encourage me and to signifie that Judgments were to be denounced 19 That is I was not in the Body but in a Spiritual Extasie or Rapture under the immediate actings of the Spirit of God representing things to my Soul and not to my Senses 2 Cor. 12.2 20 The First Day of the Week or the Christian Sabbath instituted in Memory of Christ's Resurrection and called The Lord's Day a Phrase never used in the New Testament but with reference to this Day and the Lord's Supper because it was blessed and sanctified by Christ's Resurrection and the Descent of the Spirit intimated here by John's saying that he was then in the Spirit and instituted and set apart by his Authority as the Day in which his Worship was ordinarily and necessarily to be frequented by all Christians And the Day is here punctually expressed which is also exactly observed by Ezekiel and Daniel for the benefit of the Church which is to take notice of Times and Seasons to shew that these
I know observe and approve Psalm 1.6 thy good works and thy labour 2 in the work of the Gospel in converting instructing and governing those whom thou art set over 1 Thes 5.12 1 Tim. 5.17 and thy patience and perseverance in it and under sufferings for it and how thou canst not endure or 3 bear with them which are evil in Life or Doctrine but castest them when they prove incorrigible out of the Church and thou hast tryed 4 them by the Gospel Gal. 1.8 1 John 4.1 by their Works Matth. 7.20 and by the Gift of discerning Spirits 1 Cor. 12.10 which say they are Apostles sent and commissioned to preach the Gospel and are not and hast found them liars or False Apostles Acts 20.29 30. and 15.1 24. 1 Cor. 15.12 2 Cor. 11.13 Gal. 1.6 1 and 2 Epist to Timothy 1 John 4.1 2 Labour also may here signifie a zealous and unwearied profession of the Gospel amidst the greatest Discouragements as the Word is taken 1 Cor. 15.58 3 These Words refer to the zealous Execution of Discipline for which the Church was at first very remarkable as appears from 1 Cor. 5. 1 Tim. 1.20 Tit. 3.10 2. John 10. 4 It appears from Scripture that there were many False Apostles foretold by our Saviour Matth. 24.11 and by the Apostle Paul in his Admonition to the Elders of the Church of Ephesus Acts 20.29 30. Who generally seem to have insinuated themselves into the good Opinion of the People by specious pretences of being Brethren and by creeping into their Houses and Assemblies unawares and privily and by communicating with them in their Feasts of Charity as appears from 2 Cor. 11.26 Gal. 2.4 1 Tim. 3.6 Jude 4.12 and from this place where they are said to pretend to be Apostles when they were not For the Hereticks seem to have acted more closely and subtily while the Apostles were living than afterwards which made i◠〈◊〉 task to try and detect them which yet the Apostolical Church did with great Zeal and Care by examining their pretences by the Doctrine they had received of Christ and by Gifts of discerning False Spirits as Clemens Romanus attests in his Epistle to the Corinthians And this place seems to determine this Succession of the Church to the Times of the Apostles the Pretence of being Apostles or Messengers sent and commissioned by God to preach New Doctrines being peculiar to that Age and made use of by Simon Magus and his Followers particularly by Cerinthus against whom John wrote his Gospel who pretended to New Revelations And it being not peculiar to Ephesus alone but to most other Churches we may reasonably conclude that by Ephesus is not understood that Church alone but the Church-State of the Apostolical Age which began on the Day of Pentecost next following the Ascension of our Saviour in the Thirty Third Year of our Lord about the Twenty Fourth Day of May as Bishop Pearson has stated the Aera of the Apostolical Church in his first Lecture on the Acts. From this place we may learn That strict care ought to be taken in trying and examining those who are to be sent to teach others and that the Canon of Scripture was setled by this Apostolical Church she having duly tried and rejected all other Pretenders to Apostolical Doctrines and that the first State of the Church was purely Apostolical 3 And yet thou hast born 5 Afflictions although thou canst not bear 5 with them which are evil and hast still patience 6 and for my Names sake i. e. for me and upon the Account of my Gospel hast laboured 6 in it and hast not fainted under it nor under thy sufferings for it Gal. 6.9 2 Thes 3.13 5 Such kind of Allusions are frequent in Scripture as Rom. 1.24 25 26 28. 6 This being a Repetition of what was said in the foregoing Verse seems to intimate that their Labour and Sufferings were Great and very Remarkable a Repetition sometimes denoting so much in Scripture 4 Nevertheless I have somewhat of 7 complaint against thee because thou hast left or 8 remitted and abated something of thy first 9 or former fervent and intense Love of me my Gospel and Kingdom 7 So the Phrase is taken Matth. 5.23 8 So this word is rendred by Grotius and Doctor Hammond and I think rightly And as Grotius thinks that Love and Desire may by way of Allusion be signified by the Word Ephesus so may also the Greek Word here made use of intimate some Remission or Coolness of their First Love by the same Figure which the Prophet Micah makes use of Chap. 1. 13 14. and which Grotius thinks the Apostle uses Rom. 1.17 28 29. where also in the 29th Verse there is a manifest Allusion to the Name Judah which signifies Praise Gen. 29.35 9 The First Love which the Prophet Jerem. 2.2 calls the Kindness of Youth and the Love of Espousals is usually very fervent but is wont soon to cool and abate in the best of Men. And accordingly the Church at first when as Hierom speaks the Blood of our Lord was warm and the Faith of the New Converts was Fervent was very Zealous in all its Duties and Offices as appears from the Acts of the Apostles particularly from Chap. 2 41-47 and Chap. 4 31-37 where we have a perfect Pattern of the First Love of the Apostolical Church in the Church of Jerusalem especially in their having all things common and calling nothing their own And yet in a very short space as soon as the Number of the Disciples and with them the Church-Revenue was multiplied there arose a murmuring of the Graecians against the Hebrews even in the Infant-Church as we read Acts 6. occasioned by the Pride of the Hebrews as Bishop Pearson has shewn in his Third Lecture on the Acts wherein as also in the Behaviour of Ananias and Saphira there are early Tokens and Types given of a Declension in the Church which proceeded so far as to this matter even in those First Times of the Gospel that Paul tells the Philippians Chap. 2. 21. of his Epistle to them supposed to be written about A. D. 59 or 62. that all Men sought their own and not the things of Jesus Christ For not only Demas forsook Paul out of Love to this present World but Mark grew weary of the Labour of the Gospel and went not with Paul and Barnabas to the work Acts 15.38 and Peter himself for fear of the Jews was guilty of Dissimulation Gal. 2.11 12. And the Galatians had generally departed from the True Notions they had received of Christian Liberty and a Working Faith Gal. 5.1 6 7. and were grown very remiss in their Acts of Charity Gal. 6.9 And the Churches mentioned in Scripture are frequently reprehended for great Enormites so that it is no wonder that the Churches in After-Ages proved guilty of them the Love of many waxing cold betimes as our Saviour foretold Matth. 24.12 and Paul complained 2 Tim. 1.15
to the Churches in the Plural that is all the several Periods and Successions of them 14 The Particle what refers not only to the following Sentence but to all which went before as appears from the Epistles to the Churches of Thyatira Sardis Philadelphia and Laodicea in which there is nothing that follows this Proverbial Sentence which must therefore have a reference to what preceded it 15 This Promise refers to the particular Overcomers of the Evil of each Church-State and not to the Churches themselves for as some Men may fall short of overcoming Vice and Error in a good Church-State so others may overcome the Evil of a bad one And the Promises to the several Overcomers are taken from the Descriptions given afterwards in the latter part of this Prophecy of the New Jerusalem or Kingdom of Christ which as they have promoted so shall their Reward be Now the Earthly Paradise was a Type of Christ's Heavenly Kingdom and to eat of the Tree of Life in the midst of that Paradise is to be refreshed and nourished with Divine Communications in the Kingdom of Christ in which the Saints and Overcomers shall Reign with him And here we are to take notice that the Rewards are suited to each particular State to be refreshed by eating in a State of Happiness being proper to those who are wearied with Labour and Sufferings and a Crown in the next Succession being the fit Reward of the Overcomers of a state of persecution It is also further fit to be observed That the Right of Primogeniture is not given to Ephesus but to Smyrna the Symbol of the afflicted Church-state which has the Crown of Life bestowed upon it the Symbol of Royal Dignity which of Right belongs to the First Born and the very Kingdom of the New Jerusalem is given to Philadelphia of which the Key of David and her Crown are the Symbols which seems to be shadowed out unto us in the Blessings of Jacob Gen. 49. which may by way of Allegory and as Typical be accommodated to the Mystical Israel the Church where the Precedency both in Dignity and Power is taken from Reuben the First Born because of his Instability and having defiled his Father's Bed which may be Typical of Ephesus's Early Departure from its First Love and of the Idolatrous Apostasie which crept into it betimes which is a spiritual Defilement in Scripture whereupon its Candlestick was removed out of its place that is it lost the Rank of priority it was to have in the Kingdom of Christ which was given to the next Succession of Smyrna for it's Constancy in Afflictions bur especially the New Jerusalem State coming down in the Philadelphian Succession 8 And unto the Angel Verse 1. of the Church in Smyrna 16 write these things saith the First 17 and the Last which was dead and is alive that is Christ the Eternal God who raised himself from the Dead 16 Smyrna is the next City of the seven Northward from Ephesus and about Forty Miles distant from it and it is still a Metropolitical See having yet no more than Two Churches of Greeks in it and One or Two of Armenians It 's Name may by a Figurative Allusion be derived from a Syriack word signifying Bitterness to denote the bitter persecutions of the Church under this State 17 These Attributes are made use of to encourage them to undergo their Sufferings as having been already experienced by Christ who was God and had vanquished Death for them 9 I know and approve thy good works in the propagating of my Kingdom and tribulation under persecutions and poverty or extream want by thy being spoiled 18 of thy Good but thou art really rich in Grace and in my Esteem and Favour and I know the blasphemy 19 i. e. Idolatry of them or that party that say they are Jews 20 that is boast themselves to be the pure Christians the true Worshippers of the one only God and art not truly so but are really and in God's Account the 21 Synagogue of Satan that is an Antichristian Congregation 18 As was usual in Times of persecution Heb. 10.34 19 Blasphemy is a Contumely or Reproach of God by attributing that to a Creature which is properly his whence in Scripture it is put to signifie Idolatry which is the highest Blasphemy See Isa 65.7 1 Maccab. 2.6 2 Maccab. 8.4 And this Blasphemy then appeared in the Reverence paid to Martyrs which was the Beginning of Idolatry 20 The Phrases and Expressions of this Mystical Book are taken from the Old Testament and the Jewish Oeconomy which was Typical of the Christian as the Apostle asserts 1 Cor. 10 1-4 the Type in this prophecy being constantly put for the Anti-Type or thing signified And therefore according to that usual Figure by Jews here must be understood Christians who are the mystical Israel or the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the True Israel as Justin Martyr calls them whose Glory and proper Priviledg it was to be the Worshippers of the One True God whilst all the World besides were guilty of Idolatry Now the Jews being wont to pride themselves in their priviledges those here represented are also said to say that they are Jews that is boast of it in allusion perhaps to the Name Judah which signifying Praise and Thanksgiving is here and by the Apostle Rom. 2 17-29 put to denote a Boasting Confession joyned with a seeking the Praise of Men as Grotius has noted on the place and as is obvious from the last verse of that Chapter as I before hinted Of which Pride of theirs there is an eminent instance in the very first Apostolical Church at Jerusalem Acts 6. where the Hebrews or Natural Jews who came from the Loyns of Abraham neglected or proudly despised the Hellenists or Proselyted Gentiles altho Jews by their Religion as well as themselves And therefore in proportion by Jews here must be meant those Christians who more than ordinarily boasted themselves to be the pure Worshippers of the True God only when yet they were really guilty of Idolatry For the word Jew as Grotius notes on Rom. 2.17 was then a word significative of their Religion rather than of their Nation and denoted as much as a Worshipper of the one God or one who confessed and acknowledged him as the word Judah is Explained by Philo and Interpreted by the LXX Gen. 29.35 21 Satan signifies according to the Original of the word the Great Adversary the Devil of whose Congregation these Pretending pure Christians are said to be and not of Christ's because by their Blasphemous or Idolatrous Practises they did indeed and in God's account Worship him and Propagate his Antichristian Kingdom But this was at first the Fault only of a few of them or of that Party that Valued themselves and Despised others calling themselves Jews or the only True or pure Israel of God it having always happened so from the beginning of God's Church that according to the Allegory insisted
shall not be hurt of the second death but shall escape it Rev. 20.6 12 And to the Angel of the Church in Pergamos 26 write These things saith he who hath the sharp 27 Sword of the Word and the Spirit with two edges to inflict severe and sharp Judgments chap. 1.16 26 Pergamos is distant from Smyrna Northwards about five hundred and Forty Furlongs and there are in it now but a few Families of miserable Christians and but one Church although it was anciently the most Famous and Chief City of Asia the Less having been the Seat of the Attalidae who were rich and potent Kings and of the Roman Proconsuls For which Reason as well as in Allusion to its Name it may be put to denote here The exalted State of the Church High and Lofty Fabricks and Things being called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 by the Asiaticks And because of its (a) Andr. Caesar in locum excessive Idolatry it is a fit Type of the Apostate state of this Succession in which the Apostasy was exalted to a Throne 27 Corruptions daily encreasing under this State the Styleis here changed and Christ is represented with a sharp sword in his Hand 13 I know thy good works and where thou dwellest even where Satan's 28 Seat or Throne is i. e. under the Dominion of the Antichristian Apostasy and I know that nevertheless thou holdest fast or retainest the profession of my Name and hast not renounced it by becoming Antichristian and hast not denied my Faith or Gospel no not even in those days or Times of Darkness and Cruelty wherein Antipas 29 i. e. the Opposers of Popery was my faithful Martyr or Witness who was flain by Decrees Anathemas and frequent Deaths among you or under your Jurisdiction where Satan or Antichrist dwelleth or has his constant Residence in great State and Power 2 Thes 2.4 9 28 The Apostasy is now called Satan's Seat or Throne because that upon the Churches Exaltation under the Christian Emperors a Worldly Kingdom and a Paganizing Christianity arose by degrees especially at Rome to such an heighth that it became at last to have a Supremacy or a Throne in it to which Satan's power in this World is likened in Scripture viz. Isa 14 12-14 Luke 10.18 John 12.31 With which the History of those Times agrees it being evident that from about the year 400. and odd the precise year I shall endeavour to determine hereafter when Satan's Synagogue seems to have arrived to its maturity that the Apostasy daily increased chiefly upon the Growth of the Papacy which came to have a Throne about the year 606 when Boniface the Third Usurped the Title of Vniversal Bishop 29 There might have been perhaps a Martyr of this Name at Pergamus although the Story of him related in the Greek Menologies is vehemently to be suspected as Grotius has well noted a Brazen Bull being not a Punishment amongst the Romans whose Laws were then observed at Pergamus and the Relations of those early Martyrdoms being justly called in question by some of the Learnedst Men of the Romish Church But howsoever the Names made use of in this Book having constantly a mystical signification this also must be understood after the same manner and it will then plainly denote The Opposer of the Pope that is by a Figure usual in this Prophecy the whole Body or succession of those who during this period witnessed against the Apostasy of that See a Catalogue of whom you may find in Illyricus Vsher and other Authors For 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signifies against or contrary and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is the Old Word for Father from whence by a Reduplication of Letters comes 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is Pope or Holy Father for which consult what is said by the Etymoligists out of Eustathius And the Word Antipas is made use of and not 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 because this was a Common Name which the others were not And because those Names would have given a too open intimation of the Mystery designed designed by them contrary to the Holy Secrecy and Reserve usually observed in this Prophecy 14 But yet I have a few or some little small things to object against thee because thou hast 30 there where thou dwellest and amongst you them or a prevailing Party that hold profess and practise the Doctrine Precept and Counsel of 31 Balaam i. e. the False Antichristian Prophet who taught Balack i. e. the Princes subject to Antichrist to cast a stumbling-block or an Occasion to commit Sin before the Children of Israel that is the Christians of that Age the Spiritual Israel to * eat things sacrificed unto Idols and to commit Spiritual Fornication which is Idolatry 30 Although the Apostate Church had the Throne that is the Antichristian Power and Preheminence yet the pure Church-State is here blamed for having them or that prevailing party amongst them although they could not help it because that it had not arrived to that perfection of Gifts and Graces as must necessarily have cast out the corrupt party by its power and efficacy Thus the Apostle blames the Corinthians 1 Cor. 5. and 2 Cor. 7. that they had not mourned that the incestuous person might be cast out from among them and for want of vehement Affections of godly Sorrow Desire Revenge c. by which alone they could approve and clear themselves in that matter 31 Concerning this wicked advice of Balaam who counselled Balack to draw the Israelites to Idolatry by enticing them with the Conversation of strange Women you may read the 22d 23d 24th 25th Chapters of Numbers and the 16th Verse of the 31st as also Micah 6.5 2 Pet. 2.15 and Jude 11. together with the Expositors on those places Whereby is plainly signified the wicked Counsel of the Antichristian Party especially of the Papacy which like Balaam pretends to Prophecy and Infallibility whereby the Secular Powers Represented by King Balack were perswaded to entice the people to Idolatry by worshipping Bread and Saints and Images So that this Period comprehends the Times in which these Doctrines were controverted and at last imposed and seems to reach until about the year 1100. when Antipas or the faithful Witnesses against these and other Errors which had been before slain by the Anathemas of several Councils and lay mostly concealed and hid within the Apostate Church began to unite into an open and visible Body and to appear under the Name of the Waldenses and Albigenses in a more direct Opposition to that Satanical or Antichristian Authority which had hitherto over-powered them Upon which as History testifies vast Numbers of all Ranks and Qualities united themselves unto them * To eat things sacrificed unto Idols as appears from the Apostles Discourse 1 Cor. 8. and 12. was accounted by the Corinthians no fault and was defended by them as Grotius notes upon the place by very subtile Distinctions not
full Glory may be understood by the Bright Morning-Star And therefore by the Morning-Star in this place is understood the Remnant or the rest of this Succession which shall last until the Succession of Christ's Kingdom begins and who shall as the Morning-Star riseth before the Sun give notice of his Approach by some more than ordinary works and Manifestations of it Which we hope and pray that the Lord will soon accomplish and if he has vouchsafed to his Servants any Knowledge of Times and Seasons it cannot be far off by raising the poor oppressed Churches of the Valleys who were the Morning-Star or the first Visible Body of Witnesses before the Reformation and we hope will arise and that speedily before Christ's Appearance in his Glorious Kingdom for they have hitherto shined according to their own Mysterious (a) Mr. Leger Histoir des Vaudois Device which is a lighted Taper in a Candlestick environed with Seven Stars in a dark place with this Motto Lux lucet in Tenebris amidst the Darkness of the Apostasie And may Christ give unto them and that quickly the Morning-Star of his Glorious Presence Amen Amen come Lord Jesus come quickly 29 He that hath an Ear let him hear what the Spirit saith to the Churches i e. this is a Mysterious Truth worthy the utmost Consideration CHAP. III. The Text. 1 AND unto the Angel of the Church in 1 Sardis write These things saith he that 2 hath the Seven Spirits of God see Chap. 1.4 and the Seven Stars Chap. 1.16 and 2 1. I know and observe thy Works that thou hast a Name 3 or a more than ordinary Repute that thou livest according to Christ's Doctrine and art zealous in the Outward Profession of it 4 and or but art indeed dead 5 as to the perfect Purity of Religion and its Life and Power over thy Faith and Manners Eph. 2.1 1 Tim. 5.6 2 Tim. 3.5 James 2.20 Annotations on CHAP. III. 1 Sardes or Sardis is distant about Thirty Three Miles from Thyatira Southward It was antiently as appears by its Ruines a Magnificent Splendid and Proud City as being the Seat of King Croesus for which Reason as well as from an Allusion to the Precious Stones of that Name which (a) Hist Lib. 37.8 Pliny asserts were called so from this Place as being first found there it may typifie a splendid and stately Church-succession which has a Name or a Repute in the World It is now as the Learned Doctor (b) Notit Septem Asiae Eccles pag. 133. Smith an Eye-witness testifies who could not but weep at the sight of it a most miserable Village inhabited only by Shepherds and Herdsmen and a few ignorant Christians without Church or Priest whereby may be providentially set forth the Real Deadness of this Church-state and the Desolation it is to suffer 2 Sardis is thought to be the Type of the Churches of the Reformation under the Favour and Protection of Reformed Princes in a condition of External Splendor Because 1. It succeeds that of Thyatira which is the Type of Reformed Churches under the Tyranny of Popish Princes to which State the Reformation succeeded begun by Luther A. D. 1517. 2. Because there is no mention made of Balaam or Jezebel or Nicolaitism in this Succession which shews that they had escaped from under the power of the Apostasy typified by them 3. Because the same Title is given to Christ here as is made use of in the Ephesine Succession the Type of the Apostolical Church whereby seems to be intimated that the Church began now to be Reformed according to the First Primitive and Apostolical Pattern only it is here Remarkable that it is not said that Christ holdeth the Seven Stars in his Right Hand but barely that he hath them to shew perhaps by the Omission of those Remarkable Words that they had departed from the True Apostolical Model which Christ had or held in his Right Hand that is had in great Honour Neither is this to be taken for a groundless and a loose Interpretation or a Licentious Fancy as Dr. Hammond calls the like Conjectures of Mr. Brightman seeing that in such a Concise Prophecy God whose Glory it is to conceal a thing Prov. 25.2 hath given us sometimes but slender hints or intimations of great Truths and that the Addition or taking away of but a Letter in a Name as in the Names of Abraham Sarah and Jeconiah for which see Grotius on Jerem. 22.24 is of great import in Scripture And of how much greater signification then may be the leaving out so material a part of Christ's Title in a Prophecy so brief and mysterious 3 From whence it appears that this Church has a Reputation in the World for its outward profession but is very much wanting in inward Life Truth and Holiness 4 So And frequently signifies in Scripture 5 Ephesus had only lost its First Love but this Church was really dead as to the True Spirit and Power of the Gospel and the perfect simplicity and purity of it 2 Be watchful in observing the Times and Seasons of Christ's coming Dan. 12.12 Matth 24 42-51 Rev. 16.15 and strengthen or uphold and sustain the things 6 which remain i. e. the necessary Truths which shall remain until Christ's coming and which thou hast kept entire but that are ready to die as to the Power and Life of them for I have not found thy works of Reformation according to the Gospel 7 perfect before God so as to be able to stand before the Glory of his Kingdom when it shall begin to appear or to endure the Severity of his Tryal whatsoever Esteem they may have amongst Men Luke 16.15 6 By 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or the rest seems to be meant those Necessary Works and Articles of Belief which they had kept alive or entire and were to remain during the following Succession of the Church until Christ's Coming as being Necessary Truths which would endure Tryal and were essential to the being of it as a Church in which sense 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is taken in this Prophecy as 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signifies in Authors the remaining or succeeding part of the Day 7 Filled up or compleated as the Rude Lineaments of a Picture are said to be filled up by a Painter when he comes to draw it to the Life See Hammond on Matth. 5.17 Here this Church is blamed for not carrying on the Reformation to its utmost perfection and for suffering necessary Truths to decay and be almost ready to die 3 Remember 8 therefore how i. e. with what Sincerity and Zeal thou hast received and heard the Doctrine of Truth at the beginning of the Reformation and hold fast what thou didst then receive and repent of thy Deadness Verse 1. thy Negligence and imperfections Verse 2. and thy Departure from the Principles thou hast received and heard If therefore thou shalt not watch 9 and wait for the
Kingdom of God Mark 15.43 I will come on thee as a Thief 10 i. e. unexpectedly and thou shalt not know by reason of not watching over the Times and Seasons which God has shewn unto his Servants what hour I will come unto thee in my Kingdom and discover thy Defects and Unsuitableness to it 8 Here they are called upon to look back upon the Model of their First Reformation which they had swerved from and to hold fast those Principles and to repent and amend what was faulty 9 Here is intimated as also in the second Verse that this Church was careless and slow to believe and expect Christ's second coming in his Kingdom before the Day of Judgment 10 This Phrase signifies in Scripture a sudden and a surprising Judgment as Matth. 24.42 43. Luke 22.39 40. 1 Thes 5.2 And here is intimated the sudden coming of the Kingdom of Christ upon this Church to its great surprize and amazement occasioned by its ignorance of the disagreeableness of its own State to it or it 's not knowing that it would have come so soon or that she should have been so entirely removed by its First Appearances 4 Thou hast a few Names 11 or excellent Persons Acts 1.15 even in Sardis although almost dead which have not defiled no not their Garments Jude 23 but have carefully avoided all the Corruptions of this State and have had their Works perfect before God and they shall walk with me in white 12 Garments i. e. be favoured by me and honoured in my Kingdom and be justified and declared righteous for they are in my sight worthy of it as having kept themselves white or undefiled 11 Excellent persons and therefore known by Name as Exod. 33.12 God is said to know Moses by Name that is after a special and particular manner Or it is a Metaphor either from Moses's taking the Names of the Children of Israel Numb 3.40 43.26 53 54. or from the High priests bearing their Names upon the Stones on his Breast-plate which being the Foundation Stones of the New Jerusalem Chap. 21. the Names written on them may be put to signifie Excellent Apostolical Members of the Church But here we are to note that these Excellent and undefiled persons were but a few and therefore it is dangerous to follow the Majority or Multitude of this Church according to what is observed concerning the Sardian (a) Boet. de Gemmis 2. 80. Stone that it hath but a very little of a pale or white colour mixt with its red 12 Or shining Garments Matth. 17.2 which were such as Kings used to wear and bestow upon their Favourites whereby also Chearfulness and Innocence is signified and Purity and Righteousness Eccles 9.8 Rev. 19.8 And from this Verse we may observe That this Church may be Communicated with without sin there being some of its Members although a few who remain in it without being defiled and that the whole Church is spoken to and is said to have those Exellent Names and the undefiled Names are not blamed for having or suffering the corrupt as in Pergamus and Thyatira which are manifest Indications that Sardis is not an Apostatical but a True and a Reformed Church 5 He that overcometh the Corruptions of this State the same shall be clothed in white Raiment Vers 4. Rev. 19.8 and I will not blot 13 out his Name out of the Book of Life i. e. he shall be enrolled amongst the Members of my Kingdom Dan. 12.1 Rev. 13 7.17 8.20 12 15.21 27.22 19. but I will 14 confess his Name before my Father and before his Angels i. e. I will make him be publickly acknowledged and commended at the last day 13 This Phrase occurs Exod. 32.32 Psalm 69.28 and seems to be taken from the Custom recorded Ezra 2.62 63. where we read That the Jews kept Registers of the Genealogies of their Priests in which if a man were not found he was put from the Priesthood as polluted It was also an antient Custom alluded to as some think in this place of Enrolling the Names of Citizens and Blotting them out of the Publick Registers when they had forfeited that Priviledge From whence also came the Custom of blotting Names out of the Diptychs of the Church But from whatsoever Custom the Phrase is taken it plainly relates to the Rewards which will be bestowed upon the Saints of this Church-Interval in Christ's Kingdom 14 Expressions taken from the Day of Judgment noting the Gracious Requital Christ will afford them for confessing his Name in greatest purity Matth. 10.32 Luke 12.8 6 He that hath an Ear let him hear what the Spirit saith unto the Churches 7 And to the Angel of the Church in 15 Philadelphia write These things saith he that is holy or the Holy who will shortly erect a holy Church and Kingdom and he that is true or The True who will bring to pass what he has promised concerning his Church he that hath the Key 16 of David i. e. full power of disposing all things concerning his Kingdom he that openeth a Door to his People and no man shutteth against them and shutteth against his Enemies and no man openeth i. e. hath Sovereign and irresistible Power and will conduct his People through all Difficulties to such a Church-State as they shall never be deprived of by their Enemies 15 Sardis represents those Churches of the Reformation which have a Repute or Name in the World but want the inward Life and Spirit of the Gospel and Philadelphia seems to be the Type of the Reformed Churches which are low in Outward Strength and Esteem but very strict in observing Christ's Word and Commands which Characters I shall not venture to adapt to any particular Churches but leave them to the impartial consideration of all concerned as they may be gathered from the Text it self Philadelphia is distant about Twenty seven Miles from Sardis a City as Strabo notes never very Populous and Famous because it was subject to Earthquakes which yet withstood the Fury of the (a) Smith de Statu Sept. Eccles Turks with great Constancy and Gallantry when all the rest of Asia had submitted and has now (b) Spoon's Voyages in it Four Churches of Greeks and about Two Thousand Christians which are no contemptible Remarks as to our present purpose and would induce a Man to think that the Divine Wisdom has afforded us some faint Resemblances of the little outward strength or power of this Church-state and of its strict adherence to the Truth and of the Ample Reward God will afford it even in the Fate of the City from which it is denominated And if any thing be to be gathered from the Names of these Churches the Nature and Qualities of this State are plainly discovered in its Name Philadelphia signifying Brotherly Love as if this Church-State were to be established upon that Principle and not upon power outward splendor and superiority Luke 22 24-30 See Grotius on that place and
their agreement with the Christian Church do fall down in great humility and submission before him that sat on the Throne and worship him that liveth for ever and ever and cast their Crowns before the Throne in token of Subjection and Homage saying 11 Thou art worthy and thou only O Lord to receive the Acknowledgement of Glory and Honour and Power for thou hast created all things by thy Power and for thy pleasure or Will the only Motive to it they are preserved in their Being and were at first created Nehem. 9.6 CHAP. V. The Text. 1 AND I saw in the Right 1 Hand of him that sate on the Throne i. e. of God the Father a 2 Book or Roll Ezek. 2.9 10. written within and on the back-side i. e. containing a long Series of Events 3 sealed with 4 Seven Seals to denote the Obscurity of the Prophecy and the Delay of its Accomplishment Dan. 12.4 Annotations on CHAP. V. 1 God held the Book in his Right Hand to shew his Power and his Readiness to deliver it 2 This Book seems to have consisted of seven several Rolls rolled up into one in the Form of a Cylinder (a) Poli Synops Hammond on Luke 4.17 and on the place Mede pag. 789 790 791. Mori Oper. Theol. pag. 21. ubi formam libri videas according to the Custom of the Antients having seven Labels sealed with seven Seals which being opened in order there appeared in each of them the Seulptures or Hieroglyphicks hereafter mentioned and the back side of the last Roll which is the outermost in rolling was written upon to shew that there was a long series of Events contained in this Book it being not the Custom of the Ancients to write on the back side of the Roll but when the inside could not contain all their Writing We may divide for Order and Memories sake the whole Prophecy of this Book into Two Tomes as Mr. Mede calls them the first of which contained in the foregoing Chapters may be called The (b) See on Chap. 4.1 Church Prophecy wherein Symbols of Churches then in being are used the Second which begins here may be called The Book-Prophecy because its Events are represented by Hieroglyphicks in a Book And both Prophecies are of the same Extent this latter reaching to the End of Time and determining and distinguishing Church Successions and Affairs as well as the former only with this difference that they are represented in the latter by future Occurrences and Circumstances of the Civil State and Empire that so the Times of their Accomplishment might be the better known and taken notice of by the illustrious Events represented in them For as it pleased God to describe and foretel by his Prophets the Fall of Babylon and other Events under several Symbols and Representations for the greater assurance of the Prediction as in Pharaoh's Dream Gen. 41.32 and that the thing might be the more deeply imprinted on Mens Minds by the Variety of the Figures by which they are described so hath the Divine Spirit upon the same account given divers Emblems of one and the same thing in this Prophecy 3 I shall here once for all endeavour to give the true import of Sealing which seems to have these several Acceptations in Scripture 1. It denotes a secret or an hidden Condition as we seal up things which we would keep secret 2. It denotes Security Thus the Stone at the mouth of Daniel's Den and our Saviour's Sepulchre were sealed with Seals 3. It signifies Hindrance and Restraint Thus God Job 37.7 is said to seal up the Hand of every man i. e. to hinder their Work by Storms and wet weather and to seal up the Stars Job 9.7 i. e. to restrain their Influences as Satan is said Rev. 20.3 to be shut up and to have a Seal set upon him to restrain him 4. Propriety is signified by sealing in Scripture from the Custom of sealing Goods and Servants when they were bought thereby to denote their propriety in them and to distinguish them from other Mens Servants Hammond on Eph. 4.30 5. Lastly From these and other Metaphors it often in Prophetical Scripture signifies the Obscurity of a Prophecy and the concealing of it in dark terms from the Generality of the People Isa 8.16 and the stopping or hindring the Events foretold by it so that sealing and writing and sealing and opening are opposed in prophetical Language to one another and signifie as much as concealing and revealing delaying the Accomplishment of a Prophecy and bringing it into effect See the Notes on Chap. 7.2 3 4. 4 With reference to the seven states of Christ's Church which were hindred from coming into event whilst the Book was sealed and were to be by degrees accomplished and discovered upon the gradual opening of each of them 2 And I saw a strong 5 Angel or a mighty one Psalm 103.20 proclaiming with a loud 5 voice after the manner of a Herald Dan. 3.4 who is worthy for Authority and Ability to open 6 the Book and to loose the Seals thereof i. e. to bring into event the things there delivered 5 5 To shew the Weight and Concern of the thing to be delivered as worthy to be heard of all Creatures 6 To open it by unsealing it or when it is unsealed 3 And no 7 man or no creature Isa 41.28 in Heaven i. e. neither Saint nor Angel nor in Earth nor under the Earth i. e. in the State of departed Souls from whence Christ was just come was able to open the Book i. e. to bring to pass the Events of it neither so much as to look thereon if it were opened that is of himself to understand foresee and govern the course of the Prophecy and conduct it into Event 7 Here by a Hebraism consisting in describing the whole by an enumeration of its parts is signified that no Creature whatsoever was able to open the Book or so much as to understand it of himself 4 And I wept * much because no man was found worthy to open and to read the Book neither to look thereon as fearing that I should not be shewn those things that were promised me Chap. 4.1 * This weeping seems to be rather from a Despair that things would not be carried on to the great Kingdom of Redemption as the Two Apostles Luke 24.21 were sorrowful least Christ was not he which should have redeemed Israel and were astonished as Mary also was John 20.13 15. because the Lord could not be found for which she wept For Christ is represented at the sixth Verse as just risen from the dead and therefore in congruity to that appearance what is here said must relate to the time before he appeared as risen which is also a Circumstance that confirms the fixing of the Epocha of this Book at the Resurrection 5 And one or the 8 first and chief of the 9 Elders or Representatives of the Jewish Church Chap. 4.4 saith unto me Weep
not for thy own sake or the sake of the Church which thou fearest will be deprived of what is contained in this Book for behold the Lyon 10 of the Tribe of Judah i. e. Christ Gen. 49.9 Heb. 7.13 14. who is also the root of David Isa 11.1 10. Rom. 15.12 hath prevailed with the Father by his Blood and Merits to open the Book and to loose the seven Seals thereof Vers 2 4. i. e. to declare what is in it and to accomplish it 8 For so One seems to signifie in this Prophecy as also it does Dan. 10.13 Gen. 1.4 Matth. 28.1 9 The Jewish Church having been entrusted with the Oracles and Prophecies of the Old Testament concerning the Kingdom of Christ it is very proper that their Ministry should be here made use of to declare unto John the import of what had been delivered therein concerning the Merits and Power of Christ in revealing and erecting his Kingdom and therefore Christ is here described by Titles taken from what relates to the Jews as the Lyon of the Tribe of Judah because he came from that Tribe which is resembled to a Lyon in Scripture and the Root of David because he proceeded from his Stock as from a Root 10 No Creature whatsoever as Man signifies Verse 7. and Isa 41.28 was able to open this Book or look into it but only Christ by Vertue of his Merits whereby that extravagant Knowledge which is ascribed unto Angels and Saints in the Romish Church and their Mediatorship is plainly exploded as appears also from the 11th 12th 13th and 14th Verses 6 And I beheld with great concern and expectation and lo on a sudden in the midst of the Throne i. e. just before it and next unto it and of the Four Beasts and in the midst of the Elders i. e. betwixt God the Father and his Church stood 11 in a posture of Defence as Mediator and Advocate and in a readiness to receive his Kingdom Dan. 7.13 14. a Lamb i. e. Christ John 1.29.36 as it had been newly stain and just risen from the dead having seven Horns 12 i. e. perfect Regal Authority especially over the sevenfold State of the Church and seven Eyes signifying perfection of Knowledge and Providential Administrations Zech. 3.9 which are or represent the seven Spirits of God i. e. the perfect Operations of Gods Spirit Zech. 4.6 10. See on Rev. 1.4 sent forth into all the Earth to superintend dispose and conduct all things 2 Chron. 46.9 Isa 11.2 11 From Christ's being here represented as just risen from the dead with the Signs of his Sufferings fresh and bleeding it may be gathered that the Epocha of these Visions is to be taken from Christ's Resurrection and Ascension into Heaven as we have observed before on Chap. 1.10 And he is represented as standing to denote that he was not as yet in possession of his Kingdom which was due to him at his Resurrection as the Psalmist plainly affirms Psalm 2 7 8. but that he stood ready to receive it to which end he was brought unto the Father as appears plainly from Dan. 7.13 14. 12 Horns being the Weapons of Beasts they are put to signifie Strength and Power in Scripture as Psalm 75.5 10. and in Daniel and this Prophecy they denote Kings and their Regal Power as the Scripture interprets it self Dan. 8.20 21. Rev. 17.12 7 And he i. e. Christ being now entring upon his Kingly Office came to the Father being brought near before him to receive his Kingdom Dan. 7.13 14 and took the Book * out of the Right Hand of him that sate upon the Throne i. e. received his Kingdom from the Father and power to reveal and execute what was contained in that Book concerning it * This answers to Dan. 7.14 where upon his being brought to the Father a Kingdom is given him of which this Book is a Symbol as being the Book of the Kingdom of Christ only we are to take notice that the Book is sealed the Kingdom being not to appear but by steps and degrees according to the opening of the Seals until the seventh Trumpet of the seventh Seal during which time Christ was to sit in the patience and expectation of his Kingdom at the Right Hand of God until his Father made his Foes his Footstool according to Psalm 110.1 and 1 Cor. 15.25 27. 8 And when he had taken the Boâ—k the four Beasts and four and twenty Elders i. e. the Christian and the Jewish Church perceiving th t all Power was now given unto him of the Father fell down before the Lamb to worship him bearing every one of them Harps to praise him and golden Vials or Bowls to hold Incense in 2 Chron. 4.22 full of 13 Odours which are i. e. signifie the Prayers Psalm 141.2 of Saints i. e. of the living Creatures and Elders and all Saints and Members of the pure Church in his Kingdom Rev. 20.4 13 The Ascent of the Incense signifies the Ascent of Prayers to Heaven and the Odour of it their Acceptableness with God for which see Dr. Hammond on the place and on Luke 1.10 And here Christ appearing for his Saints as in his Kingdom makes them Priests to God by giving them Incense See Chap. 8.3 4.20 6. 9 And they sung a new Song of 14 singular Love and Gratitude upon the occasion of Christ's Redemption and Kingdom saying Thou art worthy and thou alone Verse 23. to take the Book and to open the Seals thereof for thou wast slain and hast redeemed us to God i. e. to be his Servants and Worshippers by thy Blood out of every Kindred and Tongue and People and Nation to be a Catholick Church and Kingdom 14 In this sense this Word is taken Psalm 33.3 Isa 42.9 10. But it is rather called a New Song here because it will have been for a long time out of use during the Apostacy which will have perverted the Doctrine of Redemption and Kingdom of Christ therein celebrated of which Kingdom there is here given an Appearance and Representation signified by Musick and Harps which are the Attendants of it in this Prophecy Songs and Musick being not made use of in it but upon some such Pre-appearance until the Apostasie is at an end as if during the Absence of the Bridegroom Mourning were more suitable for the Church 10 And hast made us unto the Service and Glory of our God Kings and Priests i. e. a Priestly Kingdom Chap. 1.6 and we shall reign 15 in the Earth in thy Kingdom Rev. 20.4 15 From hence it is plain that Christ's Kingdom is to be upon Earth Rev. 20.4 11 And I beheld or was still in Vision and I heard the Voice of many Angels round about the Throne and round about the Beasts and the Elders i. e. the whole Church consisting of Angels and Men Christians and Jews Heb. 12.22 23 24. and the number of them i. e. of the Angels was ten tbousand times ten thousand and thousands of
very favourable to the Christians 6 And I heard a Voice 13 in the midst of the Four Beasts i. e. from Christ in his Apostolical Church Chap. 5. 6. say A 15 Measure of Wheat for a penny and Three Measures of Barley for a penny i. e. let exact care be observed about necessary Food for eating and see thou hurt or diminish not the Oil and the Wine i e. let no Fraud be used in Drinks and 16 Medicines 15 A Famine cannot be here described because that scarcity could not be great where Barley and Wheat were not wanting nor even Wine and Oyl which are rather the Comforts of Life than the Necessaries And therefore this Verse refers to the strict Justice and diligent Care observed by Severus and Alexander about publick Provisions for which they are signally remarkable in History But this Voice being heard so remarkably amongst the Four Beasts that is as spoken by Christ who is represented as in the midst of them Chap. 5.6 seems to intimate something relating to Christ's Church and that very remarkable which I shall endeavour to explain by what is offered by Dr. Beverley a Person of deep thought and of great insight in these matters He thinks then that by the Ballances in the Rider's hand is figured Christ's weighing the Churches Purity in the exact Ballances of the Sanctuary according to what is prophesied of him by Ezekiel Chap. 25.9 10-25 that he the Prince shall take care in the New Jerusalem state there prefigured that their Oblations or Worship shall be exact according to the Old Standard of the Sanctuary from which they had swerved of which Worship or Daily Service Wheat Oyl and Wine are the Symbols they being the constant Attendants of the Daily Sacrifice as appears from Exod. 29.40 Numb 28.7 Barley also denoting the Christian Oblation in the Sacrament and their Praises and Thanksgivings because Barley was used in no Oblation except in that of the suspected Wife Numb 5.15 but in the Oblation of the First Fruits of their Harvest Lev. 23.9 which was a Type of the Christian Eucharistical Oblations as Mr. * Book 1. Disc 51. and in his Christian Sacrifice Mâ—de has shewn And 2dly He thinks that the whole Time of the Seals is as it were weighed in the Two Scales of this Ballance the one half of it being run out at the time when these Ballances appeared to wit A. D. 235. when Alexander Severus's Death put an End to this Seal for the first Seal beginning at the Resurrection A. D. 33. if you add to that 202 years the Moyety of the whole Seals the first half-Time will fall upon the year 235. the other half extending to 437 where he dates the beginning of the 1260 Years of the Apostasie which will be made out more fully in the Process of these Annotations 16 Wine and Oyl were also used in the curing of Wounds and for Medicines Isa 1.6 Luke 10.34 7 And when he had opened the fourth Seal I heard the Voice of the foâ—rth Beast 17 say come and see what Judgments God will bring upon the Heathen Empire for their impenitence 17 The Church continues still Apostolical because the Living Creature still speaks although the Thunder or mighty Power and Efficacy of the Gospel was departed from it And the Apostolical Ministry here calls upon him to consider the Obstinacy and Impenitency of the Pagan Empire notwithstanding the Gospel had been preached amongst them for so long a time and that therefore God had resolved utterly to destroy them after he had tried whether he could reclaim them by his severe Judgments amongst whom yet he preserved a Remnant of Christians to be a Holy Seed according to God's Denunciations in a parallel Case Ezek. 14 12-23 Now the voices of the living Creatures or of the Apostolical Representatives of the Christian Church still continuing we may reasonably conclude that the Ephesine or Apostolical Succession lasted during these four first Seals amongst the Apostolical Ministry of which Succession we may justly reckon not only the Apostles and Apostolical Men but the Primitive Writers and Witnesses of these times from Justin Martyr to Origen who by their Apologies exemplary Lives and Deaths and Learned Writings Justified the Christian Religion confuted Judaism and Paganism and called upon the Empire to Repent many of them foreteling its fall and the rise of Antichristianism upon it and speaking plainly concerning the Thousand Years Kingdom of Christ for which see Mr. Mede Dr. Burnet's Theory of the Earth and Dr. Cressener 8 And I looked and beheld a 18 pale Horse i. e. great slaughter and mortality and his Name that sat thereon was Death and Hell or the grave followed with him as his Attendant and power was given unto them over the fourth 19 part of the Earth i. e. the Roman Empire to kill with the Sword i. e. by War and with Hunger i e. by Famine and with Death i. e. by the Pestilence Jer. 9.21 and with the Beasts of the Earth 18 The State of the Empire from Maximin to Diocletian that is from A. D. 235. to A. D. 284. is here plainly Characterised For 1. Maximin was a Thracian whose Countrey lay Northward according to the Station of the Fourth Beast the Eagle 2. In that small space of time there were above Twenty Emperours not reckoning the Thirty Tyrants under Gallienus most of them very short-lived and coming to untimely Ends which is very appositely represented by Death's sitting upon a pale Horse instead of a Rider 3. Besides the persecution of the Christians the whole Roman Empire was then grievously harrass'd by Cruel and Barbarous Emperours by Civil VVars and Forreign Invasions the Persians and Asiatick Scythians breaking in upon the Eastern part of the Empire and the Goths about the same time invading the Western after a most terrible manner about the beginning of the Reign of Gallus A. D. 251. (a) Pagi in Baron or 252. as Zozimus observes 4. In this Period there was a dreadful Plague that lasted for Fifteen Years together which beginning in Aethiopia went through most of the Provinces of the Roman Empire upon the occasion of which Cyprian wrote his Books de Mortalitate and against Demetrian where that Holy Gospel-Witness attributes that Mortality to the impiety and persecution of the Pagans and not to the Innocent Religion of the Christians and seriously exhorts the Heathens to a speedy Repentance And there was a Famine also as Dionysius (b) Euseb 7.22 Alexandrinus testifies who lived at that time After which Desolations it was a frequent thing in those Countries for the Wild Beasts to ravage and to break in into their very Cities and commit great Slaughters which is a Judgment threatned in Scripture Lev. 26.22 Deut. 32.24 Ezek. 14.15 19 The Roman Empire seems to be called the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The Fourth of the Earth because it was the Fourth Earthly Monarchy prophesied of by Daniel after which the Heavenly Kingdom was
Successors 16 And said to the mountains and rocks fall on us and hide us altho by crushing us in pieces Isa 2 19.-21 Hos 10.8 from the face or anger of him that sitteth on the Throne i. e. God and from the wrath of the Lamb i. e. Christ that we may not see and feel the misery which is coming upon us 17 For the great 30 day of his wrath i. e. the appointed time of his Judgments is come and who shall be able to stand against it oppose or endure it 30 This immediately refers to the overthrow of the Pagan Powers by the Christian Empire and has also a relation to the final Judgments upon Antichrist when the Martyrs who are commanded to rest until that time shall be fully avenged this Judgment upon Paganism by the Christian Empire being a Type of the Judgment at Christ's Kingdom CHAP. VII The Text. 1 A And after these things I saw four Angels 1 i. e. Ministers of God's Providence standing in a readiness to execute God's Commands upon the four corners i. e. Angles or Cardinal Points Ezek. 7.2 Matth. 24.31 Zech. 2.6 of the Earth holding back or restraining the four winds or Instruments of trouble and commotion Jerem. 49.36 Dan. 7.2 Zech. 6.5 of the Earth that the Wind 2 should not blow upon the Earth 3 i. e. that the Roman Empire should not be disturbed nor on the 3 Sea i. e. the common People Chap. 17.15 nor on any Tree 3 i. e. the great ones Isa 2.13 Zech. 11.2 Annotations on CHAP. VII 1 The Living Creatures do not appear but Angels in their stead and they standing on the Angles of the Earth and not on the Angles of the Throne as the living Creatures did whereby is signified that the strict Apostolical Purity was abated as I have often remarked as the Glory of God and the living Creatures in Ezekiel remove by degrees from the Temple as it grew more and more polluted until they departed totally from it Read and diligently Consider Exek 8.4 6.9 3.10 15-19 11 23. 2 Hereby is signified the Quiet which the Christian Empire enjoyed from Constantine to Theodosius in respect of what Commotions were before in the Empire whilst it was Pagan and should be afterwards upon the Death of Theodosius when its Ruin soon ensued upon the Winds blowing by the Trumpets Chap. 8. For by the Winds not blowing is not meant that they should have no Troubles and Commotions but according to the usual import of such Hyperbolical Expressions in Scripture that they should be so little or short as the Tempest under Julian was that they should be in comparison nothing at all especially in respect of those Commotions the Empire was to undergo within a short season which would produce great Changes in it by introducing a New Antichristian Supremacy with Ten Kings whereby the Monarchick Power of the Empire according to its Representation in Daniel shifted from its Iron Legs into its Feet and Toes part of Iron part of Clay and the Idolatrous Beastian Power was to pass into the Little Horn and the Ten Horns all which being to be brought to pass by great Concussions in the Empire its present State under Christian Emperours is accounted a Calm in respect of what was to ensue the Pagan Beast being then subdued and the Antichristian Man of Sin being withheld so that Christianity was then as it were in a quiet and prosperous condition 3 3 3 The whole Body of the Roman Empire is here represented by apt Metaphors taken from those things which are most subject to be disturbed with Winds 2 And I saw another Angel 4 ascending from the East i. e. Christ having the 5 Seal of the Living God i. e. a Commission from him Ezek. 9.4 and he cried with a loud voice to testify his Love and Affection to his chosen ones to the four Angels to whom it was given by God who had determined great changes in the Empire to hurt by executing of Judgments the Earth and the Sea vers 1. 4 Christ is called the Angel of the Covenant Malach. 3.1 and the Sun of Righteousness Malach. 4.2 and the Day-spring or rising Sun from the East Luke 1.78 and Ezek. 44.2.3 the Prince of the Church that is Christ and only he has Power to enter in at the Eastern Gate of that Mystical Temple from whence it is clear that Christ is here to be understood called so because he enlightens and comforts his Church and like the Rising Sun discovers Works of Darkness and the good from the bad See Dr. Hammond on Luke 1.78 Gregory's Observations pag. 73. and Dr. Pocock on Malachi 5 A Seal signifies a Command or a Commission from its being sealed with the King's Seal 1 Kings 21.8 Esth 3 12.8 8 10. 3 Saying hurt not the Earth neither the Sea or the Trees i. e. the Empire and its Inhabitants till we have 6 sealed or shall seal i. e preserve and secure in secret Ezek. 9 1.-4 the servants of 7 our God i. e. those who serve God purely and sincerely Nehem. 1.11 in their 8 foreheads i. e. very closely and securely 6 Men use to Seal those things which they would have concealed and preserved as we have before hinted on Chap. 5. 1. especially in times of danger so God commanded the Israelites to sprinkle Blood upon their Posts when he would save them whereby as with a Seal he concealed and preserved them Exod. 12. and the Scarlet Thread Josh 2.18 was a Sign or Seal to distinguish Rahab from those that perished and Ezek. 9. a Mark or Seal of Distinction Security and Preservation is put upon the Foreheads of those that were to be saved in that common Destruction And the prime and great import of Sealing is to signifie that the True Glory which shall appear in Christ's Kingdom the New Jerusalem was to be covered and secured while the false and worldly Splendor and Glory of the Antichristian Apostasie was cheifly visible and predominant the True Worshippers being now in the Temple the Witnesses in Sackcloath and the Woman in the Wilderness which are all equivalent with these sealed ones 7 Christ as Mediator and Head of the Church has a joynt Relation to God with his faithful Servants John 20.17 8 In allusion to the Custom of the Eastern Nations who marked their Servants on the Forehead And hereby is signified a close concealment and security when the Foreheads or Faces of his Servants are sealed or hid so that they could not be known 4 And I heard and therefore am certain of what I relate the number of them which were sealed or concealed and secured and there were sealed an 9 hundred forty and four thousand of all the Tribes of Israel i e a pure Apostolical Church was preserved but in a hidden and secret condition the glorious appearance of Christ's Kingdom being stopped and hindred 9 Israel in this Book as hath been before observed on Chap. 2.9 is put for the pure Christian Church
propagated from the Twelve Apostles as the Israelitish Church was from the Twelve Patriarchs And the Number 144000. is a square Number arising out of Twelve the square Root of it denoting the Apostolical Doctrine to be the Root Twelve times Twelve Thousand amounting to One Hundred and Forty Four Thousand and Foundation of the Church and that the pure Church is a square Body because 1. It can admit of no other Foundation than that of the Apostles as this square Number can admit of no other Root than Twelve that is it can be produced by no other Number multiplied into it self which is what is meant by a square Root in Arithmetick 2. Because the Church is to be built in all After-Ages upon this Doctrine multiplied by it self only as the square Number arises from the Root multiplied into it self And this is not to be accounted a groundless Fancy but is no small part of the Knowledge of the Eastern Nations in which Solomon and Moses were skilled who were wont to wrap up Mysteries in Hieroglyphicks and Numbers that they might be hid from the Vulgar and known only by Persons fitted and capacitated for them and at suitable Times and Opportunities it not being convenient that some Truths should lie exposed to all and at all Seasons And accordingly it hath pleased God for the same Reasons and that Humane Search and Diligence might be exercised and encouraged to make use of the same way of Concealment to shew that all Humane Knowledge is to be subservient to Divine and to his Church Whereupon he hath made frequent use of the Number Twelve in things pertaining to his People and the Church the Patriarchs being Twelve the Tribes Twelve the Gates of Jerusalem Twelve and the Apostles Twelve and the Measures of the New Jerusalem being adapted to this Number for the Reasons before hinted and for others which we shall have a fitter occasion to mention hereafter See the Notes on Chap. 1.20 and 20 4. By these sealed ones are meant a pure Apostolical Church preserved from the time of Constantine under the Calamities of the Empire and during the continuance of the Apostasy so as to be Witnesses against it but in a hidden and concealed Condition For 1. They are said to be sealed that is preserved as we have shewn but in a hidden Condition as the Law is commanded to be bound up and sealed Isa 8.16 and the Words of Prophecy to be closed up and sealed Dan. 12.4 9. And the Church is said to be a Spring shut up and a Fountain sealed Canticl 4.12 of which the Seven Thousand which God had reserved to himself in secret and had preserved from the Idolatry of Baal 1 Kings 19.18 are a Type 2. This sealing immediately follows the Downfall of Paganism under Constantine at the opening of the Sixth Seal in the former Chapter whereby is signified that some great danger was then near that Christ should seal and secure his True Church so soon after their Delivery from Persecution And the History of those Times clearly testifie that the True Spirit of Christianity soon decayed upon the Peace Honours Priviledges and Prosperity which the Church then enjoyed and that the excessive Veneration they had for Saints and Martyrs gave Rise to the Apostasie upon which the pure Church became sealed that is shut up and concealed and a stop was put to its appearance in that true spiritual Glory which it shall have under Christ's Kingdom for its degenerating by degrees into a Satanical Synagogue For sealing denotes also the Hindrances and Lets which Christ's Kingdom has met with by its being over-powered by the Apostasie which at last advancing to a Throne wholly covered and hid it in an obscure and sealed State no Church being at last visible but the Apostatized one 3. It appears from the Third Verse that the time of this sealing lasted from Constantine until the sounding of the first Trumpet i. e. until the Irruptions of the barbarous Nations after the Death of Theodosius the Great during which time the Apostolical Church was under a continual sealing i. e. it s Visible State was daily obscured and covered until at last by the destruction of the Empire and the rise of the Apostasy upon it it was closely sealed up in an invisible State 5 Of the 10 Tribe of Judah 11 were sealed twelve thousand Of the Tribe of Reuben 12 were sealed twelve thousand Of the Tribe of Gad 13 were sealed twelve thousand 10 The Number of each Tribe is particularised and determined to shew that the Members of God's pure Church are not chosen casually and at all Adventures but are determined by God and that out of every Tribe or part of the Catholick Church And the Numbers of each Tribe are equal viz. Twelve Thousand to each to shew that each particular Church is to be Apostolical in the profession of the entire and perfect Doctrine delivered to them and that they are to be firm and stable in themselves which is the (a) See the Notes on Chap. 20.4 Mystical signification of a Cubical (b) Dr. Moor's Cabbala Nicom Gerasen Arithmet Theolo apud Photii Biblioth pag. 459. Number such as the Chiliads or Thousands are out of which each Tribe consists 11 It is the Opinion of Mr. Mede that the Nature Qualities and Circumstances of the pure Church are included in the true Scripture-import and mystical meaning of the Names of the several Tribes which I shall therefore in submission to his Opinion insist upon more particularly because there is good ground in (c) Micah 1.14 Matth. 2.23 Rom. 2.29 Scripture for such Mystical Allusions taken from Names Judah is placed first because the Government was given to him in David and Christ came of that Tribe which for the Generality kept to the publick Worship of God and the Rightful Kingly Succession when the others had cast it of Hos 11.12 1 Chron. 5.2 Heb. 7.14 His Name signifies Confession or Praise Gen. 29 35.49 8. whereby is signified that the pure Church ought to pay a Eucharistical Service of Praise and Thanksgiving to God and confess him openly and publickly in his Worship 12 Reuben is the next because although he lost his Birth-right for defiling his Father's Bed Gen. 49.4 1 Chron. 5.1 yet he shewed great Courage together with Gad in that Noble Resolution they made of passing over Jordan ready Armed before their Brethren Numb 32. The Name signifies See the Son whom God out of his (a) Joseph Antiq. 1.19 Mercy sent when he saw and had a respect unto our Afflictions Gen. 29.32 Whereby is intimated that the Church ought to look up unto Christ in their afflicted State as God did upon them in their desperate Condition when he sent his Son to redeem them 13 Gad signifies a Troop as is plain from Gen. 30.11 compared with Gen. 49.19 called so because that being situated on the Borders of the Countrey it was to be always ready in Arms and so
should sometimes be overcome by its Emies but should at last overcome them whereby the State of the Church Militant and of the Future Victorious State of the Kingdom of Christ notwithstanding its many seeming Foils and Delays of Conquest is fitly typified 6 Of the Tribe of 14 Aser were sealed twelve Thousand of the Tribe of 15 Nepthali were sealed twelve Thousand of the Tribe of 16 Manasses were sealed twelve Thousand 14 Asher signifies blessed because he was the cause that his Mother was accounted happy and blessed Gen. 30.13 and because he lived in a fruitful and happy Soil Gen. 49.20 Deut. 33.24 Whereby is signified the Delight which Christ has in his Church the Fruitfulness of it and the Blessing which they enjoy who have God for their Lord Psalm 144 12-15 15 This is the Tribe in which our Saviour was very conversant his constant Residence being in Galilee and most frequently in Capernaum a City of Galilee in the Tribe of Nepthali as Mr. Mede has ingeniously observed upon which account Nepthali is placed before his Seniors and has received so great an Encomium from Moses Deut. 33.23 The Word signifies Gen. 30.8 very great and vehement wrestlings or Endeavours joyned with (a) Josepho 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Skill and Cunning or Fair Words Gen. 49.21 By which may be signified the frequent Wrestlings of the Church with God in Prayer Gen. 32 24-32 Hos 12.3 4 and their wrestling against Flesh and Blood and resisting the Wiles of the Devil and the Powers of Darkness with a prudent Simplicity joyning the Wisdom of the Serpent with the Harmlesness of the Dove 16 Manasseh signifies forgetting whereby is intimated that God makes all true Christians forget all their former Toil when he gives them Comfort and Joy in the Holy Ghost and that whosoever would follow him must forget and forsake all his Father's House and worldly Relations which seems to be the Gospel-import of the Words of Joseph Gen. 41.51 and the thing for which Levi is praised Deut. 33.9 7 Of the Tribe of Simeon 17 were sealed Twelve Thousand of the Tribe of 18 Levi were sealed Twelve Thousand of the Tribe of 19 Issachar were sealed Twelve Thousand 17 Simeon signifies Hearing whereby is noted that God hears the Prayers of his Church and the Hatred with which their Enemies hate them Gen. 29.33 18 Levi indeed had no portion in the Division of the Land as Dr. Hammond notes yet in Christ their Portion was as good as any Levi signifies joyned for the Church Christ's Spouse is to be joyned unto the Lord in Spirit and Fervent Affection and not unto Idolatrous Harlots which is the Spiritual meaning of the Book of Canticles Read Gen. 29.34 1 Cor. 6.16 17. Eph. 5 25-33 Deut. 33.9 19 Issachar signifies Gen. 30 17 18. a Hire or Reward given by God as appears from the Context from whence (a) Pag. 55. Philo makes him to be the Type of One whose Labours are Crowned and Rewarded by God and that as (b) Apud Rivetum in locum Jerome remarks with a great Compensation for slight and small Performances of no greater Value than Mandrakes by which the Rich Rewards which God bestows upon his Church for their imperfect Services may be not unfitly set forth 8 Of the Tribe of 20 Zabulon were sealed Twelve Thousand of the Tribe of 21 Joseph were sealed Twelve Thousand of the Tribe of 22 Benjamin were sealed Twelve Thousand 20 Zabulon signifies Dwelling Gen. 30.20 which was the Tribe upon the Borders of which our Saviour himself dwelt Matth. 4.13 from which place diligently compared with Isa 9.1 it may be gathered that they shall have the greatest share of Christ's Presence who have undergone the greatest Misery and Afflictions and that he will come and dwell with the ignorant but humble person rather than with self-conceited and proud Professors as Christ dwelt with the ignorant Galileans rather than at Jerusalem whether he went not but upon some solemn Occasions See Mr. Mede upon this place and Isa 57.15 John 14.23 Matth. 9.13 21 Joseph signifies He will add or adding Gen. 10.24 for God daily adds to his Church more Blessings and continues his Grace to those who pray unto him and use their own diligent Endeavours Gen. 30 22.49 22-26 Deut. 33 12-17 22 Benjamin signifies the Son of the Right Hand Genes 35.18 For the Church which was Benoni or the Son of Sorrows unto Christ as being purchased by his Sufferings and Blood is yet unto him and his Father a Benjamin that is much loved and regarded as the Phrase is interpreted Deut. 33.12 as near and dear to him as the Right Hand the most Honourable of the Two Upon which account the people of Israel are called the Men of God's right hand Psal 80.17 And we may observe that Dan is here wholly left out and Ephraim not mentioned by Name because they both soon apostatized to Idolatry it being a Custom amongst the Jews to leave out of their Genealogies and Chronologies the Names and Times of Wicked Persons as Er and Onan Judah's wicked Sons are omitted by (a) Antiq. 2.7 Vossius de Sibyllin Orac. cap. 1. Josephus when he reckons up his Posterity And altho they are mentioned in Ezekiel yet that was when the whole Church was purified and in its Jerusalem State whereas at this present time of Numbring Dan and Ephraim were the Types of the Apostasie and were therefore to be omitted and not to be mentioned but when the Righteous amongst them had been purified and the Wicked had been purged away by God's Judgments 9 23 After this Vision of the Apostolical Church secured and concealed I beheld and lo a great multitude which no man could number of all Nations and Kingdoms and People and Tongues i. e. the 24 Catholick Church of Christ's Kingdom Dan. 7.14 27. stood before the Throne and before the Lamb in communion with God and Christ in his Kiâ—gdom cloathed with white Robes denoting Honour and Purity and 25 Palms in their Hands denoting Victory over Persecutions and Temptations and the Triumphs of Christ's Kingdom 23 The following Vision is taken from the Descriptions given in this Prophecy of the New Jerusalem State in Christ's Kingdom to which only it can in propriety of Speech belong as appears from the many high Expressions made use of in it and from the Elders the Representatives of the Jewish Church having the Precedency which will not be until the New Jerusalem State And yet because that Kingdom is not to come until the Days of the Voice of the Seventh Angel who has not yet sounded therefore this Description cannot belong to the Kingdom it self but to some Typical Resemblance or Pre-appearance of it it being usual in this Prophecy as I have already observed for the Spirit to describe the several Praeludia or faint Resemblances and imperfect Appearances of Christ's Kingdom by the State of the Kingdom it self to shew what the Church ought and might have
32 living Fountains of Waters i. e. perpetual Comforts and Refreshments Isa 12 3. John 7.38 and God shall wipe away all Tears from their Eyes i. e. remove all Causes and Occasions of Sorrow 32 So the Jews call Fountains continually bubling and springing up Canticl 4.15 John 4 10. CHAP. VIII The Text. 1 AND when he i. e. Christ had opened the seventh Seal there was silence 1 in Heaven about the space of * half an hour i. e. there was a short respite from the commotions which followed upon the Sounding of the Trumpets Annotations on CHAP. VIII 1 The Metaphors here are taken from the (a) Mr. Mede Hammond on Luke 1.1 Ainsworth on Lev. 16.12 13. Temple-Service which shews that Church-Affairs are here typified as well as those of the Empire in which at the offering of Incense the People prayed without in the Court in private whilst the Priest offered the Incense which Prayers were very short and the whole Service performed in silence whereas the offering of Sacrifice the first part of their Service was accompanied with Singing Musick and Trumpets 2. Chron. 29.25 * See on Ver. 7. Num. 11. 2 And I saw the seven Angels which stood 2 before God as ready to execute his Pleasure and to them were given by God's appointment seven 3 Trumpets to denounce seven Judgments 2 These are expresly called Angels and not The Spirits of God whereby they are distinguished from the Seven Spirits Chap. 1.4 And by these Seven standing before God is denoted the Preparedness of the several Instruments and Means required to the executing of God's Judgments by the Seven Trumpets and also the Majesty of the Divine Presence is expressed by them in allusion to the Custom of the Eastern Kings from whose Rites many of the Descriptions in Scripture are taken who had Seven Princes who saw their Faces or stood before them and were the Chief in their Kingdoms Esther 1.14 Grotius on Matth. 18.10 3 Here is an Allusion also to the Temple Service where it was the Custom to blow with Trumpets after the Oblation of Incense as appears from Ecclus 50.15 16. strict Silence being observed before it as here the Angels have Trumpets given them to prepare to sound but sound not until the Incense was offered Angel signifies in this Prophecy not only the Angelical Spirits but also the subordinate Ministers employed under them here upon Earth as has been before shewn on Chap. 1.1 20. And therefore here may be meant by this Angel the Emperour Theodosius who is the Chief Person concerned in this Vision as we shall shew hereafter whose Prayer at the Head of his Army before the Battel with Eugenius is very remarkable in History and also the whole Christian Church which joyned with him in Prayer to God upon that great Occasion Angel being taken Collectively in this Book for all the several Instruments made use of in it 3 And another Angel or Ministring Spirit representing the Persons employed in the like service on Earth came and stood at or by the Altar of incense Exod. 30.1 having a Golden Censer or Vessel to hold Incense Levit. 16.12 Hebr. 9.4 and there was 4 given unto him much Incense Levit. 16.12 13. Rev. 5.8 that he should Offer it with the Prayers of all Saints 5 or Holy Chrians upon the Golden Altar of Incense Exod. 30 3 6 7.40 26. which was 6 before the Throne of God 4 Here may be an Allusion to a Custom in the Jewish Service of bringing the Odors to the Priest by others Exod. 27.20 See Maimonides in Ainsworth on Levit. 24.2 5 Here is also an Allusion to the High Priests offering Incense in the Temple while the People called here All Saints i. e. the Holy and Peculiar People of God prayed in the Outward Court And by what is here delivered and in the former Verses is intimated that the daily Publick Sacrifice of pure Worship which was wont to be performed in the Outward Court should cease and was about to be contracted into a retired and a silent one signified by the Silence Vers 1. and the Incense-Worship which was within the Temple and that although the Saints or Holy People were as yet without in the Outward Court not yet trodden down by Antichristian Defilements that nevertheless it would not be long but about half an hour or a short space before that also which was a Type of the Visible Church and its Worship should be polluted by them concerning which Allusion and the Grounds of it see more on Chap. 11.1 6 As the Altar of Incense in the Temple was before the Mercy-seat Exod. 30.6 7.40 26. 4 And the smoak of the Incense Chap. 5.8 which came with the Prayers of the Saints ascended up before God out of the Angels hand i. e. they were grateful and acceptable unto him through the Merits and Intercession of Christ Psal 141.2 Acts 10.4 5 And the Angel took the censer which was now empty the Incense being consumed and their Prayers ended and filled it with fire from the Altar of 7 Sacrifice or Burnt-Offerings and cast it i. e. dispersed God's Judgment and fiery Indignation Ezek. 10.2 Luke 12.49 upon the Earth i. e. the Roman Empire and there were 8 Voices and Thundrings and Lightnings Chap. 4.5 and an Earthquake i. e. extraordinary Commotions in the Empire and great Manifestations of Christ's Kingdom Chap. 6.12 7 For there was a continual Fire on the Altar of Sacrifice but none on the Altar of Incense See Ainsworth on Exod. 30.8 and on Lev. 6.12 13. This Service was performed in the Temple but the Fire was taken off the Altar of Burnt Sacrifice in the Outward Court to shew that God's Judgments represented by Fire which denotes in Scripture any destructive thing came upon them by Reason of the Gentilism or Antichristian Pollutions of the Outward Court or Visible Church 8 The other Seals having been distinguished by some notable Events in the Empire it is reasonable to think that this is so too and there is none which agrees better to it than the Wonderful Victory (a) Sâ—â—aâ— Hist 5.25 Sozom. 7.24 Howel 's History Part 2. pag. 427 of Theodosius over Eugenius A. D. 395. Because 1. It follows in order the Event foretold in the sixth Seal this Victory giving the Deadly Blow to Heathenism and perfecting what was begun by Constantine and some of his Successors under that Seal 2. Because the following Trumpets denoting the fall of the Empire began to produce their Effects not long after this Defeat So that it exactly corresponds as a middle Event with the foregoing and following ones 3. The Vengeance of God fell extraordinarily upon the Pagans and their Defeat by a wonderful Tempest was miraculous as Claudian the Heathen Poet confesses and as the Soldiers who were present at the Battel told (b) 〈◊〉 â—iâ—itat Dâ—i 5.26 Augustine which is very naturally expressed by Fire cast by an Angel from Heaven upon Earth Fire being a general
besieged Constantinople and fell into Italy not long after the Worship of Images was established by a Law in the Second Council of Nice A. D. 787. 5 And to them it was given that they should not 7 kill them or utterly destroy even the Apostate Antichristian Roman Empire but that they should be 8 Tormented five Months of yeats and their Torment was as the Torment of a Scorpion when he striketh a man i. e. very 9 vexatious and painful Prov. 23.32 Ezek. 2.6 7 To kill a Body Politick is as (b) De Jur. Bell. Pac. lib. 2. cap. 9. Grotius has observed to make it cease to be either by utterly destroying the people of it or by subjecting it to a New Authority whereby it ceases to be what it was before Neither of which were the Saracens able to do in the Eastern or Western Roman Empire for although they often besieged Constantinople yet they could never take it and they tormented Rome and Italy by frequent and sudden Incursions but had never possession of the former nor any long quiet settlement in any part of the latter But as (c) Histor Insabr pag. 115. Putean remarks Their Incursions into Italy were like a sudden Tempestuous Wind which vanishes after it has done its Mischief So that as to the Chief and Capital parts of the Roman Empire they never had power to kill them or reduce them under their Authority and could not fix the Seat of their Empire in any of its Imperial Cities as the Turks afterwards did theirs at Constantinople which is expresly called slaying or killing the Third part of Men Vers 15. but seated themselves first at Damascus in Syria afterwards at Bagdad 8 Here is a manifest Allusion to the time that Locusts are wont to live which (a) Bocharti Hieroz pag. 495. Naturalists observe to be Five Months which we are to understand according to the Prophetical way of reckoning of which there hath been mention already made on Chap. 2.10 of Months of Years Now if we consider the whole length of the Duration of the Saracenick Empire we shall find it to be precisely 435. Years reckoning from A. D. 622. the Aera of Mahometism unto A. D. 1057. when the Turkish Empire succeeded as (b) Lib. 3.7 pag. 336 337. Elmacinus and Dr. Pocock in the Margin of Abul-Pharajai has particularly noted Which Line of Time consists of a Ternary of Five Months of Years each of them amounting to an Hundred and Forty Five Years reckoning (c) See the Notes on Chap. 11.2 Twenty Nine Years of Days to each Month of which Two Five Months being allotted to their tormenting and hurting of Men the first in this Verse and the second in the tenth the remaining five months must be understood to belong to their declining and decaying condition when they could not torment others And with this there is a wonderful Agreement in History which dates the Decay and Division of this Empire from about 290 or 300 years after its Rise For Elmacinus divides his History into Three Books as we do the Duration of their Empire into a Ternary of five months treating in the first Book of the Original and Encrease of their Empire which he extends from A.D. 622. to about A.D. 746 in the second Book of the Declension of it and in the third of its Distraction and Dissipation placing the fatal (a) Elmacin pag. 255. Abul-Phar pag. 175. Division of it about A. D. 936. not much above twice five months after its first appearance when he confesses that the Power of the Chalif was diminished and the Kingdom weakned his Revenues taken away and nothing but a Name left him the Turks prevailing daily at Bagdad from A. D. 863. and deposing the Califs very frequently And with 〈◊〉 Account agrees the Observation of (b) Histor. pag. 409. edit Parisiens Leunclav Histor Musulman pag. 67. Cedrenus who relating the Prediction of a Famous Alexandrian Astronomer who foretold that the prosperous Power and flourishing Dominion of the Saracens should be but for Three Hundred and Nine Years judges him to have erred indeed but not very much in his Calculation And therefore I cannot but upon this occasion recommend the Study of Scriptural especially Prophetical Chronology to all Learned Men no ways doubting but that they will find that the greatest Difficulties may be cleared up by it 9 Bochartus (c) Hieroz pag. 639 640 642. notes That the Torment of Scorpions is very grievous and of all other the most vexatious whence troublesome Persons are likned unto them Ezek. 2.6 Ecclus 25 15.26 7. and observes that they also as well as the Locusts hurt only for five months Now that the Torment of the Saracens was not only of the like duration but of the like Nature History sufficiently testifies especially as to what concerns the Two Imperial Seats Rome and Constantinople which as the next Verse clearly sets forth with which History accords were frequently tormented with fresh Alarms of their Incursions and Invasions 6 And in those days shall men seek death and shall not find it and shall desire to die and death shall flee from them i. e. they shall be tormented with continual Invasions so that they shall desire Conquest and Death rather than such a mischievous and unsetled condition Joel 2.6 Jerem. 8.3 7 And the Shapes of the Locusts were like unto 10 Horses prepared to bâ—â—iel i. e. they were stout and swift Joel 2.4 Job 33 23-25 and on their Heads were as it were 11 Crowns of Gold signifying their Victories and Success and the many Kingdoms should submit unto them and their Faces were as the 12 Faces of men i. e. they had seemingly rational and plausible pretences Rev. 4.7 Dâ—n 7.4 8 And they had Hair as the 12 Hair of VVomen i. e their Pretences were insinuating enticing and deceitful Canticl 4 1.6 5. and their Teeth was as the Teeth of Lions i. e. cruel and devouring not white and clean Canticl 4 2.6 6. Joel 1.6 10 (a) Hieroz pag. 474. Bochartus observes that Locusts represent Horses not only in their Swiftness which is here chiefly pointed at the Conquests of the Saracens being carried on with prodigious and almost incredible speed but also in the shape of their Heads the Figure of which may be seen in (b) Pag. 177. Ludolphus's Notes on his Aethiopick History 11 As their rapid success is described before so have we here represented the great Number of Kingdoms which they over-run for as Mr. Mede has truly noted no Nation ever had so large an Extent of Dominion or ever subdued so many Kingdoms in so short a space 12 12 (c) Hieroz pag. 456. Bochartus notes That there are some hairy and rough Locusts and Mr. Mede observes that the ancient Arabians or Saracens were Famous for (d) Plin. 6.28 Ammian Marcel pag. 654. Hieronym in vit Malchi wearing long Hair and having their heads attired like women But these
4.19 Salaho Ddin who took Aegypt from the Saracenick Chalifs about A. D. 1169. where the Turkish and Circassian Mamlucs i. e. Slaves or Servants afterwards bore sway for about 275 years as Dr. Pocock informs us in his Supplement to Abul-Pharajai But on a sudden A. D. (d) Abul-phar p. 280-368 1202. there arose a New Empire in the World the Mogul-Tartars or Tatars called so from a (e) Bizar de reb Perfic River in that Countrey of that Name falling in upon the Eastern Empire of the Turks and making Incursions as far as Asia Minor which the Arabians call Rumaea and at last taking Bagdad A. D. 1258. whereby the Dynasty of the Arabian Mussulmen was transferred unto the Kings of the Mogul-Tartars according to Abul-pharajai which Empire nevertheless lasted not long in those parts for it was broken by mutual Discords about A. D. 1335. where Dr. (a) Supplem ad Abul-phar pag. 1-6 Pocock places the end of that Dynasty nothing considerable being performed by them until the Time of Tamerlan Timur Lenc who died A. D. 1404. Since which time they have contained themselves within their own Eastern bounds and have not carried their Arms into the Western parts This great and terrible Invasion gave occasion to the Rise of the (b) Annal. Turcici Pandect Turcic Histor. Musulman per Leunclav Pocock Supplem ad Abul-phar pag. 41-53 Ottoman Turks who being beaten out of Asia by the Mogul-Tartars and hearing of the Fame of the Sultans of Iconium began their March from the Province of Mahan in the Dominions of the Persians towards Asia Minor A. D. 1214. under the Conduct of Solyman-Shahum to one of whose Sons he himself being drowned at the passing of Euphrates Aladin Sultan of Iconium assigned a Portion of Land near the Mountains of Armenia From which small beginnings they raised themselves by their Valour and the Favour of Aladin to such a heighth that A. D. 1299. (c) Dr. Pocock Supplem pag. 42. Othman commonly called Ottoman Solyman's Grandchild took the Name of Sultan and so enlarged their Dominions that his Son he himself dying A. D. 1325. took Brusia formerly Prusa a City of Bithynia either that Year or very soon after and made it the First Seat as Hadrianople was afterwards and Constantinople is now of the mighty Ottoman Empire which (d) Leunclav Histor pag. 78 85 93. succeeded the Aladinian Sultany after it had been established in Asia Minor about Ninety Years Since which time their History is so well known that I shall not further insist upon it having brought it down to the Times here mentioned viz. their most Famous passing the River Euphrates and that at a time as (a) Narrat Turcic pag. 41. Camerarius has very well noted when Ecclesiastical Authority had advanced it self above the Civil and Divisions and Superstition had much encreased amongst Christians Now the Cause why this great Empire should be Characterized by Four Angels bound in the River Euphrates and afterwards loosed is a thing worthy our disquisition and it may perhaps be for these Reasons 1. Because that the Kingdom of the Turks was divided into Four Proefectures or Principalities whilst they were bound in the River Euphrates that is had made no Incursions into those Western parts which are bounded by that Famous River For so we are expresly told in the Relation (b) Excerpt e Legat. inter Histor Byzant pag. 106-108 of an Embassy from the Scythian Turks to Justin Junior about A.D. 570. where the Turkish Embassadours being asked hy the Emperour concerning the State of their Kingdom tell him that the Chief Power was indeed solely in their King Disabulus but that their Kingdom was divided into Four 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or Principalities 2. At their most memorable passing the River Euphrates they were under the Command of Four (c) Pocock Supplem pag. 41 42. Captains viz. Solyman (d) Leunclav Hist pag. 86. Shahum and his Three Sons and upon the death of Solyman who was drowned in the passing of that River a circumstance not altogether to be disregarded they were again under Four Commanders viz. Otrogules and his Three Sons of whom Ottoman was one who upon their being loosed by having power from God to pass the River Euphrates laid the Foundations of that mighty Empire All which are no obscure Circumstances but most notable and most famous passages of their History the Number of Four Illustrious Families being so remarkable amongst them that (a) Pandect Turcic pag. 411. Paris edit ad calcem Chalcondyl Leunclavius hath a particular Chapter about 3. They are not only remarkable for (b) Leunclav Hist 86 87. pag. Four Chief successive Families viz. the Seljukian Aladinian Oguzian and Ottoman but if Mr. Mede's Observation prove true they were actually divided into Four Tetrarchies or Sultanies whilst they were bound in Euphrates And lastly Because the Spirit of God in delivering Prophecies which are on purpose dark and aenigmatical may allude to many passages and circumstances in one and the same Type and Figurative Expression some less known and obvious than others to excite men's Industry why may not the Turkish Potentacy be signified by Four because of the Vniversality of its Conquests described Dan. 11 40-45 Four as Dr. Moor observes standing for a Note of Vniversality in the Cabbalistick Mysteries especially in the Graecian Monarchy which it was more immediately designed to kill or destroy For as the Horns of the Altar from which the Voice comes Vers 13. are Four to signifie the Vniversal Extent of Christ's Church so are there here Four Angels loosed to shew that this Woe was to fall Vniversally upon the Grecian Church and Monarchy described in Daniel Chap. 8.8 by Four Notable Horns towards the Four Winds of Heaven For the Turkish Empire as that Judicious Historian Mr. (c) Turkish History in the Preface and pag. 981. Knolls has observed hath brought fatal mutations not upon Christendom only but the whole World having under its Command the chief and most Fruitful parts of Europe Africa and Asia and having fixed it self almost altogether even in the self same Kingdoms Countries and Regions as belonged to the Greek Empire For although the Third of the Earth and of Men be the Symbol of the Grecian Empire yet in respect of its Vniversality it may also be represented by the Number Four 20 To bind is to hinder and restrain as appears from Rev. 20.2 and that by secret Impulses and Instincts as the Word is taken Acts 20.22 And from hence we may learn That the Bounds of Empires and their progress are from God as are also the Providential Seasons in which he lets loose Barbarous Nations to chastise Christians 21 A great River upon which the Old Babylon the Type of the Antichristian City stood it was the fatal Boundary of the Roman Empire and was so oftentimes to the Turks they making but small Advances beyond it except in Asia
Antichrist having changed Times Dan. 7.25 his Time may very well be said to be no more when it is changed into those of another Nature See the Annotations on Chap. 11 2.20 4. 7 * But in the days of the Voice or sounding of the seventh Angel wben he shall 12 begin to sound Chap. 11.15 and 13 when the Mystery or wonderful Prophetical Secret Dan. 12.6 of God concerning the coming of the Kingdom of Christ Dan. 12 5-13 Rom. 11.25 26. should be or is finished there shall be Time indeed but of a quite different Nature from the former as he hath declared or Evangelized the good Tidings of his Son's Kingdom in the beginning progress and perfection of it to his Servants the Prophets Acts 3 21-26 * Dr. (a) Oper. Theol. pag. 18 Moor reads 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and renders it except or saving making it to be the same with 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which is a Criticism neither necessary nor grounded upon the Credit of Manuscripts 12 The Word is rightly thus translated and so it signifies Luke 7.2 John 4.47 Acts 23.27 And Beza hath well noted on John 4.47 That Aristotle prudently distinguishes betwixt 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the latter Word signifying what is in preparation or readiness to begin and not always what is past 13 The Particle And is in the Greek Copies which ought to be restored to the Translation and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or when to be reduplicated or repeated 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 with 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and the Words are to be translated when it is finished and not shall or should be finished for then it should have been 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and not 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 From these Words thus settled and interpreted in conjunction with Daniel may be drawn these following Observations 1. That the Antichristian or Gentile Times are to have an End For Christ here swears That such time shall be no longer and in Daniel he swears that it shall be but for a Time Times and an half that is 1260. years as hath been before shewn 2. That these Times are to end before the Days of the seventh Angel's sounding For it is expresly affirmed by Christ Ver. 6. That there should be Time no longer but until those Days in which there was to be Time indeed but of another Nature 3. The precise Time of their Ending is affirmed in Daniel Chap. 12.6 7. to be when the dispersing or scattering of the power of the holy people shall be accomplished For one of the Angels having asked Christ Verse 6. how long or what space of Time it would be to the End of Wonders or of These VVonders i. e. Those he had before spoken of from Verse 1. to the 5th as the LXX according to their Custom enlarge upon the Words It is answered Verse 7. that it would be Twelve hundred and sixty years to the End of these VVonders and circumstantiating thereby the time of their End more particularly that when the dispersion should be accomplished all of those things or wonders should be finished thereby plainly intimating that the scattering was to last during the Twelve hundred and sixty years and that they were not to end until that was over By which accomplishment of the scattering or dispersion of the power of the holy people can be meant no other than the VVoman's coming out of the VVilderness where the holy people were dispersed and scattered because that dispersion is of the same Duration with this as appears from Rev. 12.6 and is immediately to precede the Voice of the seventh Angel as will be shewn hereafter on Rev. 11.11 14. 4. At the End of Time that is of the Antichristian and Gentile Times there shall be Time again but of another Nature For Christ having sworn there should be Time no longer adds But in the Days of the voice of the seventh Angel intimating thereby that Time was then to be again which must be understood to make the Sense compleat And therefore Antichristian Time consisting of several 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 being ended the succeeding Time must be of a different Nature 5 The Beginning of this New Time and its Period are are here precisely limited For 1. In general it is to be in the days or times of the voice or sounding of the seventh Angel 2. It is to begin precisely when he begins or prepares to sound 3. It is to last until the Mystery of God or the wonders and wonderful things Dan. 12.6 7. shall be finished that is until Christ shall say It is finished It is finished at the entrance of the Thousand Years of the New Jerusalem State when another sort of Time begins 6. The whole Duration of this New Time is given in precise Numbers by the Prophet Daniel For after he had assigned a Time Times and a half to the scattering of the holy people he afterwards verse 11. adds thirty years unto them thereby making up the twelve hundred and sixty years which are included in them to be twelve hundred and Ninety for the full Time of the continuance of the Antichristian Abomination And then verse 12. adds Forty Five more to the twelve hundred and Ninety making the whole time from the beginning of the scattering of the holy people to be Thirteen hundred and thirty Five years when he promiseth a blessed State verse 12. So that hereby we have gained a Line of Time consisting of Seventy five years reaching from the beginning of the sounding of the seventh Angel where John fixes it through the Voices and Vials issuing out of the Seventh Trumpet until the finishing the Mystery of God in the appearance of Christ's glorious Kingdom which will be but in a State of Preparation or in a Course or Succession of Finishing until that Time But I cannot but after all observe that (a) Apud Poli Sym. Piscator upon the place supposes 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 to be Emphatical and to signifie as much as 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is even then shall be finished the Mystery the Aorist 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 according to the Genius of the Greek Language being sometimes put for the Future According to which Acceptation of the Word the Seventh Verse which is a part of the Oath here and in Daniel will relate to the finishing of the Mystery it self and not only declare that there shall be Time for the finishing of it which latter sense seems to be not so fit to be the Subject of this Solemn Oath as the former although according to the ordinary Grammatical Construction of the Words it appears to be the most natural Lastly From the due consideration of this Chapter we may conclude that the Reformation begun A. D. 1517. is foretold in it 1. Because it is the Only Remarkable Event in History relating to the Kingdom of Christ following the taking of Constantinople by the Turks represented
in which it may please God to correct the Errors of Men Which says he met together with fit Occasions and Instruments which knew how to make use of them in the time of Leo. For although Men's Minds were then disposed for a Reformation by Reason of the Scandalous Lives Ignorance and Tyranny of the Clergy yet this Effect could not have been produced singly from these Occasions if the Times ordained by God's Infinite Wisdom had not conspired with them And what less than Divine Assistance could give Life and Success to a single unassisted Person so as to enable (a) Basnage ubi supra him to convert a whole Town by one single Sermon and to break through all manner of difficulties with an invincible Courage notwithstanding the utmost Oppositions made against him by that Great Emperour Charles the Fifth and the United Forces and Counsels of the Pope and his Party So great Reason had (b) Calvin 2 Disc c. Westfal Opuscul fol. 785. 787. ibid. 137 141. Calvin to stile Luther the Trumpet or rather the Thunder which raised the World out of its Lethargy and to say That it was not Luther that spoke but God that thundered by his Mouth Neither were the forementioned Circumstances only observable in the Lutheran Reformation but in that begun in Switzerland and Geneva For (c) Sleidan passim pag. 48 70 76. vita ejus per Melchior Adam Zuinglius was the only Person which appeared at first amongst the Helvetians And although he met with great Opposition from the Popish Cantons and from his own people for endeavouring to disswade them from being Mercenary in the Wars of Forreign Princes yet he broke through all Obstacles and propagated his Doctrine in a few years in very many parts of that and the Neighbouring Countries The like to which appears in the Reformation of (d) See Mr. Spoon's History of Geneva Geneva begun A. D. 1532. only by Two Ministers of Piedmont who taking Occasion from some Divisions amongst the People upon some Protestant Theses being set up by a few young Men in several Corners of the Street propagated the Truth in a short time very successfully the Common people hearing them gladly For it was not until afterwards A.D. 1536. that Mr. Calvin that great Instrument for the promoting the Truth Power and Simplicity of Religion came to that City whose setling there was no less Providential and unexpected then his Success For he intended only to take it in his way to Basil or Strasburg in one of which places he designed to continue for some time and when he was perswaded by Monsieur Farel to tarry there he met with so great Opposition that he was banished the City and yet upon his Return prevailed so far as to settle his Doctrine and Discipline there although it were utterly contrary to the Looseness of their Manners where it hath ever since been exercised with great Vigour that small State and City flourishing according to the wise Observation of Mr. Spon with which he shuts up his History of that City whilst other Cities have perished and mighty States have been overturned which God often permits by his admirable Providence to let great and small States know that their Subsistence or Ruine depends not on their own Strength or Weakness but that they are all in his hand and their Happiness and misery come only from him But his Doctrine and Discipline did not contain it self within the Narrow Bounds of that City but that small Leaven leavened many Kingdoms and Countries viz. France Poland Germany Scotland the Netherlands and Hungary and hath maintained it self chiefly by the Severity of the Manners of its Followers and the Strictness of their Discipline as the Judicious French (a) Mezeray's History pag. 951. See the Synodicon of the Reformed Churches of France lately Printed in English Historian hath observed which is so great that Henry (b) Perefixes Life of Henry 4th ad an 1587. the Fourth himself altho he was then King of Navarr and Chief of their Party was forced by the Consistory of Rochel to make Reparation for a Scandal he had given by his Looseness 4. The Reformation which (c) Vita ejus per Melchior Adam pag 122. Luther foretold should never be extinguished hath been also miraculously preserved as the Kingdom of Christ hath always been amidst the Convulsions of States and Empires and hath been many times rescued from imminent Destructions by extraordinary Means and unforeseen Accidents Whereby it appears that it is a Plant planted by our Heavenly Father else it had been before now rooted up The Troubles were so great which the First Reformers encountred with that good (a) Sleidan pag. 140. Melancthon was very much dejected at them and even Luther himself although of an undaunted Spirit was sometimes oppressed with disconsolate Thoughts about the State of Things and had gone back if he had not been extraordinarily assisted When his Cause was in great danger as Fox (b) Vol. 2. pag. 49 50. remarks the marvellous Providence of God who had this matter in guiding poovided a Remedy where the Power of Man did fail and stirred up the whole Vniversity of Wittenberg to petition Duke Frederick in his behalf when he was upon the Point of Banishment Whereupon the Duke began to consider his Doctrine and to favour him Several times did God preserve this tender plant notwithstanding the many Wars Leagues and Consultations to root it out as upon the Death of (c) Sleidan 250. George of Saxony the many Successes of the Emperour but especially that (d) Sleidan 375 Mezeray pag. 620 624 632 633 954. Melch. Adam Vita Calvin pag. 80. Summum Religionis discrimen c. remarkable one when the Elector of Saxony and the Landgrave of Hesse were Prisoners when the Reformation in Germany had been entirely destroyed if God had not ordered Matters otherwise by a strange turn of Affairs whereby the Emperour was at last forced to grant the Edict of (a) Tbuan Hist Tome 1. pag. 503. Mezeray 954. Passau which is still the Security of the Reformation in those parts and the True Foundation of the Liberty of the Protestants as Monsieur Mezeray observes which was done for fear of a War which threatned him on both sides from the French and the Turks by which means Protestantism was generally preserved in Germany during the Reign of Charles the Fifth And yet to see the admirable Care of Divine Providence over the Vine which he had planted for when (b) Sleidan pag. 463. the Reformation was at its lowest Ebb in Germany by the forementioned occasion it went on very vigorously in England the Mass being abolished there at that very Critical Conjuncture whereby the Protestants were kept in heart and its future increase was provided for In England as (c) Fox Vol. 2. page 273 370. Vol. 3. page 386 792 800. Bishop Burnet's History of the Reformation part 1. page 135 136.
the Mystical signification of what is delivered in the Law of Moses with relation to the Sanctuary God's Worship and his Priests particularly Exodus 28 29 30 Chapters Leviticus 10 8-11 and Chapters 21 and 22. Ezekiel 42 13 14.44 8-31 much of Ezekiel from Chapter 40 to the end Matth. 18 15-20 19 17.20 24-29 23 6-12 and Grotius on those places John 15 27.17 â—0-23 Acts 1 13-26 2 37-47 3 1.4 31-37 5 1-14 41 42.6 1-8 8 2.9 39.12 5.13 2 3 15.14.22 23 27. Chapter 15.16 2 4 5 25.20 7 11 27-36 Romans from Chapter 12 to the End of the Epistle First Epistle to the Corinthians from the First Chapter to the 15th and Chapter 16. most part of the Second Epistle to the Corinthians Galatians 2 and 6. Ephesians 2 19-22 Chapters 4th 5th and 6th the Epistle to the Philipppians the greatest part of the Epistles to the Colossians Tbessalonians Timothy and Titus Hebrews 5 12-14 and Chapters 6.1 2.12 14-29 and Chapter 13 the generality of the Epistle of James 1 Peter 2d Chapter to the End of the Epistle 2 Peter 1 3-21 and Chapter 2d and 3d most of the Epistles of John and Christ's Letters to the Seven Churches Which places diligently compared with what is prophesied of Christ's Kingdom in the Prophets and the Three last Chapters of the Revelations will furnish a Man with an exact Idea of the Church as it was designed by Christ with respect to Faith Discipline and Manners Scripture which treat of Matters relating to Church-Affairs and then to compare the State of the Churches now in being with what God requires in a pure Church and I am confident they will abate much of a too fond Dotage upon any particular Constitution or Church-State that is now in the World Of which Opinion also are the Honest and the Judicious of all Parties when some happy Conjunctures force them upon cool thoughts and peaceable Considerations which yet do not meet with their desired Success but in God's own Times and Seasons Which is remarkably evident in the Reformation of the Church of England which although begun by very good and great Men and carried on often very vigorously and successfully yet hath not been able to arrive to those Degrees of Perfection which even the first Reformers who planted it and watered it with their Blood (a) Reformatio Legum Ecclesiastic designed and (b) Preface to the Comminat Fox's Book of Martyrs edit ult Vol 3. page 67 105 107 120 121 137 362 374 385 400 403 411 412 427 442 537. Bishop Burnet's History of the Reformation edit secunda Tome 1. Praefat. pag. 147 148 189 262 300 303 315 364. in the Collect. pag. 160 178 182. Praefat. ad Vol. secund and page 44 59 67 71 72 73 75 79 80 95 96 101 104. ad 110 112 141 145 152 153 154 155 156 182 189 190 191 196. ad 202 218 219 304 339 376 377 387 390 394 395 396 397 398 399 406 407 420. Camdeni Elizab. ed. Amstelod pag. 26 in Praefat. 391 392. Sir Simon D' Ewes's Journal pag. 156-158 161 166 167 177 184 257 302 303 329 357-360 557 639. Bishop Stillingfleet's Preface to his Vnreasonableness of Separation the Discourses written lately about the Ecclesiastical Commission and the Convocation a Paper entituled Grievances of the Church of England supposed to be written by Archbishop Sancroft Letters of the English Reformers in the Library of Switzerland and Bishop Burnet's excellent Discourse of the Pastoral Care wished for But what through the inconstant Humour of a Vain and a Cruel Prince under whom it begun the Avarice and Dissentions of the Chief Ministers of rhe Court of King Edward the Sixth the short Reign of that Prince the contrary turn of Affairs in Q. Maries Days and the invincible prejudices of that great Princess Q. Elizabeth under whom it was settled who was against Alterations in the Church the glorious Work did not receive the last and finishing Hand of its Master-Builders but has ever since been hindered and retarded by several strange Occurrences but chiefly by the contrary struglings of two Parties ever since the Differences at Frankford whereby through mutual Animosities and immoderate Opposition the chief Obstacle to all Noble and Peaceable Designs things have sometimes rather gone back than forwards So that there is little hope of going on unto Perfection until the Times of Restitution begin to appear and God shall be pleased to dispose the Minds of Men by his over-ruling Providence to so necessary and so glorious an Undertaking 8 And the Voice which I heard from Heaven verse 4. spake unto me again and said go and take the little Book which is open in the hand of the Angel which standeth or stood upon the Sea and upon the Earth 9 And I went unto the Angel and said unto him Give me the little Book And he said unto me Take it and eat 14 it up i. e. commit it to Memory and keep it secret as yet Dan. 7 28.12 4 9. Ezek. 2 8.3 1-10 and it shall make thy Belly bitter because what is contained in it must be delayed for a longer time Dan. 8.26 27.10 14-16 but it shall be in thy mouth when thou prophesiest again Verse 11. sweet as honey as containing the sweet and glad tidings of Christ's Kingdom Psalm 19 10.119 103. Jerem. 15.16 Ezek. 3.3 14 To eat signifies to meditate and digest Divine Truths as appears from our Saviour's Discourse John 6. and withal to keep them close and secret as Mary did Luke 2.19 51 the Belly denoting in Scripture the most secret Thoughts and Cogitations of a Man By which is signified that Christ's Kingdom which had appeared but for a short time only so long as to be just seen open and whilst the Book could be taken into his hand and mouth should soon have a stop put to it and thereby create much Sorrow to all the true Servants of God but that it should again appear signified by being again in his mouth after it had been in his Belly in its Glory to the Joy and Comfort of them 10 And I took the little Book out of the Angels hand and eat it up and it was in my mouth sweet as honey and as soon as I had eaten it my belly was bitter i. e. I was really affected after the manner the Angel had foretold 11 And he i. e. the Angel said unto me Thou must 15 prophesie again i. e. foretel the coming of Christ's Kingdom Chap. 11.3 before of or against many 16 People and Nations and Tongues and Kings i. e. before the People and Rulers of the Kingdom of Antichrist 15 To prophesie as is shewn on Chap. 11.3 is to foretel the coming of Christ's Kingdom which it is said here John should do because he was to deliver more Prophecies concerning it and because it was to be actually performed by the Witnesses represented by John as the people of Israel of Old were by the Prophets who were
the Chaos preceded the first appearance of Light which made the Day as the Darkness of the Apostasy according to the Course and Order of Nature which proceeds from Privation to Form preceeds the Morning-Star and bright Day of Christ's Kingdom whereupon the Months of the Gentiles are mentioned before the Days of the Witnesses because the Gentile Apostasy must be in Nature and Time before the Witnesses could prophesie against it although they both commence from the same Day or Year Now a Day is taken in this Prophecy for a Coelestial Solar Year consisting of Three hundred and sixty days in round Numbers according to the Custom of Scripture and according to the degrees of a Circle and of the Sun's passage through the Ecliptick by which the Year is made as appears from Three (a) 360 360 360 180 1260 Times or Years and a half being made equal to Twelve hundred and sixty days and therefore in proportion by a montb must be meant not a month in Civil Accounts which are Arbitrary according to the divers Customs and Reckonings of Cities and Nations but a Caelestial Natural Month depending upon the Moon by whose Motion from one Conjunction with the Sun to another the Month is made According to which Motion a Month consists of something above Twenty Nine days and a Lunar Year of 354 days not reckoning the Odd Hours and Fractions neither in this nor the Solar Accounts which is six Days above Twenty Nine Days to each Month of the Year by which reckoning (a) 354 354 354 177 1239 Forty Two months of years at 354 each year amount to 1239 years and at (b) 29 42 58 116 1218 Twenty-Nine Days each Month to 1218 years But because in the 1260 Days there are five Days taken from each Solar Year which indeed consists of 365 Days therefore also in the Lunar Years of the Forty Two Months there must be Five days taken from each that they may bear proportion to the Solar Years which are indeed only properly and naturally Years the Lunar Year being no otherwise a Year than as it is determined by the Annual Course of the Sun and being altogether uncertain and arbitrary but as it is adjusted unto and brought into accord with its Motion According to which Substraction each Lunar Year will amount to 349 Days and the whole Forty Two Months of Years to (c) 349 349 349 174 ½ 1221 ½ about 1222 Years (d) 1218 3 ½ 1221 ½ exceeding the Total of the Months at Twenty Nine Days each by about Four Days which because Fractions are neglected in these Accounts we are to reckon full 1222 Years (e) 1222 38 1260 Thirty Eight Years less than the Twelve hundred and sixty Days of Years of the Witnesses according to the proportion betwixt the Motion of the Sun and Moon the latter of which exceeding the former by about (a) 11 Days 3 ½ Years of Years 38 Eleven Days in a year or a Thirty Third part the Encrease in Twelve hundred and sixty years or Three years and a half of years amounts to Thirty Eight years or twice Nineteen years that is two Cycles (b) Bevereg Instit Chronol lib. 2.4 6 7 of the Moon or Golden Number which being grounded upon the Period of Meton a Famous Athenian Astronomer who flourished Four hundred and thirty years before Christ was first brought into the Kalendar by the First General Council of Nice A. D. 325. to settle the Paschal or Easter Feast about which so great Contentions had been in the Church which Rule and Decree is Religiously observed as Dr. Beveridge speaks in the Church of England And thus having settled the True Notion of a Month and the Extent of it we are next to find out where the Beginning of these Forty Two Months and of the Twelve hundred and sixty Days which are parallel to them is to be fixed the Holy Spirit having not been pleased to give the precise Epocha or Beginning of them but having left it to be searched out by the Industry of those who consider Times and Seasons We are to take Notice then that (c) See Mr. Mede's Apostasy Gentilism consisting in the Practice of Pagan and Idolatrous Customs was come to a great heighth about A. D. 400. and that there is great Reason to fix upon A. D. 437. for the precise Year from whence the Lord of Times and Seasons thought good to date the Beginning of its Times or Reign may be made more than probable from these following Considerations 1. Because it is the precise Year in which the Churches Purity ended it being the Year which compleats the last Half Time of the Churches Purity weighed in the Two Scales of the Ballance which appeared under the Third Seal as hath been shewn on Chap. 6.5 2. Because it is the very Year from which the Time Times and Half Time are to be reckoned as hath been already proved on Chap. 10. vers 7. numb 13. Which being made equal to 1260 days Chap. 12.6 14. the beginning of the Date of the one must be the beginning of the Date of the other and consequently of the Forty Two Months of the Gentiles which run parallel to the 1260 days of the Witnesses and of the Woman in the Wilderness Of which the Reformation beginning A. D. 1517. just at the Entrance of Half Time is an illustrious Proof as hath been observed on Chap. 10. 3. Because it is the middle Point betwixt the two remarkable Half Hours made up into One Hour at the Ten Kings receiving power with the Beast Concerning which see what hath been largely discoursed on Chap. 8. 4. If the beginning of the Gentiles Months and of the 1260 Days of the Witnesses be fixed at 437. there will be found to be a wonderful Congruity according to the strictest Mathematical Proportion betwixt the Days of the Witnesses the Gentiles Months and the Months of the Beast who as is evident from Rev. 17.10 11 12. receiv'd not his power until he came to be the Eighth King which was not until the End of A. D. 475. or the beginning of A.D. 476. upon the Fall of the Western Emperour Now if the Gentiles Months begin (a) 437 1222 1659 38 1697 A. D. 437. then they must end they amounting in the whole as hath been shewn to 1222. Years at A. D. 1659 sooner by Thirty Eight Years then the 1260 Days End which is the Exact Astronomical Proportion betwixt Solar and Lunar Time as hath been before observed and if the Beasts Months begin at (b) 476 1222 1697 476. then they will end at 1697. together with the Days of the Witnesses and will carry on the Times of the Apostasy from (c) 1659 38 1697 the End of the Gentiles Months to the End of all Antichristian Time by the same Astronomical Proportion consisting of Two Cycles of the Moon or Golden Numbers For it is to be observed that the Church was Paganized before the
greatest moment for which the Angel was most concerned and being to be accomplished in the last place were more immediately to be referred to in the Answer which was to be returned The Question proposed then is How long it was to be to the End of all those things which he had seen of which the Particulars mentioned were to be fulfilled in the last place And the Words are to be rendred thus according to the Hebrew Text How long the Vision the Daily c. and not concerning the Daily the Question being How long the Vision as well as how long the Daily and the Transgression of Desolation Obs 3. This Question must in all propriety of Speech be meant concerning a Period of Time to be deduced from the beginning of the Events foretold to the End of them the Answer to the Question being That the Vision should be unto 2300 Days viz. from the Time when the Effect of the Vision should first take place according to which sense a (b) Jachiad in Daniel per L' Empereur Jew has thus acutely paraphrased this Verse Then the Angel answered That the Streights in which they were were to last from the very time of the Vision to the Evening or Night of the Morning or Day of the two thousand three hundred years Obs 4. It is expresly contrary to the very Words of the Text to date these days from the ceasing of the daily Sacrifice the Question being not How long shall it be from the polluting of the Sanctuary to the cleansing of it but How long shall the Vision be That is the whole Vision he had before seen concerning the Medo-Persian and Grecian Empire as well as the taking away of the daily Sacrifice Obs 5. The Subject-Matter of the Vision is 1. Concerning the Medo Persian Empire Ver. 20. 2. Concerning the Greek Empire their first King Alexander and the Division of that Empire into Four Kingdoms upon his Death Ver. 21 22. 3. Concerning a Little Horn or King who was to rise out of One of those Four Kingdoms in the latter time or at the latter End of their Kingdom Ver. 9 23. which I take to be at least principally and in its chief mystical sense the Little Horn or Antichristian King mentioned Dan. 7.8 which came up from amongst the Ten horns of the Fourth Beast which is the Roman Empire and is said here at the 9th Verse to come up out of the Four Notable Horns towards the Four Winds of heaven that is out of the Western part of the World or of the Vniversal Monarchy of the Grecians where the Roman Power was seated and where it first appeared in Macedon to encroach upon the Grecian and the (a) Mr. Mede page 654 749. Fourth Kingdom brought the Third into its Subjection by conquering Greece the Western and Head Province of that Empire Out of this Western Horn or Kingdom the Roman Power with its Little Horn amongst its ten horns came forth which alone is here mentioned because that by it the Exploits specified in the following Verses were chiefly to be performed many of which can also agree to no other and none of them to any so properly as to the Antichristian King who is certainly called a Little Horn in the 7th Chapter and has Characters given him there parallel to those in this Chapter as in speaking great things Ver. 8. in having a look more stout and fierce than his Fellows Ver. 20. in prevailing against the Saints and the holy people and in being broken without hands by the Ancient of Days Ver. 21 22. Obs 6. Although some passages of the Vision from Verse 9 to Verse 12. may be understood of Antiochus the Type of Antichrist yet all of it and especially the Exposition of it from Verse 23 to 25. cannot be possibly meant concerning him who understood not dark Sentences nor was a King of any great Policy or Craft as this little horn is described Verses 23 24 25. but is expresly noted by (a) Liv. lib. 41. Foy-Vaillant de Seleucid Imper. pag. 161-163 Historians to have behaved himself so strangely and so unequally that it was much doubted amongst the wisest whether he were a Fool or a mad man And the Characters given in those Verses of the little horn are so utterly inconsistent with the Story of Antiochus and are so agreeable to the Antichristian King that even Dr. Moor is at last forced to confess That this Passage was put in by the Spirit of Prophecy with a more peculiar respect to Antichrist himself in whom they are more eminently fulfilled than to Antiochus his Type Obs 7. A Day being taken in other parts of Prophecy for a Prophetical Day or a Day of Years there is no Reason why it should be understood otherwise in this place it being called here Evening-Morning upon another account as we have observed at the beginning of this Annotation and not to shew as Dr. Moor thinks that Prophetical Days are not here meant but Natural Days which will amount but to six Years three Months and twenty Days a very small space of Time and which can be brought to comport only with the six Years Prophanations of Antiochus which is but a part of the Vision and cannot be here referred to as appears from Observation 4th and the following ones Obs 8. The Vision begins with the Medo-Persian Empire as plainly appears from the Explication of it Verse 20. And if the Vision begins there then the Line of Time must begin there too because it is the measure of it according to Obs 2 and 3. Obs 9. The Vision ends at the cleansing of the Sanctuary as appears from Verse 14. Then shall the Sanctuary be cleansed viz. at the End of 2300 days which were to last to that time Which cannot be meant concerning the particular cleansing of it by Maccabeus from the Prophanations of Antiochus because this could not be called the Last End of the Indignation of God the Temple having been afterwards polluted and blasphemed by the Successors (a) 1 Maccab. 6 62.7 33-50 and Chap. 9. of Antiochus and trodden under foot and entirely destroyed by the Romans Obs 10. This Line of Time is not yet at an end because the daily Sacrifice of the Jews is not yet restored nor their Desolations determined but they are still in a despicable condition their Sanstuary and City being trodden under foot by the Turks who at present have it in their possession Obs 11. The beginning of the Medo-Persian Empire is to be dated by the Joynt Consent of History and of the latest and best Chronologers from the taking of Babylon by Cyrus from whence the Scripture reckons the first year of Cyrus meaning thereby the first year of his Reign over the Babylonion Empire which was the last of the Seventy Years Captivity of the Jews and the first of their Return into their Countrey upon the Edict of Cyrus Now from a due consideration of what hath been said we
gained a Line of Time of 430 Years from Solomon's Death to the end of the LXX Years Captivity which is the first of Cyrus which is made out also by Dr. Beverley from a distinct Enumeration of the Reigns of the Kings of Israel and Judah and the fourteen Years assigned to the Visions of Ezekiel's Temple and does not much differ from the Calculations of the latest Chronologers who make this time to amount to 437 or 439 years at furthest although they confess after all their Pains that this Line of Time is very uncertain and obscure for Reasons collected by (a) Introduct Chronol ad Hist Eccles pag. 150-159 Spanhemius And therefore amidst so much doubt and difficulty where can we find a surer rest then in Scripture whose accounts of time will after all be found the most exact and that when Profane History and Chronology is most in the Dark if we take in Prophetical Time as well as Historical And now having settled the beginning of Cyrus's Reign or the Epoch of the Medo-Persian Monarchy we have obtained the beginning of the 2300 years and withal a Line of Time from it to the Cleansing or Justifying of the Sanctuary i. e. of the Christian Church Typified thereby from all Idolatry and Antichristianism when the Holy Place which is now shut will appear open in Heaven Rev. 11.19 Which Account stands thus A. M. 5759 A.D. vulg 1772. From the beginning of the Medo Persian Empire by Cyrus to the cleansing of the Sanctuary Dan. 8.13 14. 2300 Which will end in the 5759th year from the Creation and the 1772 year after Christ according to the common Account From which if you take Daniel's 75 years you come to the end of the 42 Months and the 1260 days and so by a regressive order to the Epoch or beginning of them at A.D. 437 as hath been already shewn on Paragr 5. pag. 210. All which is deduced by particular Accounts and after a most accurate manner by Dr. Beverley in his several Treatises called Scripture Lines of Time and stand as they are proved by him in this Order  Years 1. From Cyrus to Daniel's 70 weeks 75 2. Daniel's Weeks 490 3. The time between the Weeks and the 42 Months 400 4. The 1260 days or 42 Months 1260 5. The 30 and 45 Years of Daniel 75 Which amounts to years 2300 3 And I will give Power i. e. Commission and Ability of Testimony and Prophecy unto my two 13 Witnesses raised and sent on purpose to testify to the Truth and to denounce Judgments against the Apostasy and they shall Prophesie i. e. declare and Preach 14 against it and foretel Judgments a thousand 15 two hundred and threescore days of years cloathed in Sackcloath 16 i. e. in a Despicable Afflicted and Mournful condition 13 To Witness signifies to give Testimony to the Truth against Errors and Corruptions as the word is used Is 55.4 John 18.37 Acts 26.16 and also to pronounce God's Judgments against sinners as the word signifies Malach. 3.5 And the Witnesses are Two because Two Witnesses at least were required under the Law for confirmation Deut. 17.6.19 15. and to shew that a small number but a sufficient one should be made use of to confirm the Truth But chiefly in Correspondence to the Types in the Old Testament where these Witnesses are generally Two and accordingly God here raises up Two Witnesses to Witness and denounce Judgments against the Idolatry of the Christian Church as Moses and Aaron did against the Idolatry of Pharaoh Egypt Balaam and Moab as Elijah and Elisha did against Baal Ahab Jezebel and Ahaziah and as Zerobabel and Joshua were Witnesses in Babylon during the Captivity 14 So the Word Prophesie signifies frequently in the New Testament Although the Proper import of it here seems to be the Foretelling of the Encrease and Ruin of Antichrist and of the Coming of Christ's Kingdom to destroy him which being the Future Events of this Vision the Prophesying or Foretelling here mentioned must relate unto them particularly to the Kingdom of Christ the Chief Subject of all the Prophecies of the Old Testament which being not to begin to come into Event until the Expiration of the 1260 Days it is until then under Prophecy as a Future State And the Witnesses prophesie of it not only in their Discourses and Writings but by the mournful State they are in which is also of it self a signification that Christ's Kingdom is under a Delay a Sealing or a Prophecy which are words of like import 15 These Days begin with the Forty Two Months of the Gentiles and reach to the End of Antichristian Times running parallel along with them God taking care that as soon as Gentilism came into the Church there should be Witnesses raised up to testifie against it and to instruct the people in the contrary Truth by their Preaching and their Sufferings See num 12. 16 This was the Habit of Prophets when they denounced Judgments particularly of Elias one of the Witnesses under the Old Testament 2 Kings 1.8 Zech. 13.3 4. Matth. 3.4 And thus Mattathias and his Sons put on Sackcloth when the Gentiles prophaned the Sanctuary under Antiochus 1 Maccab. 2.14 4 These two Witnesses are or are signified by what in the Anti-type is represented by the two Olive 17 Trees Zach. 4 and the two Candlesticks 18 o◠〈…〉 Rev. 1.20 19 standing before or Ministring unto the 〈…〉 the Earth Zach. 4.14 17 The Types in this Verse are plainly taken from Zech. 4. And the Witnesses are called Olive-Trees upon these Accounts 1. Because they are to be anointed ones Zech. 4.14 or Kings and Priests in Christ's Kingdom 2. Because as the Olive Branches Zech. 4.12 they empty the Golden Oyl out of themselves into the Candlesticks or Churches That is impart to them the Fruit of those Gifts and Graces which they had received from the Spirit of God and were as fully replenished with as an Olive Tree is with Oyl Whereupon Christians are said to be anointed by God and the Holy Spirit and the Effects of it are called The Vnction in Scripture 2 Cor. 1.21 1 John 2.20 27. 3. Because the Witnesses were to perform the same Offices in the Christian and against the Antichristian Church as Joshua and Zerubbabel did for the Jewish and against Babylon the Type of Antichrist who is called a Mountain Zech. 10.4 And according to the Type in Zechariah the Witnesses are two anointed or chosen Servants of God replenished with his Spirit Verse 6. who are to level the Mountain of Antichristianism Verse 7. and to finish establish and build up the pure Church Verse 9. and that out of small things Verse 10. that is small beginnings and a Sackcloth or contemptible and afflicted condition 18 From hence it plainly appears that the Two Witnesses are Two Churches which are signified by Candlesticks in this Prophecy Chap. 1.20 as Grotius hath most appositely remarked on the place And amongst the Candlesticks or Church
was before as to Outward Church Priviledges and Profession which is the visible Life of a Church 8 And their dead Bodies i. e. these Churches anathematized and suppressed shall lie unburied in the 30 Street of the great City i e. their Censures against them and suppressing of them shall be Publick Open and Notorious through the whole Extent and in the most conspicuous places of the Antichristian Jurisdiction which 31 spiritually i. e. in a mystical sense 1 Cor. 10.4 is 32 called by the Spirit of God in this Prophecy 33 Sodom for its Spiritual Uncleanness by Idolatry and Aegypt for its Tyranny and its innumerable Superstitions and Idolatries 34 where also or in which great City our Lord Christ was crucified 30 By Street in Scripture is meant the Broad Open and publick places of Concourse as the Word is used Matth. 5.6 and Esther 6.9 Whereby is intimated that some Churches in the most Conspicuous and Eminent Places of the Roman Territories which is the City concerned in these Visions and is called the (a) Chap 14 8.17 18 18 10. great City should be persecuted and anathematized by the Apostasy and that the Devastations made upon the Witnesses should be publick and in open view and that they should be capable of being raised and restored contrary to what the wicked are threatned with Job 18.17 that their remembrance shall perish from the Earth and they shall have no name in the Street 31 From hence it clearly appears that what is here delivered is to be understood in a Metaphorical sense by way of Mystical Allegory which was common then amongst the Jews and which the Sacred Writers especially the Apostle to the Hebrews makes frequent use of 23 Or is in a Spiritual and Mystical Sense for to call and to be are frequently used promiscuously in Scripture Although I presume the meaning of this place given in the Paraphrase to be the truest for as Gog was prophesied of by the Prophets under the Names of Edom Moab Leviathan and the other Chief Enemies of God and of the Jewish Church as the Prophet Ezekiel expresly declares Chap. 38.17 So are the Idolatrous Enemies of the Christian Church prophesied of under the Names of Aegypt Babylon and the like in this Book and in the Old Testament 33 Thus Jerusalem is called Sodom and Gomorrah Isa 1.10 34 Christ was crucified at Jerusalem which is here mentioned 1. To shew that this Slaughter of the Witnesses was to be under the Jurisdiction of the Romans Jerusalem being then under their Dominion and our Saviour being Crucified by their Authority Upon which account his Suffering under Pontius Pilate and his Crucifixion which was a Roman Punishment are mentioned in the Creed 2. Rome is called Jerusalem because it succeeded the (a) Mori Oper. Theol. 721 728 Synagogue in its Carnal Hypocritical and Persecuting Temper and is a City that killeth the Prophets and Witnesses of Christ as Jerusalem of old was wont to do 3. Our Saviour is said to be Crucified at Rome because he is crucified there in his (b) Matth. 25.40 45. Acts 9.4 Members to whom whatsoever is done he imputes as done to himself Whereupon he asked Saul why he persecuted Him when he persecuted his Disciples And because the Apostacy Reigns there which sin is particularly called the Crucifying of Christ afresh and the putting him to an open shame Heb. 6 4-8 9 And they or some of the People and Kindreds and Tongues and Nations who shall be disposed to attend to and take notice of this matter shall see or diligently consider their dead Bodies i e. the deplorable and ruinous State of these desolate Churches three days and an half see num 37. and shall not suffer their dead bodies to be put in 35 Graves i. e. to be buried in utter Oblivion and to be in an irrecoverable condition out of all hope of being restored Ezek. 37 11-14 Hos 6.2 35 The same Metaphors that are here made use of are also used in the same sense by Ezekiel Chap. 37 1-14 and by Hos 13.14 where by dry bones in an open Valley and by dead bodies in Graves is meant a hopeless condition without the least expectation of Recovery 10 And they that dwell upon the Earth i. e. the more sensual and earthly part of the Kingdom of the Beast shall rejoice over them and make merry and shall send gifts one to another as in time of publick Joy Hest 9.19 22. Nehem. 8 10-12 because these two Prophets 36 tormented by their Reproofs denouncing of Judgments contrary Life and Conversation and the progress of their Doctrine amongst the people Hos 6.5 Judg. 16.6 Jon. 4.9 them that dwell on the Earth i. e. the Antichristian People 36 As the Prophets and particularly Elijah one of the Witnesses of the Jewish Church are said to trouble wicked Kings and People 1 Kings 18.17 18.21 20. 11 And after three 37 days and a half the Spirit 38 of Life from God entred into them i. e. they were wonderfully revived Ezek. 37.5 8 9 10 13 14. Hos 6.2 and they stood 38 upon their feet i. e. were in a posture of Service and Defence and appeared with Courage and Readiness to perform their Duty Ezek. 2 1-3.37 10. and great fear 39 fell upon all them which saw them revived so wonderfully to the Joy of their Friends and the Consternation of their Enemies 37 It is observed by the Lord Napeir that besides the Common Prophetical Day which is taken for a Year in Prophecy There is also a great and extraordinary Day in Scripture which signifies not a Year but any Time to be determined by Circumstances as the Word Day is used in the Day of the Lord and in Man's Day Now if Day signifie Time in Scripture it may very well (a) Lord Napeir on the Revel Prop. 1.15 Mori Oper. Theol. pag 179. and his Appendix to Dan. pag. 284-293 signifie so in this place where it seems to be necessary that Three Days and an half should be brought to comport with Three Times and a half 1260 Days and Forty Two Months All which being of the same signification there seems to be no reason but that the Three Days and a half should be of the same Nature too especially if we consider that the Woman in the Wilderness which is the Church or Witnesses collectively taken from whom it differs only in Notion as the Body doth from its Members hath Three Times and a half allotted her as well as 1260 Days to which there must be something porportionable in the Times of the Witnesses which are her Seed and are coaeval with her and the Three Days and a half are of the same Extent with 1260 Days and Three Times and an half if you account the Days for Years and then again resolve those Years into Days denoting so many Years But for the clearer stating of this Matter it is to be observed that here is a plain Allusion to the time of
Peter Boyer's History of the Vaudois Printed at London 1692. The History of the Negotiation between the Duke of Savoy and the Countrey of Switzerland Printed at London 1690. Lettres sur les Matieres du Temps Tom. 3. Pag. 198. of Piedmont returned to their Countrey at the precise Term of Three Years and an half after their total dissipation For by an Edict dated Jan. 31. 1686. their Religion was forbidden upon pain of Death their Churches were ordered to be demolished and their Ministers to be banished which Edict was published in the Valleys April 11. and was put in Execution by the help of French Troops who attacked them on the 22d of the same Month and totally subdued them in the following Month of May when many of those poor people were killed and barbarously slaughtered and the miserable Remainders of them were permitted to depart who after a tedious March in the depth of Winter arrived at Geneva the December following of the same Year 1686. But about three years and a half after their dissipation they having in the mean while been kindly received by their Neigbours of Switzerland Geneva Holland and others and not suffered to be put in Graves by the Popish Nations round about them who appeared in their Favour All on a sudden they took an Vnanimous Resolution of returning into their Countrey and that at first against the Advice of their Friends who altogether despaired of their Success And accordingly about the beginning of September 1689. they passed the Lake of Geneva secretly and without the knowledge of that Government entred into Savoy with their Swords in their hands recovered their Ancient Possession and established themselves in it by the Month of April 1690. notwithstanding the Opposition of the Troops of France and Savoy Of whom they killed great Numbers with an inconsiderable Loss to themselves who were but a few in comparison of their Enemies Upon which the Duke of Savoy finding them to be encouraged and assisted by Forreign Princes recalled the rest of them and re-established them by an Edict dated June 4. 1690. with Liberty for the French Refugees to return with them three years and a half after their total dissipation in the End of October 1686. For although they were not Established by the Civil Power until the beginning of June a Month after the Expiration of the three years and a half yet they had regained their own Possessions and expelled the Strangers out of them by April and had received great Assistance in May just at the End of the forementioned term of Years Now although I must confess that there are many things very much to be taken notice of in this Account yet it cannot be the Resurrection here pointed at because the Sister Witness Church of France still lies desolate and dead in the Street of the great City and what hath already been performed in Favour of the Waldenses comes so much short of what may be justly thought to be meant by the Resurrection here foretold that I cannot look upon it but as a Providential Congruity if I may so call it and a Pledge and Earnest of a much greater Life and that of a more spiritual Nature than what hath yet happened unto them which I pray hope and humbly believe upon Prophetical Grounds in which I trust God has graciously assisted me not to be far off 38 This is plainly taken from Ezekiel's Description Chap. 37. of the Restauration of the Jews from Babylon and of what will come to pass at their final Restauration of which the former was but a Type Whereby is signified that God shall extraordinarily revive the Witnesses which are in a dead condition and mightily assist the Churches which are already raised to imperfect degrees of Life Gifts and Graces and so are consequently still in a Sackcloath and mournful Condition for the continuance of Judaism Paganism and Antichristianism in the World and the Imperfections of its own State so that they shall be seen and taken notice of by all as standing upon their Feet That is as being in a steddy Posture of Self Subsistence and Defence and that after an Eminent and most Conspicuous manner Zech. 14.4 39 For they shall stand upon their Feet an exceeding great Army according to what is prophesied of the Jews Ezek. 37.10 12 And they i. e. the Witnesses standing upon their Feet in a Posture of readiness and Preparedness heard a voice from Heaven 40 i. e. had an extraordinary call and a Divine impulse saying unto them come up hither unto a state of Security Purity and Glory and they ascended up to Heaven 41 i. e. enjoyed a pure and Holy Church-State in a bright Matt. 17 5. Acts 1 9. cloud i. e. in Glory and their Enemies 42 beheld them i. e. their great change and advancement was visible and notorious to all even to the Antichristian Apostasy 40 From hence and from what goes before it is manifest that this will be performed after an extraordinary manner by the more immediate power and assistance of God from whom the Spirit of Life came and all the Preparations and Abilities for the performance of this great Action 41 Their Church State is called Heaven in opposition to the Antichristian one which is called Earth and the World and because of the security from Persecution which should attend it and the Purity of its Doctrine and the Holiness of it and its Professors and the Glory Honour and Esteem it was to be in amongst Men especially Supreme Powers who are denoted by Heaven in this Prophecy Rev. 12.4 And a pure Church-State is called Heaven because it is a Resemblance of the Kingdom of Heaven as it shall be upon Earth and is an Exemplar of what is actually decreed performed and represented in Heaven in behalf of it before the Throne of God as appears from Chapters Fourth and Fifth 42 Here as well as in what goes before is a manifest Allusion to the Circumstances of the Ascension of our Saviour but with this difference that only the Apostles or chosen Witnesses beheld Christ's Ascent but here even the Enemies of the Witnesses are to testifie it it shall be so Notorious and Convincing to all 13 And the same hour i. e. about the same time but after their ascent Chap. 8.1 Num. 11. Chap. 9.15 was there a great * Earthquake i. e. a commotion and suddain change of thing in the World and especially in the Apostasy 43 and the 44 tenth part of the great City i. e. of the Roman Antichristian Kingdom ver 8. chap. 17.78 fell by the commotion change or Earthquake and in the Earthquake were slain 45 of Men seven thousand and the remnant or the remaining successions of Men to the Kingdom of Christ See chap. 2 24. 3 2. were affrighted at these Judgments and gave 46 Glory to the God of Heaven alone and not to Saints and Images as had been before done * As there was at our Saviour's Death and after his
upon this happy and glorious change of things 50 Here is an Acknowledgment of Praise and Thanksgiving to God according to the usual manner in this Prophecy as hath been before frequently observed and that made by the Twenty Four Elders the Representatives of the Jewish Church and by Voices in the former Verse which perhaps proceeded from the Four Living Creatures who are the Voices or Speakers in the sixth Chapter 17 Saying We give thee thanks O God Almighty which art and wast and art to come i. e. the Eternal Jehovah because thou hast taken 51 unto thee thy great or extraordinary power which hath been hitherto usurped by Satan Mahometism Antichistianism and the wicked Powers of this World and hâ—th reigned visibly and powerfully in Truth and Judgment without any rival 51 Here is declared the Succession of Christ's Kingdom as it is the manner to proclaim the Succession of Princes 18 And or although 52 the Nations or Gentiles that is the Paganizing Christians verse 2. were angry for being cast out of the visible Church which they had defiled and usurped verse 2. Psal 2. and 99.1 and or but 52 thy wrath 53 is come or is ready to be poured forth and executed upon the living and the time of the Dead is come that they should be Judged both good and bad according to their Deeds and that thou shouldst in that time of Judgment give reward unto thy Servants the Prophets or Witnesses of the Jewish Church or Ministers Dan. 12.3 and to the Saints or eminently holy Persons of the Christian Church and to all them that fear thy Name in every Nation according to the light and talents God hath given them Acts 10.2 34 35. small and great in Office or Graces who shall be rewarded according to what they have received and the use they have made of it Mat. 25. and shouldst destroy them of all sorts which destroy or corrupt the Earth by their Tyranny Wickedness and Antichristian Apostasy 52 In both these Senses the Article is used in Scripture according to its Acceptation in the Hebrew of the Old Testament Gen. 15 10.17 5. Job 17.10 Jerem. 11.17 and in several other places 53 This Verse relates to the Time of Trouble mentioned Dan. 12.1 and the great Battle Rev. 16. and the Resurrection and Judgment mentioned in the last Chapters which shall be particularly discoursed of in their proper places 19 And the Temple of God i. e. his pure Worship was opened in Heaven i. e. became visible in the Church and there was now seen in his Temple which before was measured sealed and shut up verse 2. the Ark 54 of his Testament i. e. the greatest Mysteries of Religion which were before obscured by Antichristianism were most clearly made known and there were lightnings and voices and thundrings and an Earthquake and great hail i. e. high and clear Manifestations and signs of Christ's Kingdom Mat. 24 Rev. 4 5.8 5. 54 The Ark of the (a) Numb 4.5 20. 1 Sam. 6.19 Exod. 25. Testament was always kept secret and covered and was to be seen only by the High Priest once a year whereby the Mysteries of Religion are Typified which the Angels desire to look into and were not Revealed unto them but by the Church 1 Peter 1.12 Ephes 3.10 Now these Mysteries called here the Ark of His that is Christ's Testament or New Covenant which were mightily obscured and perverted under the Reign of Antichristianism appear opened that is clearly manifested unto all Jews as well as Christians now united into One Body from whom also they had been for a long time hid by Types and Veils and a Judicial Blindness 1 Cor. 3 13-16 Rom. 11.25 Which Temple here opened and the Ark seen it are more fully and largely prophesied of by Ezekiel from Chapter the 40th to the End of his Prophecy CHAP. XII The Text. 1 AND * there appeared in vision a great wonder or prodigious sign portending great things in Heaven †or in the pure Primitive Church State a Woman i. e. the Church the Spouse of Christ Isa 54.1 2 Cor. 11.2 Eph. 5.32 cloathed or Environed wich the Sun beams shining all about her i. e. full of Communications of Glory Purity and Holiness from Christ the Sun of Righteousness Malac. 4.2 and the Moon 1 i. e. Antichristianism under her feet i. e. in comtempt and in subjection to her and upon her Head a Crown 2 of twelve 3 Stars representing the twelve Apostles chap. 1.20 Annotations on CHAP. XII * The Beast having been but just mentioned in the former Chapter Verse 7. the Holy Spirit doth here according to the Custom of Scripture which takes occasion from the bare mention of a thing to give a larger Account of it begin to set forth who he was and from whence he had his Original and how he came to be so powerful as to make War with and kill the Witnesses which Subject is prosecuted in this the following and the seventeenth Chapter And here we may observe that the Vision of the VVoman is Cotemporary with the Fifth Seal Chap. 6.9 when the pangs of Persecution were at the heighth the Child being brought forth in the Christian Empire in the next Seal †Heaven as hath been cursorily observed on Chap. 11.12 num 41. is not to be understood always in this Book only and perhaps not primarily of the Church-State on Earth but of the Archetype or State of it now in Heaven there seeming to be in Heaven a Kingdom of Christ and an Heavenly Tabernacle and Sanctuary which is an Archetypal and Exemplar State of what is to be performed on Earth in the Church Whereupon a Door was opened to John in Heaven Chap. 4 1. and the Temple of God was opened in Heaven Chap. 11.19 Which Interpretation will be much strengthned by a due Consideration of Hebr. 9. where the Apostle distinguishes betwixt a VVorldly (a) See Grotius on Heb. 9. and Mr. Dodwell of One Altar Sanctuary and a Heavenly one and calls the Jewish a pattern of things in the Heavens And there is also in this Book a Consessus Synedrium or Seat of Judgment in Heaven described in the Fourth and Fifth Chapters before which Satan as God and Prince of this VVorld was as it were tryed and after his Accusation of God's Servants and Defence of himself adjudged to be cast from the power of Godship which he had in those parts of the World which are concerned in this Prophecy Whereupon there is Joy in Heaven verse 12. upon the Brethrens being acquitted upon Satan's Fall from the Rule he had by God's Justice over the wicked World the Glory which accrued to God by his Wise and Holy Administrations and the present Advance of Christ's Kingdom Upon the increase of which the Saints may receive increase of Glory in that Heavenly Tabernacle which shall come down from Heaven in the New Jerusalem State 1 Worldly things because of their Mutability may be reprseented by the
the former which being perfectly and directly Satanical was a State of things more agreeable to the Devil which when he lost he might very well be said to be cast from Heaven to which the Pagans had exalted him in their Worship to Earth that is to an inferiour sort of Authority and Power in the VVorld and an Idolatry less Diabolical 10 And upon this Sentence and Judgment obtained in Heaven I heard a loud 24 Voice of praise and thanksgiving saying in Heaven and in the Church thus delivered and exalted now is come Salvation i. e. deliverance from Satan's Claim Power and Kingdom as a God upon Earth under the Divine Justice upon a faln World and from Persecution and strength i. e. the manifestation of God's Power in destroying his Enemies and the Kingdom of our God i. e. the glorious advancement of his Religion and the manifestation of the Power of his Christ in advanceing his Church for the accuser of our Brethren before God and in the time of Persecution under the Pagan Empire is cast 25 down or thrown down upon the Earth which accused 26 them before our God day and night i. e. was their indefatigable and inveterate enemy and false accuser 24 This Verse and the following contain an Epinicion or a Song of Thanksgiving to God upon the Conquest of Paganism and the (a) Chap. 7. n. 23. and n. 1. of this Chapter Appearance of Christ's Kingdom in the Empire now become Christian which yet lasted but for a short space before the Glory of it was Eclipsed by Antichristianism Chap. 17.10 Concerning the downfall of Paganism see Dr. Cave's Learned Introduction to the Lives of the Fathers of the Fourth Century 25 A Metaphor taken from wrestling as Grotius notes And here we may observe that when Idolatrous and wicked Men are cast out of Rule and Authority it may be very well said that the Devil is cast out because he acts and governs in and by them 26 Expressions taken from Job 1. and the 4th and Zech. 3. where the Scripture speaking according to the manner of Men represents Satan as accusing good and pious men before God Which he does by aggravating their real Faults and Imperfections and by exciting the Wicked Men of the World to raise False Accusations against them as they Notoriously did against the Primitive Christians see Dr. Cave's Primitive Christianity Part 1. Chap. 1-4 But perhaps this Accusation may relate to Satan's appearing at this Judiciary Tryal alledging the Faults of the Brethren and demanding that they might be delivered unto him the Executioner of God's Justice which he might urge was not yet satisfied 11 And they 27 i. e. our Brethren overcame him in this judiciary Tryal before the Throne of God and all his subtile arts and powerful instruments in the times of Persecution by the Blood of the Lamb i. e. by Faith in Christ's Blood and by his Merits and Passion alone and by the word of their Testimony i. e. by the Gospel which they Preached purely and Efficaciously and the Testimonies they had given under the four first Seals and because they Loved not their Lives no not unto the Death but despised them and willingly and chearfully laid them down for Christ and his Gospel's sake Chap. 4. 9 10 11. 27 In this Verse is shewn the Way how Paganism was overthrown which is in a manner contrary to that which Antichristianism makes use of viz. by the Blood and Merits of Christ alone and not of Saints by the preaching of the Gospel and not by Vnwritten Traditions and by the Christians chearful and patient Suffering not by Resistance VVars and Murther Chap. 11.7 Although perhaps the Chief and Principal Import of this Verse may be to set forth the Grounds and Just Proceedings of God against Paganism and of the Victory here mentioned which was obtained by the Blood of Christ the great 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and the Fundamental and principal Cause who prevailed by his Blood to open the Seals which were so many preparatory Judgments to this End and by the Testimony of the Living Creatures the Gospel-Ministry and Witnesses of the Four First Seals and by their Deaths and Martyrdoms under the Fifth Seal after which ensued the Ruine of Paganism under the Sixth Seal 12. Therefore rejoyce ye Heavens and ye that dwell in them i. e. ye Angels and Saints whose joy encreases according to the advancements of Christ's Kingdom on Earth and ye good and heavenly minded Christians which are faithful Members of the Church now in an exalted state although but for a short time wo to the Inhabitants of the Earth i. e. the earthly minded and Antichristian part of the Empire and of the Sea i. e. the wicked multitude of the Empire Jude 13. for the Devil is come down from Heaven or his exalted State unto you upon the Earth having great wrath because he knoweth that he hath but a short 28 time i. e. in respect of his former Reign 28 The Pagan Religion was overthrown by Theodosius the Great and made only some feeble Efforts under Arcadius and Honorius and Theodosius the Younger but with little Advantage and therefore that being at an End the short time here mentioned must be meant concerning the Antichristian Empire which Satan knew was to have an End and that in a short time in respect of the several Thousand Years of his past Reign in the World from the beginning of Idolatry 13 And when the Dragon i. e. the Devil saw that he was cast upon the Earth out of his former Empire and Dominion he Persecuted * the Woman i. e. the Church which brought forth the Man-child i. e. the Kingdom of Christ * Here the History of the VVoman is resumed and the Persecution here mentioned must relate to the Incursions of the Goths and other Barbarous Nations Chap. 8. because they are the only Persecutions which immediately succeeded upon the Dragons being cast upon the Earth by the Overthrow of Paganism which Judgments designed as a Chastisement by God were intended by Satan who stirred up those Nations by the permission of Providence as a Persecution upon the Church so that the Trumpets which are contemporary with this Persecution were Divine Judgments in the Hands of the Angels upon the Empire and the Antichristianizing Party but in the Designs of Satan a Persecution of the pure Church 14 And to the Woman i. e. the true and pure part of th Church were given i. e. prepared by God's Providence ver 6. two 29 wings of a great Eagle i. e. effectual means of a speedy and safe delivery from this Danger notwithstanding all difficulties and in despight of all oppositions that she might fly into the Wilderness i. e. be in an obscure invisible condition verse 6. into her place prepared of God verse 6. where she is nourished or preserved for a 30 Time and Times and half a Time chap. 10 6. 11 2 3 9 11. from the face or sight and
wrath of the very Serpent 31 i. e. the Devil verse 9. 29 VVings denote Flight in Scripture Psalm 55.6 and a great Eagles VVings a swift and a safe Retreat joyned with tender Care Deut. 32.11 12. Isa 63.9 And here is an Allusion to Exod. 19.4 and Deut. 32.11 12. where God tells the Israelites that he had brought them out of Aegypt as on Eagles VVings Kings also and Kingdoms are represented by Eagles and VVings in (a) Ezek. 17.3 7. Dan. 7.6 Scripture whence the two VVings of an Eagle may be here appositely put to denote the Eastern and VVestern Divisions of the Roman Empire of which an Eagle is the known Ensign which by supporting and advancing the Visible Church secured also thereby the pure Church although in an obscure and VVilderness-State in the midst of the growing Apostasy as Wheat amongst Tares over-topping it according to the Parable Matth. 13. And here is also a Note of the Time when this came to pass the most remarkable Division of the Empire being upon Theodosius's Death when the Two Antichristianizing Divisions of it by introducing a State of Christianity which counterfeited the True one so covered and hid the True Church under it that the Enemies which Satan raised up against it combated not True Christianity but the counterfeit of Antichristianism for it which grounded its pretence to Grandeur on the very Glorious Promises made to Christ's Kingdom and its Idolatry on Honour for Christ and his Saints Which made the Devil who found that the Storms he had raised against the Church fell upon his own Antichristian part the Church becoming soon invisible to throw out of his Mouth verse 15. a Flood thinking thereby to overwhelm her wheresoever she was 30 Upon this place it is fit to observe 1. That this is the very distribution of Time allotted to Antichrist Dan. 7 25.12 7. Which was distributed after this manner to shew the different States and Progress of Antichrist who arrived not to his Kingdom but by Steps and Degrees for he was about One whole Time or Three hundred and sixty Years before his Kingdom was established upon his prevailing in the Iconoclastick War and from thence continued about Two whole Times or Seven hundred and Twenty Years in a flourishing State of Supreme Power and Dominion until the Entrance of the Half Time at the Reformation 1517. when his Kingdom declined and was in a broken and divided condition signified by Half Time which is called the dividing of Time Dan. 7.25 See what hath been said on Chap. 10 6. 11 2 3 9 11. and what is discoursed upon the Rise of Antichrist on the following Chapters 2. There being in the 1260 Days of the Witnesses some Remarkable proportionable parts called Three Days and a half it is highly reasonable that the woman in the Wilderness should have such a sort of Time allotted unto her because she differs not from the Witnesses but only Notionally as hath been before observed And therefore 1260 Days having been allowed her at the 6th verse it may be rationally concluded that the Distribution of Time in this Verse answers to the Three Days and a half of the Witnesses because they are both of the same Extent Three Times and a half being the same with Three Years and a half and also because they may fitly denote the Time in which the Church in general typified by the Woman was narrowly preserved from Destruction whilst its Members the Witnesses were oppressed and lay dead in the Streets See the Notes on Chap. 11. 9 11. 31 Serpents are noted by Naturalists to be quick sighted and the Old Serpent is described as very subtile Gen. 3. from whence we may conclude that the True Church was now at this time so closely secured by God that it escaped the sight of the Dragon himself even when he took the Shape of a Serpent that is used his utmost Craft and Subtilty as well as Power and walked about seeking to devour her And from hence also it appears that Antichristianism had now so mightily prevailed as to be praedominant the Church being hid and overgrown by it as the Wheat in the Gospel by the Tares and that this was the very time when the Witnesses lay dead as to Power being anathematized and silenced and yet prophesied in Sackcloth i. e. in a Wilderness State and Condition in which a Church was nourished and preserved by God altho latent and almost invisible the sealed ones being now closely secured and the Worshippers retired into the inmost Recesses of the Temple which are Symbols representing one and the same thing according to divers Notions and Circumstances For our better understanding of this Chapter we may distinctly consider the Woman or Church under these divers Respects 1. As Apostolical during the pure state of the Church of Ephesus Ver. 1. 2. As in pain and watched by the Dragon that her Child might be devoured during the Persecutions of the Church of Smyrna Verse 2-4 3. As Delivered of a Child under Constantine Verse 5. 4. As bereft of her Child which was caught up to God Verse 5. Whereby is signified That Christ was not to appear long in the Glories of his Kingdom at that time but was to disappear after he had given but a short sight and glimpse of it 5. As persecuted by the Serpent stirring up the Barbarous Nations Verse 13. 6. As in a preparation to fly when the Two Wings were given her Verse 14. 7. As fled into the Wilderness Verse 6. and as bid there in an invisible State during the closest times of her Wilderness condition called Three Times and a half Verse 14. and Three Days and a half Chap. 11. 8. As persecuted by the Mahometan Inundation Verse 15 16. It may also here be fitly observed That this Chapter contains a plain Answer to the common (a) See the Preface to Morney du Plessi's Mystery of Iniquity Mr. Mede Disc 29.32 and pag. 649. And a Discourse of Bishop Sanderson concerning the Church Question of the Romanists Where was your Church before Luther For it was in an obscure state sometimes more Visible than at others and sometimes almost wholly invisible amidst the Apostacy as Wheat amongst the Tares 15 And the Serpent i. e. the Devil cast out of his mouth 31 water as a flood i. e. multitudes of Barbarous Nations after the Woman the Christian pure Church that he might cause her to be carried away of the flood i. e. to be destroyed in the common ruin 32 Water as a Flood signifies in this Prophecy a sudden and violent Inundation of many People and Nations which seem to be the Mahometan Nations described Chap. 6th because 1. They are said to be cast out of the Serpent's Mouth by which the pernicious and prevailing Imposture of their false Prophets Doctrine may be signified whereby he deceived the Nations as the Serpent did Eve by his Subtilty Speech and Doctrine being compared in Scripture (a) Prov. 18.4
Mede ou the place to the deep and flowing waters of a Man's Mouth and the Mahometans having been peculiarly described by their Subtilty as well as their Power and Force Chap. 9. 7 8 10 19. 2. Because this their violent and sudden Invasion like that of a Torrent or water as a Flood was just before the Death of the Witnesses at the second Council of Nice when the Woman was flying into her closest and most retired state answerable to that of the sealed or secured from the hurt of the Mahometan Locusts Chap. 9.4 for she was as yet visible to the Serpent when he cast the flood after her and was then flying into her invisible state the Church being as is plain from hence sometimes totally over-spread with thick darkness and at other times more or less Visible as the Sun is in cloudy days or the Stars in overcast Evenings when they can scarcely be discerned but by a piercing and stedfast Eye or through Telescopes 16 And the Earth i. e. the corrupt and apostatized part of the Church helped the Woman by opposing this inundation and the Earth 33 opened her Mouth and swallowed up the Flood which the Dragon cast out of his Mouth i. e. received and suffered the mischeif of their invasions 33 These words are taken from Numb 16.32 and allude to what has sometimes happened in Earthquakes in which Rivers have been swallowed up by the Earth And it may be observed that it is not said that the Earth swallowed the waters which might indeed denote the conversion of the Barbarous Nations and their incorporating into the Apostasy but that it swallowed up the Flood whereby the Mischief of the Waters or People is more properly signified which indeed fell severely as hath been observed on Chap. 9. on the Idolatrous Apostasy whilst the pure Church was sealed or secured and preserved from the hurt of the Locusts 17 And the Dragon was wrath with the Woman i. e. the pure Church and he went to make War by means of the Beast chap. 11 7. to whom he gave his Authority chap. 13.2 with the small remnant 34 of her seed i. e. the Witnesses who became visible by separating from the Apostasy chap. 11. which keep the Commandments of God purely and entirely without additions and corruptions and have the Testimony of Jesus Christ which is the Spirit of Prophecy chap. 19.10 i. e. are Witness Churches chap. 11.3 34 The Seed of the woman are plainly the Witnesses Chap. 11. which small Remnant was warred with and killed whilst the Church in general or the Woman was preserved by God CHAP. XIII The Text. 1 AND 1 John stood upon the 1 sand of the Sea and saw in Vision a 2 wild savage 3 Beast i. e. an Idolatrous cruel and persecuting Body of Men under a Chief Head rise up out of the 4 Sea i. e. taking its beginning out of the Commotions and Confusions of Nations and People Dan. 7.2 3 having seven 5 heads or Forms of Government Chap. 12 3.17 10 and ten horns or Kingdoms Chap. 5 6.12 3.17 12. and upon his horns ten 6 crowns or Diadems to denote their Soveraign Power and upon his heads the name of Blasphemy signifying that they were Idolatrous Governments Chap. 2.9 Annotations on CHAP. XIII 1 The most proper place to receive a Vision of a Beast rising out of the Sea 2 So the Word should be translated for it is of a distinct signification from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which also ought to be rendred Living Creature and not Beast 3 It appears plainly from Dan. 7.3 17 23. that this is the true (a) See Grotius on Dan. 7.3 Mat. 20.26 Moor's mystery of Iniquity Part 2. in the Word Beast Scriptural Notion of a Beast in general 4 This is taken from Dan. 7.3 where Four great Beasts or Kingdoms are represented as coming up out of the Sea upon which the Winds had striven whereby a Troublesome state of Affairs is aptly signified out of which Empires and Kingdoms have generally risen See num 6. 5 From hence it appears evidently that this Beast is the Roman Empire which was under seven Forms of Government See on Chap. 12 3. 17 10. 6 These Horns are the Kingdoms into which the Roman Empire was divided as appears from Chap. 17.10 which are here represented as Crowned to denote that this was the State of the Empire under which that Division should come to pass whereby it is distinguished from the State of the Empire given as Pagan in the foregoing Chapter where its Ten Horns are not Crowned For although Prophecy with Respect to the Vision in Daniel Chap. 7.8 generally represents the Fourth Beast or Roman Empire in its full and compleat Portraiture as well with Relation to what it was to be as to what it actually was at the time of each Vision yet that a distinction of the Times of its particular States and Conditions might he the better observed each Representation is generally diversified by some particular circumstances relating to it Whereupon the Ten Horns are represented as Crowned to shew that this was the Beast with which the Ten Kings were to receive Power From whence it appears that this Beast is the Papacy as is shewn on Rev. 17.12 which also rose out of the Sea or out of the Confusions of the Roman City and Empire when it was cast like a burning Mountain into the Sea Chap. 8.8 It being plain from (a) Morney du Plessi's Mystery of Iniquity pag. 81 85. Heidegger Histor Papatus pars 1. cap. 2. Bp. Overal's Convocat Book pag. 291 292. History that the Papacy rose upon the Ruines of the Empire which beginning with the the Invasions of the Northern Nations about 400 we may well date its first rising out of the Sea from about that time when (a) Epist ad Gaudentium in Prefat ad libr. Didym de Sp. S. where by the See thing Pot out of the North he understands the Northern Nations Jerom expected Antichrist whom (b) This is confessed by Bellarmine de Roman Pontif. 3. 5. See Mornay's mystery of Iniquity Downham of Antichrist B. 1. c. 3. Dr. Cressener's Append. to his Demonstrat of the Apocal. he and the Ancient Fathers believed should rise upon the Fall of the Empire which they took to be the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or that which withheld the Man of Sin 2 And the Beast which I saw was in its Body like unto a 7 Leopard which represents the Grecian Monarchy Dan. 7.6 and his Feet were as the Feet of a 7 Bear the Emblem of the Medo-Persian Monarchy Dan. 7.5 and his Mouth as the Mouth of a 7 Lion which was the Symbol of the Babylonian or Assyrian Monarchy Dan. 7.4 and the 8 Dragon i. e. the Pagan Roman Emperours Chap. 12. 3 9 13. gave him i. e. the Beast his 9 power i e. his Diabolical Arts and Forces to entice and constrain Men to Idolatry his 10 Seat or Throne i. e. his
the Apostate State of the Church is signified in this Prophecy For as the Papal Monarchy rose out of the Providential Commotions and Troubles of the Empire so was the Antichristian Power of the Clergy founded upon the Apostatizing Spirit of Diotrephes encreasing by degrees in the Church 2. It appears that some Christian Body of Men is signified by this Beast because it is said to have Horns like a Lamb which is the Type of Christ in Scripture By which Expression Horns being the Type of Powers and Potentacies in Scripture an Apostate Hierarchy or a Holy Government for so the Word signifies acting under the sanctified pretences of Christ's Authority and his Religion and in ordine ad spiritualia is very appositely set forth unto us And 3. By this Beast's being represented with Two Horns is very aptly signified the whole Body of the Ecclesiasticks under the Potentacy of the Ruling Clergy or Hierarchy of the Two Divisions of the Empire into East and West and withal there is an intimation given that this Beast rose when the Empire was thus divided And lastly We may from hence conclude that this Beast is not The Antichrist who is represented as a Monarch by One single Horn in Daniel but a Body Politick signified by a Beast in Prophecy under Two co-ordinate Powers or Horns by which the Hierarchy of the Eastern and Western part of the Empire before the Pope came to be an Horn or to have his Antichristian Supremacy is very fitly typified especially the Eastern and Western Patriarchates which were a meer Vsurpation in the Church arising from the honour of precedency which the Metropolitans of the Chief Cities gained upon Constantine's new modelling of the Empire which as Bishop (a) An account of the Govern of the Christian Church for the first six hundred years pag. 192.310 and from pag. 188. to the end of that Book Parker speaks quickly became a Stirrup to Ambition to mount into a Superiority of Power and Jurisdiction And although there were many Contests betwixt the Eastern and Western Bishops yet as the same Learned and Judicious Person has observed the Patriarchal Vsurpation first began at Constantinople and the Supremacy of the Church of Rome was founded meerly upon the Ambition of the Church of Constantinople Which Words are an excellent Comment upon this and the following Verses as his whole Discourse there is wherein is proved that the Eastern Horn or Hierarchy as well as the Western was the Chief Cause of advancing the Beast or the Papacy to its Kingdom 29 Christ is typified by a Lamb in (a) John 1.29 36. Acts 8.32 1 Pet. 1.19 Scripture the Emblem of Innocency Meekness and Purity And here is intimated that this is an Antichristian Beast because of its having something of a Lamb in it the Devil not being able to introduce Antichristianism but under the Mask of Christianity and under a pretence to (b) See Dr. Moor's mystery of Iniquity Mystery Godliness and (c) The Popes whilst they give themselves the humblest Titles make the Proudest claims and under the Name of Servus Servorum make themselves Princes of the World Bp. Parker ibid. pag. 347. with relation to Gregory the Great Humility by which ways it was at first brought into the Church and is still kept up in it 30 Here is signified that this Beast was a Pagano-Christian Beast and a persecuting one because he spake and acted like a Dragon the Type of Paganism and Persecution whilst his Pretences were the Authority and Honour of Christ the Advancement of Vnity and Peace and a Zeal for God's Glory and a reducing of Men by Lamb-like i. e. innocent and gentle Methods a Phrase much used by the French Clergy in their Speeches to their King upon his barbarous proceedings against the French Protestants 12 And he i. e. the Hierarchy exercised all the Power of the first Beast or the Roman Idolatrous Monarchy before 31 him and in favour of him for his Honour and by his Consent and causeth the Earth or the Apostasy and them which dwell therein i. e. the Apostate Members of this Earthly and Worldly Church the Gentiles the Subjects of this Hierarchy Chap. 11.2 to worship Verse 4.8 the first Beast whose deadly wound was healed i. e. the Roman Empire under the seventh Head and eighth King Verse 2 23. Chap. 17. 8 10 12. 31 From hence it appears 1. That this was the Hierarchy of the Roman Empire because it exerciseth Power before the Beast or in his presence which Beast was the Roman Empire as appears from its Description before given 2. That these Two Horns answering to the Two Feet in Daniel the same thing being fitly represented by Feet in the Image of a Man and by Horns in the Type of a Beast's Head and those Two Feet coming not into Succession until the Rise of the Ten Kings who are the Ten Iron Toes of it which was not until A. D. 476. when the Imperatorial Power ceased and the Papal Succession began with its Ten Kings it will follow that this other Beast exercised not the Power of the first Beast until then 3. That the first Beast with its seventh Head the Papacy even when it was in Succession as the eighth King A.D. 476. yet did not then exercise its Power of its self as is plain from History in which it is notorious that the Papacy attained not its Supremacy until A. D. 606. and that all that time the Hierarchy of the Eastern and Western Divisions of the Empire exercised all its Power before it by ministring unto it as the Phrase signifies 1 Sam. 2.18 or in (a) See Grot. on Luke 4 7.24 19. its stead and for its benefit as a kind of a Protector of it in its Infancy and as the Clayie part of the Feet of this Image upholding and sustaining the seventh Head 4. Although the first Beast were before the other Beast as the first Beast signifies the Roman Empire whence it is called the other Beast with reference to some former or first Beast yet as it is the seventh Head they are contemporary the Papacy and the other Beast in that particular Notion as Feet of Clay coming into Succession together at 476. which yet were before the first Beast as they were a domineering and aspiring Body of Men making way for the Papal Kingdom during the time of the Christian Emperour when the Beast lay wounded and was partly kept alive in an healing condition by them and as they were those who protected the New King the Papacy from his Succession at 476. until his Supremacy at 606. 13 And or for he doth great 32 wonders i. e. seemingly great but really lying and counterfeit ones 2 Thessal 2.9 so that he maketh 33 Fire to come down from Heaven on the Earth in the sight of men i. e. appeareth to worldly and apostatized Men consenting to and applauding the Cheat to work as great Miracles as Elias did 1 Kings 18.33 2
25 is most admirably applicable to the Antichristian Roman State it being the only Conspicuous and Remarkable number in that Hierarchy describing the Papacy in its most Essential Parts that Church having been Fatally led to lay its very Foundations upon it it having at first Five and Twenty Cardinals and its Creed consisting of Five and Twenty Articles as the Apostles doth of Twelve as Mr. Potter hath accurately shewn in these and many other Particulars 7. It may be observed That as the Number 666. can by no means be made out of 12 whatsoever Number you multiply it by so neither can the Antichristian State any way arise out of the Apostles Doctrine Lastly The Number 666. consisting of the same number in all its places from Vnits to Hundreds is upon that account as Grotius observes on the place very Remarkable according to the Opinion of the Wise Pagans who made their Vows in the same proportion And because it consists of an entire (a) Poli Synops in locum Senary of numbers arising by degrees from Vnits to Tens and from thence to Hundreds and that in a proportion very agreeable by the multiplication of 6 by 10 so as that 6 are found 10 times in 60 and 60 10 times in 600 it may from thence be thought to signifie the seeming Comeliness and Proportion of the Antichristian State which is so great that it is apt to deceive those who do not exercise Wisdom to discern things it being at first sight a Number more proportionable than 144 the Number of Christ's Kingdom So necessary is it to count numbers and to extract the Roots of them by stripping things of their Outward seeming Appearances although never so Comely and searching into the very intimate nature and Essence of them CHAP. XIV The Text. 1 AND I looked or was in Vision and lo a Lamb i. e. Christ stood to import his settlement in his Government and his Rule and Defence of his people Psalm 2.6 Mic. 5.4 on the Mount 1 Zion i. e. appeared in an exalted and an established State in his Kingdom Psalm 48. Mic. 4.1 Heb. 12.22 and with him an 2 Hundred Forty and Four Thousand i. e. a Body of Apostolical Pure Christians Chap. 7.4 having his i. e. Christ's Fathers Name 3 written in their Foreheads i. e. openly adjudged by God and professing themselves to be the true Followers of Christ See on Chap. 7.3 Annotations on CHAP. XIV 1 Zion (a) Josh 15.63 2 Sam. 5 1-10 1 Chron. 11 1-9 2 Chron. 3.1 Psalm 48.2 was the Mountain or upper part of Jerusalem on one side of which stood the House or Palace of David as the Temple did on the North side of it called Mount Moriah which was reckoned as a part of Mount Zion This Mountain was taken by David from the Jebusites whom the Children of Judah were not able to drive out because of their Vnbelief and was the first Exploit undertaken by him after his being anointed King over all Israel upon the Submission paid unto him by all the Tribes of Israel and their acknowledgment of their being his Bone and his Flesh wherein they were Types of the Obedience that all Nations are to pay to Christ and of their becoming Members of his Body of his Flesh and of his Bones Ephes 5.30 David took it when he began to (a) 2 Sam. 5.4 Luke 3.22 23. Reign being Thirty Years old according to the Age when our Saviour began to preach gather Members for his Kingdom and cast out Devils as David also dispossessed the (b) 2 Sam. 5 6-8 Gregories Observat Chap. 7. Jebusites and cast out their Tutelary Idols the Hatred of his Soul called by him and his Followers by way of Sarcasm and Contempt the Blind and the Lame as having Eyes but seeing not and Feet but walking not according to the like Expression used by him Psalm 115. When he had taken it he fortified the Strong Hold of it and afterwards built there and made a Beautiful City calling it the City of David In all which he was a Type of Christ as that Mountain Strong Hold and City were of the Strength Stability and Beauty of Christ's Kingdom especially as it shall appear at last in a most glorious manner triumphing over all Heathen and Antichristian Idols when the Lord shall set his King upon his Holy Hill of Zion and Christ shall stand and feed his People and be great unto the Ends of the Earth Psalm 2.6 Micah 5.4 Only here it may be observed 1. That as the taking of this Mountain was the first Atchievement of David after he came to the Kingdom before he was fully established in it and had built his City so may this Appearance of Christ be some Preparatory State of his Kingdom called the Kingdom of David in Scripture rising (a) Micah 4.1 2. to the Tops of the Mountains and exalting it self above the Hills that so the Everlasting Gospel might be heard and People might flow unto it but somewhat different from the State of its full Establishment when his Kingdom shall appear in its utmost Glory as in the Description of it given Heb. 12.22 they first come unto Mount Sion before they come unto the City of the Living God and the Heavenly Jerusalem as is more fully shewn on the Three last Chapters where this whole matter is largely considered 2. That here is represented some Exalted State of the Heavenly Tabernacle it self typified by Mount Sion which was not yet of so high and so exalted a Nature as that which it shall afterwards arrive to when it shall appear as in the highest Heavens or in its Heavenly State it being probable that there are Exaltations of Christ's Kingdom in the Archetype of it in the Heavenly Places of which the several Advances it receives here on Earth are the Counterpart Patterns and Example according to what hath been already discoursed on Chap. 12.1 and will be shewn more largely hereafter it being very difficult to give Account of many things in this Prophecy without this Supposition 2 As this Vision relates to the State of Christ's Kingdom upon Earth there is hereby signified a Body of Apostolical pure Christians appearing in a State of open and publick profession of Christ's pure Religion but as it refers to the State of things in the Heavenly Places hereby is denoted an appearance of the very 144000. mentioned in the seventh Chapter who are the Saints and Witnesses departed in the Lord. 3 They were before sealed and in a hidden and invisible State but now they have a Name written that is appearing legible upon their Foreheads and that the Name of God whereby may be understood some Approbation of them and Declaration on God's part before whose Throne they are Verse 5. as to be judged and approved by him that they were Holiness unto the Lord in allusion to the Inscription on the High-Priest's Frontlet Exod. 20.36 and that they were worthy of the Exalted State they now
were advanced unto and withal an open profession of the Witnesses on Earth that they were God's true Soldiers and Servants who used to (a) See Mr. Mede on the place and Grotius be marked in the Forehead and not marked Slaves of the Beast And by the mention of Christ's Sealed Number in this place is intimated the great difference there will be in the Issue and Event of Things betwixt Christ's Servants appearing thus in Glory and the marked Servants of the Beast just beforementioned in the former Chapter and withal according to that known Rule That Opposites when placed near one another illustrate each other hereby is much established the Interpretation of the Number of 666. there given 12 the Root of 144000. being an Anti-Number to 25 the Mark of the Beast signifying an Apostolical Body of Witnesses as that does an Anti-Apostolical one See the Notes on Chap. 7. num 9. and on Chap. 13.18 2 And I heard a Voice 4 from Heaven as the Voice of many Waters i. e. a loud and powerful one Chap. 1. 15. and as the Voice of a great 4 Thunder i. e. Terrible Chap. 4 5. 6 1. 10 3. and I heard the Voice of 4 Harpers harping with their Harps i. e. there was a great and powerful Appearance of Christ's Kingdom Chap. 11.15 4 4 4 Voices Thunder called so frequently Psalm 29. and in other places the Voice of God Musick and Singing are the constant Forerunners and Attendants of Christ's Kingdom as hath been frequently observed And it seems to me that this Vision relates to the Appearance of Christ's Kingdom upon the sounding of the seventh Angel when there were great (a) See Grot. on Rev. 5.8 Voices heard in Heaven saying the Kingdoms of the World are become the Kingdoms of the Lord and of his Christ and that it is Synchronous and contemporary with it it being very rational that the seven loud Voices so audibly heard in order in this Chapter should be no other than the Voices of the Seven Thunders mentioned Chap. 10 3-8 now unsealed or opened which were then sealed and not to be written or come into Event until the days of the Voice of the seventh Angel And here it may be observed that by the Voices and Musick is not only represented an Appearance of Christ's Kingdom upon Earth but that also they signifie the Joy which is in Heaven and in the Heavenly Tabernacle upon the Exaltation of Christ's Kingdom For if there be Joy in Heaven upon the Conversion of a Sinner it may well be supposed to be there also upon the great Advancements of Christ's Kingdom upon Earth And amongst all the Musick of the Temple perhaps (a) See Grot. on Rev. 5.8 Harps are here more particularly mentioned Because it is the Musical Instrument of Praise and Thanksgiving which was wont to be made use of in setting forth Great and Extraordinary Actions and was the particular Instrument which David was eminently skilled in and which was the occasion of his being brought to Court and fitted for the Kingdom which was the Type of Christ's Kingdom here represented And Thunder also may be here mentioned to shew that the seven Voices of this Vision were the several Openings or Vnsealings of the seven Thunders which were sealed Chap. 10.4 3 And they sung as it were a New Song i. e. the Song of Redemption by Christ's Blood alone which seemed to be New because it had not been taught nor heard openly during the Apostasy See Chap. 5.9 before the Throne of God Chap. 4. and before the Four Beasts or Living Creatures Chap. 4.6 and the Elders Chap. 4.4 i. e. the Doctrine of Redemption and those who sung and had taught it in the Church whilst they were upon Earth were approved of by God and the Divine Consistory which all along in this Prophecy appears as passing Judgment upon the Actions represented in it See Chap. 4.1 pag. 70. and no man could learn that Song but the Hundred Forty and Four Thousand i. e. none could fully understand and experience the Doctrine taught in that Song but those true Christ ans which were redeemed i. e. rescued and delivered by the Blood of Christ alone from the Earth i. e. from the Corruptions of Antichristianism 4 These are they which are not defiled with Whorish Women i. e. were not Members of Idolatrous Churches Ezek. 23. See Rev. 17.1 for they are Virgins and not Prostitutes as Jezebel and the Whore Chap. 17. and had kept themselves pure from all Idolatry and Antichristian Pollutions Psalm 45.14 Canticl 1.3 2 Cor. 11.2 these are they which 5 follow the Lamb wheresoever he goeth i. e. were the Faithful Disciples of Christ and are now his more Immediate Attendants in the Heavenly State of his Kingdom here represented these were 6 redeemed from 7 among men being the first 7 fruits unto God and to the Lamb i. e. the choicest Members of his Church and the first partakers of the Glory of his Kingdom 5 A Metaphor taken from those Officers who are the constant Attendants of Princes or from the Disciples of Prophets concerning whom this Phrase is used in (a) Matth. 8.19 Luke 9.57 Scripture or rather from the Virgins the Companions of the Bride and Bridegroom Psalm 45.14 Matth. 25. Christ's Kingdom being likened to a Marriage-Supper Chap. 19.9 and his Attendants as a Bridegroom to Virgins Matth. 25. who are also the Chorus to the Marriage-Song of his Kingdom in the Book of Canticles And they are mentioned in opposition to the Followers and Worshippers of the Beast 6 As the First-born were wont to be under the Law Exod. 13 13.22 29. 7 First Fruits (b) Exod. 22.29 Numb 18.16 Jerem. 2.3 Zech. 2.12 James 1.18 See Mede on the place and the Commentators on these Texts were the First and the Choicest Offerings and whatsoever was separated from Prophane Vses to Holy ones Whereby is signified 1. The First Church of Choice Holy and Pure Christians which shall appear at the expiring of the Times of the Beast upon the first Succession of Christ into his Kingdom when as hath been before shewn on Chap. 10. num 13. the Thirty Years in Daniel which make the 1260 Years to amount to 1290. are to begin in the full and entire Resurrection of the Witnesses Who are said here to be redeemed by the Lamb or Christ alone in opposition to their own and others Merits and Antichristian Pardons and Indulgences and that from among Men i. e. from out of the World or the common State of Mankind or rather from the Antichristian Men of the Earth those Merchants Chap. 18 11-13 who bought and sold Men and Souls 2. Because in this Vision there is described not only the State of Christ's Church and Kingdom upon Earth but also the State of the Archetypal Kingdom in Heaven Hereby is also represented the first Glorious Appearance of the Members of it the Witnesses departed in the Lord who have the priviledge to be the
bright 29 cloud of Glory to denote the Majesty Justice and Purity of Gods Judgments and upon the Cloud one 30 sate like unto the Son of Man i. e. Christ Chap. 1.13 Dan. 7.13 John 1.14 having on his head a Golden 31 Crown denoting his Kingdom and Conquests Chap. 6.2 and in his hand a sharp 31 Sickle to reap the World swiftly and speedily Joel 3.4 13. Matth. 13.30 36-43 28 The two former Verses contained evidently a Declaration of a Blessed State of the Dead in the Lord immediately to ensue which State being the next thing in order to be performed seems to be here set forth by Metaphors made use of to the same purpose by the Prophet Joel and our Saviour in the places quoted in the Paraphrase on the Text as shall be endeavoured to be shewn from what the Words of the Text shall suggest 29 Here Christ is represented as coming in his Kingdom to Judgment according to the Descriptions frequently given of it in the Gospels Luke 21.27 Matth. 24 30.26 64. Dan. 7.14 30 This posture also denotes Judicature and Government Joel 3.12 Matth. 19.22 to which answers his coming sitting on a White Horse as he does here on a White Cloud in the parallel place to this Rev. 19.11 31 In Rev. 19. he hath also many Crowns upon his Head which are a known Emblem of Regal Power and Conquest And as he had a Crown at his first going out to propagate the Gospel Chap. 6.2 so is he here also represented with a Golden one to shew the Glory of the Kingdom in which he is now established 32 This is the Instrument of Reapers with which they not only cut down the Corn but also gather it together according to our Saviour's Parable Matth. 13. and it is sharp to denote the speed which will be then used Joel 3.4 15 And another a sixth * Angel and Voice came out of the Temple crying with a loud Voice i. e. earnestly Luke 18.7 Rev. 6.10 to him that sate on the Cloud i. e. to Christ Thrust in we humbly pray thee thy Sickle and reap for the time is come for thee the Lord of the Harvest the Judge of the World which raiseth the Dead and quickneth them Matth. 9.38 John 5.21 22. to reap for the 33 Harvest of the Earth or Field of the World is * ripe i. e. all things are ready and the time appointed for gathering the Children of the Kingdom is now just at hand Matth 13.30 38. John 4.35 Mark 4.29 (a) The Day of the Lord is near Joel 3.14 * This Angel or Angelical Company for Angel is taken collectively in this Prophecy is not a Gospel-Ministry because it does not denounce any thing as the others had done but seems to denote the Attendants of Christ the Angels who are the Reapers Matth. 13.29 and the Shout the Voice of the Arch-Angel which shall accompany him at the last Day and they cry out unto him from his Heavenly Temple to expedite that Blessedness which had been so long delayed and which the Saints so eagerly long after and the whole Creation groans for Rom. 8.22 23. 2 Cor. 5.1 2.4 5. 33 Harvest is plainly taken in a good sense in the places quoted in the Paraphrase and where it is common to the good and bad as Matth. 13. they are distinguished from one another as Tares and Wheat and even in Joel 3.13 from whence this Expression is taken Vintage is peculiarly appropriated to the Wicked and may be very well distinguished from the Harvest which may relate to God's bringing or gathering together his People Verse 1.7 and his mighty ones Verse 11. who seem to be the same with the Armies of Heaven the Angels and the Saints which shall accompany Christ at this great Day of his Kingdom Rev. 19.14 And therefore the reaping of both these at the last Day being so plainly distinguished in Scripture it is fit also that it should be so here also * Ripe that is fully ripe White to the Harvest and therefore looks as if it were dried or withered as the Word also imports because of the long delay and expectation of Christ's Kingdom 16 And he that sate on the Cloud i. e. Christ thrust in his Sickle on the Earth and the Earth was immediately reaped of its 34 Wheat i. e. the Just were gathered together at the first Resurrection Matth. 13.30 38 48. Rev. 20.5 1 Cor. 15. 1 Thes 4 13-18 34 The Saints and Godly are understood saith Mr. Brightman on the place by the Corn or Wheat of this Harvest who are compared to it by our Saviour Matth. 13.30 38. and are here represented saith he as falling of their own accord before the Sickle through the great ripeness of them Now seeing that almost (a) Poli Synops in Apocal. pag. 1098 in fin all Interpreters agree that these Words have a reference to the last Judgment described by the same Metaphors in Dan. 7. and Math. 13. it is highly probable that hereby is meant the gathering together of the Saints departed in Christ by the first Resurrection fitly called the reaping of the Earth of its Wheat as it consists in the gathering together of the Bodies and Dust of Saints which are all that is precious and of any Value in it and the gathering of them and those who remain alive out of this Wicked Antichristian Earth into a New Heaven and a New Earth which is the proper meaning of (b) Metere est ex hac Vita colligere Menoch Tirinus in locum Falx homines a Terra demet it ut Ecclesiae inserantur Grot. in locum Reaping in Scripture and because this is to be done in a moment 1 Cor. 15.51 52. therefore is the Sickle represented as sharp to denote the extraordinary quickness of this Action But of this see what is largely discoursed on the Three Last Chapters 17 And another Angel i. e. the Seventh and last came out of the Temple which is in Heaven i. e. another Angelical Company of Reapers who were to bind 35 together the Wicked in order to destruction Matth. 13.41 he also having a sharp Sickle to cut 36 down and gather together the wicked ones for a swift Destruction Verse 14 35 For such this Angel may very well be supposed to be by the Description here given of him and consequently the Angel Verse 15. must mean the Reapers who were to gather the Wheat or the Children of the Kingdom together 36 For this is the Use of a Sickle as well as to gather 18 And 37 another Angel came out from the Altar of Burnt Offerings on which there was Fire continually Levit. 6.9 Rev. 6.9 which had power over fire i. e. God's Judgments in order to execute them Rev. 8 5.11 5 and cryed with a loud cry that the Blood of the Souls under the Altar might be speedily and fully avenged upon the Wicked Rev. 6.9 10 11. to him that had the sharp Sickle saying Thrust in thy sharp Sickle
is signified the Preservation and Security of the Saints during the pouring forth of the Vials upon the Wicked Whereupon Fire is not here mentioned where the Sea is spoken of with relation to them And the Scripture seems to affirm that the Days of the last Great Tribulation which may perhaps refer to the Vials shall be shortned or cut off for the sake of the Elect Isa 10.22 Matth. 24.22 Rom. 9.28 7 By a usual Hebraism the most Excellent things are attributed to God in Scripture whence these Phrases Cedars of God Mountains of God and the like And by these Harps is signified such Heavenly Musick or Praise and Thanksgiving in this Representation of Christ's Kingdom as David the King a Type of Christ used in his Royal Palace and in the Service of the Temple called the Musick of God in (a) 1 Chron. 16.42 2 Chron. 7.6 Scripture Skill to play on the Harp being one of those Gifts which God bestowed on David to fit him for the Kingdom 1 Sam. 17.13 18. and in which the Prophets exercised themselves 1 Sam. 10.5 And so also at the passage over the Red Sea which is here alluded to the Women went out after Miriam with Timbrels Dances and Songs Exod. 15 20-22 3 And 8 they sung now in an happy and secure State the Song of Moses i. e. one of the same Spirit and Style with that which was sung by him Exod. 15. the (b) Deut. 34.10 Heb. 3.5 Eminent Servant of God and (b) Deut. 34.10 Heb. 3.5 Faithful in all his House and therefore a fit Type of these Faithful Witnesses and worthy to be imitated by them in a Song in Memory of Gods Judgments on Antichrist of whom the Aegyptians the Subject of Moses's Song were a Type and they sung the Song of the Lamb Christ sung Chap 5 8-14 saying Great as to the Power by which they are wrought Exod. 15.6 7. Rev. 5.12 and marvellous as to the Wisdom of them Exod. 15.11 Rev. 5.12 are all thy Works especially those wrought in our Deliverance Lord God Almighty glorious in Holiness doing Wonders Exod. 15.11 Rev. 4.8 just in punishing and true in performing thy promises are thy ways i. e. Proceedings and Actions Exod. 15.13 Deut. 42.4 thou King of Saints whom thou dost defend deliver and exalt Exod. 15.17 18. Rev. 5.9 8 As Moses and the Israelites also did on the Banks of the Red Sea Exod. 15. betwixt which Song and that of the Lamb Chap. 4 and 5. there is a very remarkable Congruity as is observed in the Paraphrase 4 Who of all the Creatures Rev. 5.13 shall not fear thee O Lord for thy Judgments Exod. 15 14-16 Jerem. 10.7 and glorifie thy Name i. e. Thee thy Excellencies and Perfections Exod. 15.3 11. for thou only art holy Exod. 15.11 Rev. 4 8. for all Nations shall come and worship before thee alone Exod. 15 14-16 Rev. 4 8-11 and 5.13 for thy Judgments are made manifest in the Glories of thy Triumphs over thy Enemies Exod. 15.6 7. Rev. 5.13 5 And after that Song and Vision I looked again or was in Vision and behold the 9 Temple or (a) Psal 28 2. 138 2. Grot. and Hammond on this place and on Acts 7.44 Oracle the most Holy Place of the Tabernacle of the Testimony i. e. of the Divine Habitation or Dwelling-place where God used to manifest and exhibit himself and give Testimony of his Presence and in which were the Two Tables the Witnesses of the Covenant betwixt God and his People which were to testifie what God required and testifie against them if they broke it Exod. 25.10 22.31 18 38 21. Numb 1.50 Deut. 31.6 Acts 7.44 in Heaven in the Heavenly Tabernacle and in the Pure Church See on Chap. 14 2. was opened i. e. there was a very high Appearance of an Exalted State of Christ's Kingdom in the Heavenly Tabernacle and a very great Manifestation of his Kingdom on Earth and Extraordinary Communications of God's Will aod Evidences of his Presence especially in 10 Judgments 9 The Temple of the Tabernacle denotes the Holy of Holies the most sacred part of it which is now opened to signifie some extraordinary manifestation of Christ's Kingdom there seeming to be many Gradual Openings and Visions of the several parts of the Temple according to the several Advances of Christ's Church and Kingdom unto its perfection For in the Vision of the Temple Opened Chap. 11.19 only the Ark of the Testament was seen which relates only to some particular great Mysteries concerning Christ's Redemption Whereas here the whole Inward Tabernacle of Testimony was discovered which had several (a) Heb. 9 1-5 other things in it besides the Ark whereby other Manifestations may be signified But although the Temple of Jerusalem be the primary Type alluded to yet Ezekiel's Visional Temple is the more immediate Type and the ultimate Prospect of all is upon God's dwelling in holy Souls especially in the New Jerusalem State by his Shecinah or special Presence and to God and the Lamb being the Temple into which all is at last resolved Rev. 21.3 22. 10 This I take as appears from the next Verse to be the principal intent of the Opening of the Temple of the Tabernacle at this time viz. That God's Will concerning the approaching Judgments ready to be executed was now plainly made known expressed here by the Opening of that place from whence the Divine Responses and Oracles were wont to be made under the Law and therefore the Angels come forth in the Habit in which the High-Priest was wont to come out of the Holy of Holies with an Answer from God 6 And the seven Angels or Ministers of God's Judgments came out of the Heavenly Temple having the seven Plagues Strokes or Punishments clothed in pure and white Linen Chap. 3.4 5. and having their Breasts girded with golden girdles i. e. they came out in the Habit of Priests and Kings to shew the Royal Priesthood of Christ's Kingdom and Heavenly Temple or Tabernacle out of which these Judgments proceed See Chap. 1 13 7 And one of the Four Beasts or the first of the Representatives of the Apostolical Church Chap. 4 6. 6 1. gave 11 unto the seven Angels seven golden Vials or Bowls 2 Chron. 4.22 Rev. 5.8 full not of Incense but of the 12 Wrath of God trodden cut of the Winepress of his Wrath out of which the Vial are filled Chap. 14 19 20. 15 1. 19 15. who liveth for ever and ever and therefore can and will punish the Wicked with an utter and an everlasting destruction Deut. 32 22-43 Heb. 10.31 11 The seven Angels had indeed the seven Plagues that is the Judgments and Punishments which were to be executed but besides the Materials if I may so speak of these Judiciary Plagues there is also something in God's severe Judgments which comes more immediately from the hand of God himself in which the very Essence and Formality of (a) Rom. 12.19 Heb.
10 28-31 See Dr. Tho. Goodwin's Discourse of the Punishment of Sin in Hell Hell Torments is thought to consist Now this Wrath of God the Sting of his Punishments and the very Gall of them is here given to the Angels by One of the Four Living Creatures that is by the First of them as One generally signifies in this Prophecy whose Voice was as Thunder and who had the very Purity and Power of the Gospel and that in Golden Vials to signifie the Purity and Holiness of God's Judgments and that they were executed upon the Prayers of Saints of which Golden Vials and Incense are an Emblem Chap. 5. 8. 12 The Wicked with their sins are cast as Grapes of Sodom Deut. 32.32 33. into the Winepress of God's Wrath trod by Christ Chap. 19 15. as Redeemer and out of that VVine are these Vials filled Whereby is signified that the Just Vengeance and Recompence of God is executed upon them by Christ as the Demerit and Consequence of their sins for the Blood of his Servants they had shed and as the Vials of the Prayers of the Saints Chap. 5.8 are full of Odors by Vertue of Christ's Intercession so are these full of the VVrath of God upon the Intercession of Christ for his oppressed Saints 8 And the Temple was 13 filled with 14 Smoak from the Glory of God and from his Power i. e. there were setled Manifestatiâ—ns of God's powerful and Glorious Presence in a blessed State Ezek. 43 4-6 and 15 or but no man or no Creature was able to enter into the Temple i. e. God's Glorious Presence could not be enjoyed in its highest Manifestations Ezek. 48 35. Rev 21.3 23 24. till the Seven Plagues of the Seven Angels were fulfilled i. e. until the perfect Destruction of the Wicked whose Sins 16 hinder God's Presence Ezek. 43.9 13 The Constant (a) Exod. 43.34 35. Lev. 16.2 Numb 9 15-23 1 Kings 8 10-13 2 Chron. 7 1-4 Ezek. 43 1-9 Manifestations of God's Presence are signified in Scripture by a Cloud covering and filling the Tabernacle and Temple whereby God took as it were possession of them who is represented in Ezekiel as filling the House or Temple with his Glory when he came to dwell in the midst of his people for ever Ezek. 43.5 7 9. Whereby is signified that the New Jerusalem State was near its Settlement in the Blessed Milennium when God will dwell with Men and he and the Lamb shall be the Temple of the City Rev. 21.2 3 22 23. 14 Light (b) See on Chap. 3. num 36. and Bright Fire are the proper Emblems of God who is Love but when Smoak appears with it there is intimated some Darkness in the Dispensation referred to and Mixtures of VVrath and Displeasure as in this place because God's VVrath was not as yet executed the Glory of God represented by Light and Bright Clouds in the Old Testament filled the Temple with Smoak and not Light there being as yet a Contest betwixt the VVrath Jealousie and Justice of God and his Enemies to be destroyed whose Defilements represented by Smoak Chap. 9. 2. and Sins were the Cause that God's Anger smoaked against them for otherwise Fury is not in the Lord Isa 27.4 15 An Allusion to what is related concerning Moses Exod. 40.35 whereby is expressed the great Terror of this Time of Vengeance which no Created Beings not even the Angels themselves are able to bear this being the (a) Isa Chapters 24 25 26 27. Dan. 12.1 Matth. 24.21 29 30. Mark 13.19 Luke 21.23 24. Rev. 3 10.7 14.16 18. Time of such Trouble as never was called The Great Temptation The Great Tribulation and the Great Earthquake in Scripture which was to be shortned for the Elect's Sake and will be so very Terrible that they are pronounced Blessed by Daniel Chap. 12.12 who shall wait and come to the End of those Days when the Blessed Millennium shall begin Which perhaps may be prefigured by (b) Exod. 24 12-18 Mose's not being able to go up into the Mount until after six Days and his being called up into it by God on the seventh Day the (c) See the Notes on Chapt. 20.4 Type of the seventh Thousand Year or the Sabbatical Millennium And from hence it may be observed that although there shall be several Manifestations of God's Presence and Openings of the Temple after the End of the Beasts Months upon the Entrance of which the Temple was shut up and at the Expiring of which it must consequently be opened that yet nevertheless the highest State of it in which God and the Lamb are the Temple consisting in perfect Tranquillity and Serenity without any smoak of Anger from God's Glory shall not be enjoyed until the Vials are poured out which will not be if the Beast's Months end at 1697 until A. D. 1772. when the 75 Years which are added to the Times of Antichrist by Daniel Chap. 12. will be expired as hath been frequently observed 16 This was signified by the several gradual (a) Ezek. 8.4 6.9 3.10 4 15-19 11 23. Removals of the Glory of God and its departure from the Temple in Ezekiel and his not returning into it so as to fill it and inhabit in it for ever until he had consumed the wicked Idolaters and their Abominations in his Anger Ezek 39 11-29.43 1-9 CHAP. XVI The Text. AND I heard a great Voice or a powerful Command full of Authority and about a most important matter out of the Heavenly Temple of Christ's Kingdom the Original and Arche-type of his Kingdom upon Earth Chap. 15.1 8. saying to the seven Angels or Ministerial Instruments of God's Will who undertake nothing without a special Command Go your ways with all speed and swiftness and by Virtue of my Commission and pour out the very Dregs of the Vials of thr Wrath of God upon the 1 Earth Annotations on CHAP. XIV 1 This Chapter relating wholly to things Future is thereupon very obscure it being doubtful whether it is to be interpreted in a Mystical Sense as most Interpreters have done or in a Litteral one with reference to the Great Conflagration of the World plainly asserted by the Apostle (a) 2 Ep. 3. Peter and generally acknowledged as a great Truth In the former way of Interpreting Earth Sea Rivers and the other parts of the World on which the Vials are poured are to be understood only concerning the several Members of the Antichristian Kingdom signified by them but in the latter they are to be taken Litterally and the Vials are to be supposed as so many Gradual Preparations to the General Dissolution of the World by Fire To the clearing of which Question it may be observed 1. That these Vials are filled out of the Blood which came out of the Winepress of God's Wrath as appears from Chap. 14.19 20. compared with the first Verse of this Chapter Whence it will follow if that Observation be true That these Vials must
their Waters justly turned into Blood for making that Element the Instrument of their Bloody Design against the Israelitish Infants Ex. 1.22 11 And blasphemed 17 the God of Heaven by whose Command these Plagues were inflicted because of their Pains and their Sores or fiery Ulcers and Torment of 17 Mind and Body Verse 2. and repented not of their deeds as being given over to a Reprobate Mind Verse 9. 17 17 The extream Torment they were under affected their Minds and Consciences and made them blaspheme God and gnaw their Tongues as Men in the greatest Rage imaginable For in this Vial there is an Allusion to the thick and palpable Darkness with which God plagued Aegypt Exod. 10 21-23 wherein Men sate still for several Days together in a most disconsolate condition vexed (a) Psalm 78.49 VVisd 17. and tormented with great Terrors from their own affrighted Consciences and the Evil Angels 12 And the sixth Angel poured out his Vial upon the great River 18 Euphrates and the Waters thereof were dried up i. e. all manner of Impediments were removed Isa 11 15. Jerem. 50 38.51 32 36. Zech. 10.11 that the way of the Kings 19 of the East i. e. of those Living Saints who are to Reign with Christ in his Kingdom Isa 41.26 Rev. 21.24 might be prepared i. e. that all things might be 20 prepared for the Jerusalem State in the New-Earth See the Three last Chapters 18 In this Verse there is an Allusion to the Exploit of Cyrus who dreined the River Euphrates when he took Babylon as had been foretold by the Prophet (b) Chap. 50 38.51 32 36. Vid. Grot. in loc Isaiah 41.26 Jeremiah and to those passages of the (c) Is 15.15 Zech. 10.11 where by the Tongue of the Egyptian Sea is meant the Bay of the Mediterranean Sea which lies next to Egypt and by the River not Euphrates which has not Seven Streams but Nilus which by so many Mouths empties it self into the Mediterranean Prophets where the Return of the Jews into their own Land is described in the like Expressions 19 Here also is an Allusion to Isaiah 41.2 25.46 11. where it is foretold that one should be raised up from the North and come from the Rising of the Sun to call upon or (a) Ezra 1 1 2. proclaim God's Name meaning thereby Cyrus who by his Mother's side was of Media which lies North from Judea and by his Father was a Persian whose Countrey lies exactly Eastward of the Holy Land And although Arabia be sometimes called the East in (b) Judg. 6.3 Job 1 3. Scripture and the Arabs the Children of the East for Job was a King in Arabia as Dr. (c) Itiner Mundi pag. 72 73. Hyde hath fully proved yet it was in respect of (d) Mede 's VVorks pag. 476. Egypt where the Jews had learnt that Form of Speech Arabia lying Southward of Palestine Now Cyrus was a Type of Christ and therefore by the Kings of the East may in proportion be here meant those Saints who as so many Messiahsses or Anointed Kings and Priests by which Name Cyrus is called in Scripture shall Reign with Christ who is expresly said to come from the East Chap. 7.2 20 An Expression used Isaiah 40.3 Malach 3.1 Matth. 3.3 And here it is to be noted that (e) Gen. 2 10-14 Euphrates was one of the Branches into which the River which watered Paradise was divided after it had passed through it It was also the (f) Gen. 15.18 Exod. 23.31 Deut. 1 4.11 24. Josh 1.4 2 Sam. 8.3 1 Kings 4.21 2 Chron. 9.26 Eastern bound of the Land of Promise to which David and Solomon extended their Dominion the Kingdoms thereabouts being Tributary unto them although the Jews never enjoyed a quiet Possession of them as proper Owners for any considerable time God (g) Fuller's Pisgah Sight 1.2 contracting their Borders for their Sins and at last scattering and carrying them Captive beyond this very River into the Dominions of the Assyrian and Babylonish Tyrants So that this River which at first was a Stream flowing out of Paradise became the Fatal Boundary of the Kingdom of the People of God over which they were carried Captive and a Sign of Enmity and Hostility to God's Church Babylon the Type of the Seat of Antichrist being seated on one Branch of it From which Observations we may conclude that by drying up the Waters of Euphrates that the Way of the Kings of the East might be prepared is signified 1. Preparations for removing of all Impediments and Obstacles whatsoever especially from Antichrist which may hinder the Kingdom of Christ whose Dominion is to be extended beyond that River unto the Ends of the Earth as the Psalmist hath plainly foretold Psalm 72.8 2. Here may also be intimated the near Approach of the New Earth described in the Three Last Chapters signified by the drying up that River whereon the Type of the Antichristian City was seated which was an hindrance to the Saints entring into and enjoying the Paradisiacal State of the New Earth of Christ's Kingdom In order to which also according to Dr. (b) Theory of the Earth 3.9 Burnet's Hypothesis the Rivers are to be dryed up that so no stop may be put to the Conflagration which is to burn up the Old Earth 13 And I saw three unclean 21 Spirits of Devils Verse 14 like Frogs 22 come out of the 23 mouth of the Dragon i. e. the Pagan Roe man Powers Chapters 12 and 13. and out of the mouth of the Beast i. e. the Antichristian King Chap. 13. and of the False 24 Prophet i. e. the Antichristian Hierarchy the other Beast Chap. 13.11 21 An Epithet frequently given in Scripture to the Evil Spirits to distinguish them from the Pure and Holy Spirit of God and they are called unclean because they tempt to and take delight in Sin which is Impurity and Vncleanness 22 Like the Frogs of Aegypt Exod. 8 1-14 who went up into the Houses of the Aegyptians and even into the Bed-Chamber of King Pharaoh and his Nobles Psalm 105.30 Whereby is elegantly set forth the Vile Original of the Devil's Angels and Emissaries born as it were out of the unclean Mud and Slime and sent to Negotiate and Solicite of which the Croaking of Frogs is a Symbol the Kings of the Earth into whose Bed Chambers and most private Retirements they insinuate themselves 23 They came out of their Mouths as Embassadours to speak in their Name and interpret their Mind and Designs And these Spirits of Devils came out of the Mouths of the Dragon Beast and False Prophet to shew that Satan had made use of them all along as his principal Agents out of each of whom they came to shew that all their several and distinct Interests were now to be joyned together at this great Battle and decisive Attempt 24 He is called the Other Beast Chap. 13. whilst the Beast was in his Infancy but
And from hence it appears as also from the solemn words Verse 17. It is done which are plainly taken from the same passage in Ezekiel that the Judgments upon those wicked Nations are here referred to and this may probably be that signal Vengeance which shall fall upon them upon the passing away of the Old Earth by which as by a mighty Tempest of Thunder Lightning and prodigious Hailstones reserved by God against this time of Trouble and this day of Battel and War as Job speaks Chap 38.22 23. in the same Words used in this Chapter and by Daniel Chap. 12.1 they shall be scattered into the Four Corners of the Earth where they are to remain under the Effects of God's Wrath often set forth in Scripture by such Tempests until the expiring of the Thousand Years CHAP. XVII The Text. 1 AND there came with Authority and Commission from God one i. e. the first Chap. 16.2 of the seven Angels which 1 had the seven Vials and talked with me after a more familiar manner saying unto me Come hither i. e. nearer unto me to receive more clear and intimate communications of Knowledge and I will shew or point out and demonstrate unto thee the Judgment i. e. the foul 3 guilt Sentence and Destruction of the great 4 Whore i. e. the gteat Idolatrous City and Church that 5 sitteth upon many Waters that is ruleth over much people Verse 15 18. Annotations on CHAP. XVII 1 To shew that this Woman was one of the Enemies of Christ's Kingdom upon whom the Vials are to be poured and withal the chief of them with whom all the others were to fall 2 As being now about to give him a more clear description of the Beast than he had as yet received 3 So the Word signifies sometimes in Scripture as Ezek 7.23 Rom. 5.16 1 Tim. 5.12 4 The People Cities and Churches which Apostatize from the True God to Idolatry are called Whores in (a) Isa 1.21 Nahum 3.4 Ezek. 23. Rev. 2.20 Scripture for breaking their Covenant with God to whom they were thereby espoused from whence it is evident that a Christian City must be meant in this Chapter and not a Pagan which cannot be said to be a Whore or an Apostate City because Pagan Cities having never acknowledged the True God or been espoused unto him cannot be said to Apostatize from him And we may observe that there is here a Double Article in the Greek 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 to shew that this City was Eminent for Idolatry and that she had been before noted for it in this Prophecy that she had continued in it for a long time that her sin was great in it self and had been propagated through the large Extent of her Dominions whence she is called The Great Whore and The Whore as being the Chief and Metropolitan of the Idolatrous Cities and Churches the impudent Whorish Woman according to Ezek. 16.30 and Chap. 23. and the Jezebel Rev. 2.20 5 In Allusion to the situation of her Type Babylon which is called The Great City Dan. 4.3 and is described Jerem. 51.13 as dwelling upon many Waters that is situaated upon Euphrates which encompassed it and ran through it and the adjacent Countrey in Cuts and Rivulets 2 With whom i. e. by 6 whose sollicitations and example the ten Kings of the Earth verse 12. have committed spiritual fornication which is Idolatry Isa 23.17 and all the inhabitants or meaner people of the Earth i. e. of the Apostate Roman Empire have been drunk i. e. madly zealous and sottish y doteing Jerem. 51.7 with the wine of her Fornication i.e. her pleasing and intoxicating allurements to Idolatry 6 Or hereby may be signified that they Idolized her by worshipping her and calling her the Mother and Mistress of all Churches and attributing Infallibility to her as the Phrase is taken Jerem. 3.9 Ezek. 16 17.23 37. 3 So he i. e. the Angel carried me away in the Spirit chap. 1. 10. into the Wilderness 7 where the Woman the true Church was chap. 12. 6. and I saw a 8 Woman i. e. a City verse 18. and Church * sit on high and in an exalted state verse 9. upon a scarlet 9 coloured Beast i. e. the Roman Empire full of names or kinds of Blasphemies i.e. of all 10 manner of Idols and Idolatries and Idolatrous Titles and Offices having seven heads or successive forms of Government verse 9 10. and ten horns i. e. Kings verse 12. 7 The Wilderness was a proper place for him to see this Vision in 1. Because places of Retirement and Solitude are fittest for the Reception of Divine Illuminations and for Meditation and to signifie that a clear and distinct View of the Apostasy could not be taken but by one who had retired at some distance from it and from its bewitching pleasures and the Hurry and Noise which attended its City Church and Court 2. Because the Woman the pure Church being in the Wilderness he could best compare them and distinguish the one from the other 8 Churches and Cities are represented by Women in Prophecy (a) Isa 54.6 Jerrm 6.2 Ezek 16 30. and 23d Chap. as they are also in ancient Coyns and Pictures And although a City be here chiefly signified as is plain from Verse 18. yet because the Church is in the City and the foul and loathsome Crime of the City here reprehended is with relation to Church-Corruptions therefore that is to be understood and included in it * She sitteth on high on the Beast by which she is born up or exalted as Imperial Cities are by the Empires of which they are the Chief Seat 9 Scarlet Colour denotes Royal Authority as appears from Dan. 5. Matth. 27.28 and the Military Robe of the Roman Emperours was also of that Colour whereby is appositely signified the Tyrannical Cruelty of the Beast and that this Woman or City was seated in the Roman Empire and was the Imperial City of it 10 All which may be included in (a) See Chap. 2 9. 11 13. numb 45. Names of Blasphemies and is plainly fulfilled in the Numerous kinds of Idolatry and Idolatrous Offices in use under the Roman Antichristian Jurisdiction no other Beast being proper to carry a Whore or an Apostate Church but an Apostate one 4 And the Woman i. e. the Romish City and Church was arrayed in Purple 11 and Scarlet Colour i. e. arrogated to her self Imperial Power and Majesty and decked 12 with Gold and precious stones and Pearls i. e. was a pompous and worldly Church full of Pride and Riches having a golden Cup 13 in her hand i. e. tempting Baits and powerful motives ready at hand to entice worldly minds full of abomination 14 and filthiness of her fornication i. e. of abominable and loathsome Idolatry 11 Scarlet was the Habit of the Romans in VVar and Purple the Habit of the Emperours and Senate in Times of Peace as Grotius observes on the place whereby is signified that this was
〈◊〉 signifies of an other kind or sort from it as not being Beastian or Idolatrous but an utter Enemy to the Beast during whose Reign it lay wounded to Death Chap. 13. 3. Whereupon 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 seems to be made use of by the Holy Spirit that so it might be answered by 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 a Word which includes both the former Senses For seeing that there are Eight Kings and but Seven Heads it is plain that One of the Kings must be no Head and therefore of a Nature different from all the other which can only belong to this Seventh King because the Five First Governments are known to be Idolatrous Governments which is the signification of an Head in this Prophecy and the Eighth is expresly said to be one of the seven that is Idolatrous Heads So that this Other is indeed a King and that the seventh of the Imperial City of Rome but is not of the Seven that is is not a King who is also an Idolatrous Head of the Beast as all the six Governments before the Christian Emperours were and as the seventh Head was to be who is the Eighth King or Government but the seventh Idolatrous King or the seventh King who is an Head as well as a King as appears from Verse 11. 30 This is also an evident Character of the Christian Empire which in comparison of the Reign of the Five preceeding Kings and the 1260 Years of the Beast lasted but for a short space uiz but about an hundred and Fifty Years reckoning from Constantine until the Fall of the Western Empire under Augustulus A. D. 476. Whence also it is evident that the Beast the next or Eighth King must enter into Succession at that Time together with his Ten Kings who receive power as Kings at the same Hour with him Verse 12. These being evidently Governments immediately successive as a Sixth to a Fifth a Seventh to that and an Eighth following it without any Interregnum or intermediate Government And it is here said that it must or ought not to continue long to shew that Providence had ordained that the Christian Empire should be short on purpose that there might be space enough out of the time destined for these purposes for the Reign of the Beast whose Kingdom was to be built upon the Ruines of the Christian Empire 11 And the Beast that was viz. in the sixth Head Verse 8. and is not as yet risen to his Supremacy Verse 8. even he and let it be observed is the 31 Eighth King Verse 10. and is one to wit the last of the seven Heads or Idolatrous Governments the Seventh King being no Head Verse 10. and goeth into perdition i. e. shall be destroyed and then all the Four Monarchies end in him and the Kingdom of Christ succeeds Dan. 2. and 7. See on Verse 8. and on Verses 16 17. 31 From this Verse it is evident 1. That The Beast is the Papacy because that although there were Kings of Italy after the Extinction of the Christian Emperours the Seventh King yet Rome the Woman or great City of these Eight Kings who upheld and sustained it by their Authority and where the Heads and Kings were resident which reigned over the inferiour Kings or Princes of the Earth was never afterwards under the Supreme Government of any but the Pope at least for any considerable time who must therefore be the Eighth King here mentioned they being called Kings with respect to the City of Rome as appears from Verse 3 9 10 11 18. and from what hath been observed on Chap. 13. 2. where the very same Beast with this is described as is evident from the Characters given of them in both Chapters which may be seen in Dr. Moor's Synops Prophet lib. 1. Chap. 10 c. and in Dr. Cressener's Demonstrat of the Apocalyps 2. That the Papacy is an Idolatrous Government because the Eighth King which is the Papacy is of the Seven Heads of the Beast or Idolatrous Roman Empire in general and is also The Beast in particular or that which is called so by way of Eminence viz. the Seventh Head but Eighth King which was is not and yet is which is called the Beast although it be only a Head of it as an eminent part has often the denomination of the whole and to shew that it is the same with the Little Horn in Daniel which is called Dan. 7.11 The Beast although it were only One of its Horns Whence 3. it will follow that the present Papacy is the Beast because that hath been in possession of the Government of Rome ever since the Christian Empire and so consequently no other Antichristian King is to be expected towards the End of the World nor any other City to be understood here but the present Papal Rome the Head of which the Pope is actually Crowned (a) Sir Paul Rycaut 's Preface to the Lives of the Popes with a Triple Crown after his Election and that with so many Solemnities that the Ceremony takes up a whole Day and he has also all the Ensigns of Temporal Soveraignty as a Court of Cardinals who in the Ceremoniale Romanum are called Princes in the Church Embassadours Guards and the like and is approached with more Reverence than the Emperours themselves which is so much taken notice of by the (a) Graseri Histor Antichrist p. 142. Buxtorf Lexic Talmud Jews and (a) Graseri Histor Antichrist p. 142. Buxtorf Lexic Talmud Infidels that the Pope is frequently called the King of the Franks i. e. the Christians by the Turks and the King of Edom by the Jews by which they mean Rome 12 And the ten 32 horns which thou sawest are or signify ten Kings or independent Soveraignities which have received no Kingdom or independency of and in the Empire as yet i. e. at the time of this Vision but receive Power as Kings i. e. an independent and Soveraign Power one hour 23 with the Beast i. e. at the same time that the Beast receives Power and in conjunction with him 32 These Kings receive Power with the Beast when he comes to be the Eighth King which coming not to pass until the Extinction of the Christian Emperours of Rome or the Western Caesars by these Kings can be meant no other then those amongst whom the Empire was divided upon the Conquests of the Northern Nations who are thought by Mr. (b) Pag. 463. 661. Author libri de Excid Antichrist Mede and other Learned Men to have been Ten at first although that Number seems rather to be retained upon the account of the Ten Toes of the Image in c Daniel to which the Ten Horns of the Beast do correspond to shew that this Beast is the last State of the Roman Empire in which the Image was to be broken in peices by the Stone the Emblem of Christ's Kingdom which is to smite it on its Feet and Ten Toes For the Endeavours of Learned
Men to reduce the several Divisions of the Roman Empire into Ten are not so successful as could be wisht Mr. Mede being forced to make the Greeks one of then and the Author of the Book de Excidio Antichristi confining them within the Rhine and the Danube So that I cannot but think upon further consideration that the True Account of this Division is with relation to the Image in Daniel the Book of the Revelations being nothing but a more full illustration by various Emblems of what is but briefly delivered in that Prophecy See the Annot. on Chap. 11 13. 12 3. 33 To wit at One Hour or Season made up of Two Half Hours beginning at A. D. 476. as hath been already fully discoursed on Chap. 8. 7. 13 These have 34 mind as to matters of Religion and shall give their power or Force and strength or Authority to the Beast to wit in Religious Matters and their Assistance and Arms on other occasions 34 Here is plainly foretold the strict Vnion there is betwixt the Papacy and the Popish Kings or Kingdoms and Governments and the Support Assistance and Authority they afford it which the Northern Nations were very Famous for at their first Settlement and Conversion 14 These shall make War with i. e. oppose and persecute the 35 Lamb i. e. Christ in his true Members and Faithful Witnesses Psalm 2 Acts 4.27 28. 9 4 and the Lamb shall overcome them by the high and powerful preaching of his Gospel Chap. 14 for he is the Lord of Lords and King of Kings and therefore able to vanquish them and erect his Kingdom Dan. Chap. 2. and 7. Psal 2. and they that are with him i. e his Followers when he comes to his Kingdom Chap. 14. 1. are called and chosen by his Grace to this Service and were his faithful Witnesses Servants and Soldiers unto Death 35 Hence it appears that these are Antichristian Kings or Powers there having been no Persecution in the Roman Empire by Pagan Powers since the Division of it by the Northern Nations 15 And he i. e. the Angel saith unto me i. e. instructed me in the further knowledge of the Mystery I had seen The Waters which thou sawest Verse 1. where the Whore sitteth are i. e. signifie 36 Peoples and Multitudes and Nations and Tongues i. e. the People of the Roman Empire Dan. 4.1 36 Here is shewn the Amplitude and vast Extent of the Jurisdiction of the Papacy a thing she so much boasts of 16 And the Ten Horns or Kings which thou sawest upon the Seventh Head of the Beast even these Kings shall at last hate the 37 Whore whom they had before loved and admired and shall make her desolate by forsaking her Communion and naked by stripping her of her Ornaments Verse 4. and Authority and by exposing her to shame Chap. 16. 15. and shall 38 eat her Flesh i. e. consume and devour her very Substance and Revenues Dan. 7.5 Psalm 27.2 and burn 39 her with fire i. e. destroy what is left of her 37 A Metaphor taken from the Vsage which Harlots often meet with from those who have been misled and abused by them who are wont at first to entertain a dislike of them then to hate them afterwards to take from them the Gifts they had bestowed on them and at last revenge themselves upon them by their utter Ruin From this Verse it may be observed 1. That no one of the Kingdoms or Principalities in Union with the Papacy shall be able to arrive to an Vniversal Monarchy but as all such Attempts have been hitherto vain so shall they still be so Because as they were at first Many Independent Soveraignties said to be Ten in allusion to the Ten Toes of the Image and Ten Horns of the Beast when they at first gave thei Power to the Beast Verse 13. So are they to remain so until they forsake her it being expresly here affirmed that the Ten Horns shall hate the Whore 2. That the Whore or Idolatrous Church of Rome shall fall by those very States and Kingdoms which had all along upheld her Which is to come to pass as is plainly asserted in the next Verse when the Words of God shall be fulfilled that is the Promises of God concerning the expiring of the Beast's Times shall be compleated according to what hath been already observed on Chap. 10. 6 7. When the Ten Kings which support the City and Church of Rome which sits on them withdrawing themselves from her the Tenth of that great City or the City and Jurisdiction consisting in the Account of Prophecy of Ten Principalities must needs fall too From whence also it plainly appears that the Fall of the Tenth part of the City mentioned Chap. 21. 23. refers to the Ten Kings deserting and forsaking her 38 A Phrase taken from Dan. 7.5 Psalm 27.2 signifying their taking away her very Substance Revenues and Dominions and converting what they had bestowed upon her to their own Use as Grotius interprets the place 39 A Phrase taken from Levit. 21.9 where it is commanded That the Daughter of a Priest guilty of Wheredom should be burnt with Fire 17 For God hath put in their willfully wicked hearts Rom. 1.26 2 Thes 2.10 to fullfil his Will and to agree Verse 13 and give their Kingdom and its power and strength unto the Beast by submitting unto him and being governed by him until the words of God by his Prophets and by his Apostle in this Vision Chap. 13. 5. shall be fullfilled i. e. until the Promises made by God concerning the Expiring of the Times of the Beast and the following Approach of Christ's Kingdom shall be fullfilled Dan. Chapters 2. and 7. and 12.7 See on Chap. 10.5 6.11 13. and Verse 16. of this Chapter num 37. 18 And the Woman which thou sawest is or signifies that remarkable great City which now 40 reigneth over the Kings of the Earth 40 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The Regnant Imperial City now actually having and exercising at this present time Soveraignty over the Kings of the Earth Which is a plain and evident Character that Rome is here meant no other City being in Exercise of such Power at the Time when the Apostle saw this Vision It may not be unuseful to add here in the Close of this Chapter this short Digression concerning Antichrist that the Reader might have in one View the chief of what concerns him in Scripture especially the more plain and Doctrinal parts of it In order to which it may be observed 1. That about Two Years after Ezekiel's (a) Ezek. 40 c. Dan. 2. Lightf Works Tom. 1. pag. 132 133. Vision of the Temple and Throne the Babylonian Monarchy began upon the Conquest of Aegypt by Nebuchadnezzar which was the only Kingdom that opposed him Which Vision contained a Type of Christ's Glorious Church and Kingdom which was then to have come into Succession in place of the Jewish Temple and City then in
Ashes as a City and Temple fit for God's Presence if the Idolatry and other sins of his People had not hindred him (a) Ezek. 43 1-12 from dwelling for ever in the midst of them Hereupon by the infinite Justice and Wisdom of God the first (b) Dan. Chap. 2. and 7. Monarchy began and a Course of Four successive Monarchies was to expire before the Glorious Kingdom of Christ should succeed Which Monarchies although as to their Greatness and Vniversality they bore some Resemblance of the Kingdom of Christ were yet indeed Antichristian as being contray to Christ's Kingdom in their Idolatry bloody and persecuting Temper and in respect of their usurping its place and stead in which Antichristianism consists which is an (c) See on Chapters 13 14 15. Abbot de Antichr pag. 26. Downham of Antichrist 1 4. 2 1. Moor's Mystery of Iniq. part 2. Opposition to and a Delay and Vndermine of Christ's Kingdom which it usurps and counterfeits For seeing that Christ hath a Glorious Kingdom belonging to him as come in the Flesh the supplanting of this Kingdom is the peculiar Character of Antichrist according to 1 Joh. 4.3 2. It is plain from (d) Dan. 4.33 35 41 42 43 44 45.7 8 11 12 20 21 24 25.8 9-12 11 36-45 12 7 11. Matth. 24.15 24. Mark 13. Luke 12 41-59.21 24.36 2 Thes 2. 1 Tim. 4 1-5 2 Peter 2.1 John 2.18 19 22.4 3.2 John 7. Scripture that in the Times of the Fourth of these Monarchies called the Times of the Gentiles by our Saviour Luke 21.24 there should arise besides the other many Antichrists One Grand Notorious one called 1 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or The Antichrist by way of Eminence 2. The Man of Sin or the sinful wicked One the chief Author and Servant of Sin and not of God whose Profession is nothing else but a Mystery of Iniquity 3. The Son of Perdition or the graceless hopeless Apostate like Judas called so John 17.12 the chief Author of Mischief and Destruction to Christ's Church and therefore fitted for and devoted by God to Destruction or Perdition 4. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or the (a) Grot. in 2 Thes 2.4 and 1 Pet. 5.8 Satanical and Apostate Adversary and Opposite to Christ's Kingdom 5. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or The Blasphemous and Insolent Vsurper upon the Authority of Christ and the Supreme Powers who are called Gods in Scripture 6. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or The Lawless One one who pretends to be above all Laws and violates all the Laws of God and Man By which Man of Sin is not meant a single person but a Succession (b) Poli Synops in loc See Downham of Antichr 2.2 of Men as Interpreters upon the place have observed from parallel places of Scripture who is also the (c) Mede 's Works pag. 763. same with Daniel's Wicked Horn or Beast as the Church saith Mr. Mede from her Infancy hath interpreted it 3. It is plainly asserted in (d) 2 Thes 2. 1 Tim. 4.2 Pet. 2.1 See Mr. Mede's Works B. 1. Disc 29 43. his apostasy of the latter times and Dr. Moor's Mystery of Iniquity which is also confessed by Ribera and those other Learned Romanists who assert that there shall be an apostasy of the Romish Church towards the end of the World See Alcazer in Apocalyps pag. 20. 466. ed. Ant◠Scripture that the Sin of this Man of Sin should in general consist in an Apostasy and that a great and solemn one which should overspread the Visible Face of the Catholick Church of Christ which is called by the Apostle Paul 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The Apostasy or the Grand Apostasy and that from the Faith or the Great Mystery of the Christian Religion described in the last Verse of the Third Chapter to Timothy which as Mr. Mede hath well observed should according to the Division of the Ancients be the first Verse of the Fourth Chapter 4. In particular this Grand Apostasy is limited in Scripture chiefly to these Three Heads 1. To Idolatry and Superstition Dan. 11 37-39 1 Tim. 4 1-4 2. To an Insolent and Blasphemous Usurpation of a God-like Supremacy in Opposition to the Supremacy of Christ and of the Civil Magistrate Dan. 7.8 11 20 25.8 9-14 23 24 25.11 36 37.2 Thes 2.4 3. To a bloody and persecuting Temper Dan. 7.21 25.8 10 24 25. 5 It is also (a) 1 Tim. 4.1 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 1 John 2.18 expresly plainly and not aenigmatically and mysteriously declared by the Holy Spirit that this Apostasy was to be in the latter Times By which are meant as Mr. (b) Apostas of the latter Times Chap. 21 c. Mede hath proved the latter Times of the Fourth or Roman Kingdom whose Times he thinks are called the last Times because it is the Last Kingdom in Daniel 6. Furthermore the particular Time or Season of the Coming Revelation or Appearance and Manifestation of this Man of Sin is expresly dated by the Apostle Paul from the Fall of the (c) Thes 2.6 7. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 a word which signifies to retain or hold fast and also to obstruct hold bà ck or hinder is elegantly put to denote the Pagan and Christian Roman Empire and Emperours the Sixth and Seventh Kings from their holding their own proper Successions firm during their own Times and thereby holding back or hindering the Succession of Antichrist but the Christian Empire and Emperours the Seventh King is most especially thereby intimated who held back or hindered more immediately the Succession of the Antichrist the Eighth King that he might be revealed in his own Season upon the Fall of Augustulus the last of the Roman Emperours See Chap. 8. 11 and this Chapter Grot. in 2 Thes 2.6 Ham. ibid. in Rom. 1.18 Abbot demonstr Antichr pag. 91. Patres ad unum ferè omnes hoc agnoscunt Roman Empire which the (d) See Bellarm. de Rom. Pontif. 3.5 Chamier de Antichr Mede's Works pag. 656. Ancients generally understand by the taking out of the way that which letteth or withholdeth 2 Thes 2.6 7. Upon which the Apostle says that the Man of Sin should be revealed 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 i. e. in his own Season as Dr. Hammond rightly translates the Word which is the same with that made use of in (a) Dan. 12.7 Rev. 12.14 Daniel and the (a) Dan. 12.7 Rev. 12.14 Revelations concerning the Months Times or Seasons of the Beast 7. The Apostle Paul in the same Chapter 2 Thes 2 6 7 8. expresly assigns a Line of Time to this Man of Sin dated from his Birth Coming Revelation or First Appearance at the taking away of the Roman Empire A. D. 475 or 476 and reaching unto the Coming of Christ Which may be called the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or Times of Antichrist to distinguish them from the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or Times of Christ mentioned 1 Tim. 6.15
it being remarkable that Antichrist Christ's Counterfeit and Opposite has also a Coming Times and a Kingdom assigned him in Scripture in Opposition to the Coming Times and Kingdom of Christ 8. The manner of the Destruction of this Man of Sin is described by the Apostle 2 Thes 2.8 in Terms so agreeable to those made use of in Dan. 7. and the (b) Chap. 17 8 11. 19. 21. Revelations with reference to the Little Horn the Beast and the False Prophet that it cannot well be denyed but that they are the same 9. The Apostle also further expresly declares that this Man of Sin which was not to be revealed or appear openly until the taking away of the Roman Empire was yet in his Conception in the Womb at the (a) Supposed most commonly to be written about A. D. 57 or 58. See above pag. 302. Time of his writing the second Epistle to the Thessalonians aptly expressed by (b) 2 Thes 2.7 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 it hath received its beginninng or is in preparation to enter and disclose it self to the World Hammond on the place and on Gal. 5.6 the then actual workings of the Mystery of Iniquity called so because of its Contrariety and Opposition to the Mystery of Godliness which it undermined by secret and mysterious Operations and Workings of Satan in Lying Wonders and strong Delusions by Hypocritical Pretences of promoting Christianity by departing from the Simplicity of the Gospel and Apostolical Traditions and taking pleasure in Unrighteousness for Interest 's sake as the Apostle plainly asserts 2 Thes 2.7 9 10 11 12 15. 1 Tim. 4.2 3. 2 Pet. 2.3 3. 10 It is evident from Scripture that Satan had great success in the early Times of Christianity in perverting and seduceing Men from the Purity Truth and Simplicity of the Gospel as appears from the Complaints of the Apostles and from the many Heresies and Antichrists then in being from whence the Apostle John concludes 1 Ep. 2.18 that it was then the last Time and that the Grand and Notorious Antichrist the Head of the Apostasy should take his Original from those many Heretical Autichrists which were then in being and that as hath been before observed in the latter Times of those last Times which seems plainly to be the sense of those words of the Apostle To which progress of the Mystery of Iniquity many things then contributed as hath been before observed on Chap. 2. 4. brought about by the Justice and Providence of God for the punishment of those who would willfully perish and would not receive the Love of the Truth that they might be saved 2 Thes 2 10.16 To which Particulars may be added the early Ambition of some who stretched themselves beyond their own Measure Line or Rule that is beyond the particular Districts to which the Apostles had confined the Exercise of their Power which was otherwise unlimited of whom the Apostle Paul complains 2. Cor. 10.12.18 who also seems to intimate (a) 1 Cor. 15 9-11 2 Cor. 11.5 Gal. 2 1-12 as if the People thought that James Peter and John had an Authority over him because of their Gifts Age and Conversation with Christ to which Opinion also the Apostles themselves might occasionally and by accident contribute who strove for Superiority whilst their Lord was with them and were not afterwards infallible save in what they did by the immediate assistance of the Holy Ghost as appears from what the Apostle Paul blames in the Conversation of Peter Gal. 2. So early so secret so plausible and so powerful might the Temptations and Occasions be to the introducing of the great Apostasy God (b) Nec periclitor dicere ipsas quoque Scripturas sic esse ex Dei voluntate dispositas ut Haereticis materias subministrarent cum legam Oportere Haereses esse quae sine Scripturis esse non poslunt Tertull. de Prescript cap. 39. in his Just Judgments sending strong Delusions and permitting all deceiveableness of Vnrighteousness to work upon them who willfully delude themselves and take pleasure in Vnrighteousness 2 Thes 2. 11. It is evident from History that the Workings of this Mystery of Iniquity were more visible in the following Ages to which many things contributed As 1. The (a) Euseb Hist. 4.22 Chamier de Antichr 16.8 where he largely shews how Antichristianism was promoted by Heresies Heresies which soon prevailed and corrupted the Church upon the Death of the Apostles 2. The Greek (b) Col. 2. It is confessed by Learned Romanists that several Pagan Customs were introduced especially in Constantine's Time to win the Gentiles Baron ad an 312. art 94. ad an 324. art 79. Gregor M. lib. 9. ep 71. Polyd. Virgil. Proaem ed 5. ultimos libros de rerum inventor Philosophy and Customs brought into the Church by the converted Heathens and many Jewish Customs and Notions taken from the (c) Confessed frequently by Grotius in his Notes on the New Testament and by Mr. Dodwell particularly Append. ad Praelect pag. 660-671 Essens whereby the (d) Ammian Marcellin lib. 2. sub fin Testes Verit. Spanhem summa Histor Eccles sparsim Gregor M. lib. 7. Epistolorum fatetur se in rebus Liturgicis ab Apostolorum consuetudine discessiste Simplicity of the Gospel was by degrees corrupted which was at first simple and plain in its Doctrine and Worship as Protestant Authors generally shew and as appears from several Popish Authors particularly Platina in the Lives of the Popes who shews in each Life what Customs each Pope introduced 3. An early (e) This is notorious and confest frequently by Dr. Ham. in his Defence of Episcopacy modelling of the Church according to the Form of the Civil Government in the Empire which was one chief occasion of the many Quarrels amongst the Bishops about their Sees and of their aspiring to a Worldly Dignity suitable to the places of their Residence from whence came Patriarchs into the Church which are confessed to be an Vsurpation by Bishop (f) Parker of the Govern of the Ch. pag. 289. Du Pin. de Antiq. Eccles Disc Parker and the Learned Sorbonist du Pin and other Ecclesiastical Subordinations confessed by Learned Dr. (a) Of the Pope's Supremacy pag. 191 in 4◠Barrow to be only Humane and Prudential Constitutions 4. The Strifes (b) Cypr. de Lapsis pag 123 124. Origen T. 1. pag. 71. 113. 142. 246. 441-444 ex edit Huet Euseb Eccles Hist 8. 1 2 13. Socrat. 7.11 sparsim Sozom. 7.7 28 29. Sulpit. Sever. sub fin Grot. in Matth. 20.28 Ambition and the too general Degeneracy of the Manners of the Clergy much complained of by Ancient Authors although God was pleased all along to raise up Great and Good Men who were Ornaments to the Church and witnessed against and opposed the overflowing Corruptions in Doctrine and Manners 5. The Encrease of (c) See Pufendorf 's history of the Popedom Rycaut 's Preface to the Lives of
the Popes Dr. Barrow of the Popes Supremacy pag. 240 c. The third general Council of Ephesus was afraid lest under pretence of Sacerdotal Power the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or Pride of Secular Dominion should be brought into the Church Parker ibid. p. 234. See Overal 's Convoc Book l. 3. 1-6 Ecclesiastical Authority which from the Power of binding and loosing inflicting of Censures distributing the Charity of the People and determining of Controversies in Civil Matters voluntarily referred to them according to the (d) 1 Cor. 6. Apostles Advice arrived at last from such small beginnings to the Antichristian Preheminence now visible in the Papacy 6. Excessive (e) Overal's Convocat Book B. 3. 1-6 Hieron in Vit. Malchi Postquam ad Christianos Principes Venit Ecclesia potentia quidem divitiis major sed virtutibus minor facta est I do not say that an Ecclesiastical Society may not lawfully for its support use Power Policy and Wealth in some measure to uphold or defend it self but that a Constitution needing such things is not Divine or that so far as it doth use them it is no more than humane Dr. Barrow of the Vnity of the Church pag. 33. 4◠Honours and Riches whereby the Minds of the Clergy were corrupted and drawn off from the care of Souls as (f) Epist 1. 5 7. Gregory the Great confesses ingenuously and the Church became too like a Worldly Kingdom especially when Kings and Emperours became over-lavish in their Liberality to purchase Pardons for their sins whereupon as the Learned Archbishop of Paris de (a) Heidegger Histor Papat chap. 3. Marca observes the Discipline of the Church was very much relaxed in recompence as it were for the large Endowments received from them 6. Early Forgeries of Books and Traditions confessed by Learned Romanists a too great Reverence for Antiquity and a Despair of knowing more than our Ancestors which our Learned (b) Antichrist Demonstrat pag. 15. Abbot makes to be one main cause of the Rise of Antichristianism 12. It is evident that The Papacy is The Antichrist because the several Properties and Characters given of him in Scripture do agree to the Papacy and to it alone For the full proof of which Proposition I refer the Reader to the (c) Abbot's Demonstrat Antichrist a book much valued by Joseph Scaliger who was not wont to be lavish of his commendations Downham of Antichrist Dr. Moor's Mystery of Iniquity Dr. Cressener's Demonst of the first Principles of the Protestant applicat of the Apocal. Jurieu's accomplishm of Prophecies Tom. 1. Chap. 24. Tom. 3. His Pastoral Letters But chiefly Dr. Beverley's command of God to his People to come out of Babylon where this great truth is most evidently demonstrated Books quoted in the Margent and shall only here give him a brief View of what may be most observable on this Head 1. The Doctrines and Practises laid to the Charge of Antichrist in Scripture the general Heads of which are reckoned up paragr 4. are plainly taught and practised in the Romish Church such as Idolatry Superstition Supremacy Persecution and the carrying on all this by Lying Wonders forbidding Marriage and abstaining from Meats and that after so subtle a manner under a disguise of Piety as that Good and Learned Men have been deceived by it Whence it plainly appears to be a Mystery of Iniquity and The Apostasy foretold and described in Scripture as Mr. (a) Apostasy of the latter Times Mede and Dr. (b) Mystery of Iniq. Moor have fully proved 2. The Seven-hill'd City the place of the Residence of Antichrist can agree to none but Rome the Seat of the Papacy for whose Residence in it the Emperours made way by removing from it by degrees as hath been observed on Chap. 13. 2. and the Name Number Image and Mark of the Beast the excessive Riches and gawdy Pomp of the Woman are sufficiently Visible and Notorious in the Romish Church as hath been also before observed on the 13th and 17th Chapters 3. The Insolent (c) See on Chapter 13. Boastings unmeasurable Ambition mad Zeal and Devilish Cunning the Tyrannical Vsurpati ons of the Papacy over Emperours and Civil Powers and the universal spreading of that Mystery of Iniquity do sufficiently shew that it was plainly described by the Little Horn and the King that should do after his Will in (d) Chap. 7. and 11. See Mr. Mede's Works p. 667 c. Graser Histor Antichr p. 149 c. Daniel and by the Beast and the Whore in the Revelations whom the World followed and wondred after 4. The Worldly (e) Rycaut's Preface to the Lives of the Popes Dr. Barrow of the Vnity of the Church p. 33. 34. c. in 410. Pomp Temporal Dominion Court Guards Titles Style and Coronation of the Pope plainly shew that he is a Horn and a King according to Prophecy and the Rise of the Papacy upon the Fall of the Roman (a) See on Chap. 13. and 17. Emperours is a sufficient Proof that the Popes are that Man of Sin who was to be witheld until that Time and that they are the seventh Head and Eighth King 5. It is plain from History that the Converts from Heathenism and the Barbaroas Nations Paganized the Western Parts of Christendom and became the Chief Support of the Papacy And how agreeable is that to Prophecy which places the Entrance of the (b) See on Chap. 11. Chap. 13. Gentiles into the Court of the Temple before the Succession and Rise of the Beast thereby intimating that they were prepared before hand as Subjects for this King of Pride 6. How aptly are the Eastern and Western Divisions of the Empire called the Two Horns of the Beast And is it not accordingly notorious from History that the Grandeur (c) Rex Superbiae prope est quod dici nefas est Sacerdotum ei praeparatur exercitus Greg. M. lib. 4. ep 38. of the Papacy and the Idolatry of it was made way for by the Ambition and Corruptions of the Clergy of both those Divisions by the Constantinopolitan as well as Roman Bishops who were the (d) Gregor M. Epistolae Abbot demon Antichrist Constantinopolitanus Episcopus Antichristi Praecursor Forerunners of Antichrist and in whose Dominions also Image Worship was decreed by the Second Council of Nice whereupon they fell under the severe Effects of the Saracenick and Turkish Woes described Chap. 9. And hath not that Clergy ever (e) Medes Apostasy of the latter times part 2. since been the Chief Instruments of promoting and keeping up that deceivableness of Vnrighteousness as the Apostle calls it 2 Thes 2. And may they not therefore be well meant by the False Prophet in this Prophecy 7. How observable is it from (a) Mede's Works p. 463. 661. History that the Empire was divided when the Papacy rose and that upon those Divisions and that Three Horns or Powers viz. the Exarchate the
Candle shall shine no more at all in thee i. e. thou shalt be perpetual Darkness and Desolation without the least comfort Jer. 25.10 and the Voice of the Bridegroom and of the Bride shall be heard no more at all in thee i. e thy Polity and Society shall be no more propagated but shall utterly cease together with all the Joy of thy former Solemnities and Festivities Jerem. 7 34.16 9. and all this shall come upon thee for or because thy Merchants who proselyrted Souls to their destruction and made Gain of Godliness were the great 21 men of the Earth i. e. were Lordly Worldly Ambitious and Sensual and also because or for by thy Sorceries i. e. Idolatry and Superstition were all Nations deceived 21 See on Chap. 6.15 It is an Expression taken from Isa 23.8 where it relates to the Merchants of Tyre a Crowning or Imperial City and a Type of the Antichristian City whose Worldly and Ambitious Clergy are here signified 24 And in her was also found the guilt of the blood of Prophets or Witnesses and of Saints or Holy Persons and of all 22 that were slain upon the Earth i. e. she was found guilty of Persecution and Bloodshed as well as Idolatry and all which had been shed during the Times of Christianity was laid to her charge because she was the Off-spring of Persecuting Parents had approved her Fore-fathers wicked Deeds and had filled up the measure of their iniquities Jerem. 2.34 Matth 23.29 39. 22 This is to be understood in the sense our Saviour uses the like Expression concerning Jerusalem upon whom he charges all the Blood that had been spilt from Abel Matth. 23 29-39 See also Zech. 5 5-11 where the Land of Shinar or Babylon is represented as having the House and Basis or Foundation of all Wickedness in it as if she had been guilty of all manner of sins and all sinners were to be punished in the Lake of her Burnings See Note 19. CHAP. XIX The Text. 1 AND after 1 these things i.e. the things seen in the precedent Chapter I heard a great Voice of much people in Heaven i. e. of the innumerable Company which stands before the Throne and before the Lamb Chap. 7.9 saying 2 Alleluja i. e. Praise ye the Lord Salvation from all evils especially those suffered under Antichristianity and Glory and Honour and Power be ascribed unto the Lord our God and to him alone for he is the sole Author of all good Annotations on CHAP. XIX 1 From the First to the Tenth Verse there is a Vision of a Triumphant and Joyful Appearance in Heaven for the Judgment upon the great Whore described in the Two preceeding Chapters and for the Marriage of the Lamb and the near Approach of his Glorious Kingdom 2 This Word is first used Psalm 104.35 to express the Psalmist's Joy upon the prospect of the Accomplishment of his Prediction or Desire that sinners might be consumed out of the Earth And it is here also made use of accordingly upon the Judgment executed upon Antichrist God's Chief Enemy and upon a prospect of the Old Earth's being utterly consumed together with the wicked people of it and a New Earth's succeeding in its place 2 For true and righteous are his Judgements and therefore is he to be praised for he hath judged and punished the great whore or the Idolatrous City and Church which did corrupt and destroy Jerem. 51.25 the Earth with her Fornication or Idolatry and hath avenged the Blood of her servants at her hand i. e. hath rewarded her abundantly according to her demerits for shedding the blood of his Faithful Witnesses and Servants chap 18. 20. 3 And again or the second time they said Alleluja to testifie their Joy upon the sight of the smoke the sign and token of her everlasting burnings And her smoke rose up or was then in its ascent and that for ever and ever i.e. she was punnished with an everlasting Destruction 4 And the four and twenty Elders 3 and the Beasts i e. the representatives of the Jewish and Christian Church chap. 4. fell down and worshipped God that sat on the Throne saying Amen Allelujah i. e. there was a very great appearance and manifestation of Christ's glorious Kingdom and the justice of God's Judgments was acknowledged with Praise and Thanksgiving 3 The Elders of the Church of Israel are placed first in this Appearance of the Divine Confessus or Sanhedrim from whence it may be concluded that this was a Vision of the New Jerusalem-State in which the Israelites as the First Born are to have the Preheminence who according to all Prophecy and Rom. 11. are to be converted and restored to their own Land as hath been before observed And perhaps for this Reason also is the Hebrew word Allelujah here retained 5 And a voice 4 came out of the midst of the Throne from Christ See chap. 5 6. 7 17. saying by way of holy Excitement and Encouragement praise our God my God as well as yours John 20.17 Rev. 3.12 all ye his Servants and ye that fear and worship him both small and great i. e. of whatsoever Nation Quality and Condition ye are for God is no respecter of Persons Psalm 115.11 13. Acts 2 5.10 34 35. Gal. 3.28 4 This Voice seemes to be an Heavenly Excitement to all the Saints upon Earth Gentiles and Jews small and great of all Nations now converted to joyn with the Heavenly Assembly in rendring Praises to God 6 And immediately upon this efficacious Exhortation from out of the Throne I heard as it were the voice of a great multitude and as the voice of many waters and as the voice of mighty Thundrings i. e. there was a mighty appearance of Christ's Kingdom and powerful Communications from the Heavenly Throne to all his Servants upon Earth that fear'd him and Heaven and Earth joyned in praises saying Alleluja for the Lord 5 God Omnipotent now reigneth and that Gloriously Isa 4.23 5 These Words are taken from Isaiah 24 21-23 where it is prophesied That the Lord God of Hosts or the Lord God Omnipotent should Reign in Mount Zion and in Jerusalem and before his Ancients or Elders of the Christian Church and that Gloriously after he had punished and shut up in Prison the Kings of the Earth Which is a clear Proof that the Reign of God here mentioned has a Respect to the Reign and Kingdom of Christ after the punishment of the wicked Kings and Nations of the Earth Chap. 20. 7 Let us be glad and rejoyce exceedingly and give honour or praise Luke 17.18 to him alone For the Marriage 6 of the Lamb Christ with his Church 2. Cor. 11.2 Eph. 5.32 is now actually come in and by the coming of his Kingdom Psalm 45. Matt. 22 11.25 1-13 Luke 12.36 and his Wife hath made her self ready i. e. the new Jerusalem state is now coming down from God out of Heaven Rev. 21.2 6 Christ is represented frequently (a)
in the broken and abrupt form of speech here made use of by the Angel 15 Here is declared that Angels and Men are Fellow-Creatures and shall be Fellow-Servants in the New Jerusalem-State the World to come which shall not be subject to Angels and in which there shall be an Equality betwixt them and Saints the Members of it and that they shall joyn together in the Worship of Christ Luke 20.36 Heb. 1 6.2 5. * That is Jesus the Word of God who is God and One with the Father and is accordingly worshipped in this Prophecy Chap. 5. and. 22.3 and in other places 16 16 Here the Angel delivers a most excellent Axiom wherein we are taught 1. That the principal thing to be attended to in Prophecy is Whether it be the Testimony of Christ or no That is whether it be delivered in Scripture which principal Character is here called The Spirit of Prophecy that is the Life and Soul of it which animates it and gives it its true Value and Esteem in the Sense that Spirit is often opposed to Letter and Flesh in Scripture 2 Cor. 3.6 2 That the Sense of Prophetical Scriptures given from a compare of Scripture with Scripture is when it evidently appears to be so of equal Credibility with the Prophecy it self because it is the Spirit of the Letter of it 3. That Interpreters of prophetical Scriptures when their Interpretations are confirmed are worthy of a Prophet's Reward because they have the Spirit of prophecy Matth. 10.41 11 And I saw Heaven 18 opened for a glorious appearance of Christ and behold a white Horse the Emblem of Christ's Royalty and Glory from his Resurrection to his second coming in his Kingdom chap. 6. 2. and he that sate upon him i. e. Christ was called faithful 18 and true to his Promises and his Friends and in Righteousness i. e. Truth and Peace he doth Judg 19 his People Psal 96.10 13. Is 11 1-9.32 16. and make 19 War with his Enemies Is 11.4 17 To shew that the Heavens shall open when the King of Glory appears Psalm 24 7-10 Matth. 24.30 And this Appearance which is the second Vision in this Chapter is that of Christ's coming in his Kingdom to Judgment and is the same with that Chap. 14.14 as will plainly appear to any who considers the Circumstances and Description of both 18 He is said to be Faithful and True because of his appearing in his Kingdom according to his promise which Atheists Antiscripturists and those of the Antichristian Party had called in question still asking with those Scoffers 2 Pet. 3. where is the promise of his coming 19 19 Hence it appears that the great Battle of Armageddon is by way of Judgment wherein the Enemies of Christ and of his Kingdom are represented as (a) Ezek. 32.27 and Chap. 38. Rev. 20. Warriors in Arms who when conquered were wont as Captives of War to be judged by and receive Sentence from the Conquerour as appears from Jerem. 52.9 12 His Eyes were as a flame of 20 Fire penetrating and judging of all things after a quick and terrible manner chap. 1.14 2 18. and on his head were many 21 Crowns to denote the amplitude of his Dominions his many Conquests and the several Exercises of his Regal Office especially now in his glorious Monarchy and Kingdom Psal 72 8-20 Rev. 14.14 and he had a Name 22 written that no man knew but he himself i. e. his Essence and Nature as God Incarnate and his Will Counsels Judgments and Rewards c uld not be fully known nor comprehended by any Creature and not at all after a saving manner but by them to whom he should reveal them Judg. 13.18 Job 11.7 8. Psalm 36.6 Matth. 11.27 Rom. 11.33 34. 1 Cor. 2 6.-16 1 John 3.2 20 Christ is to be revealed in flaming (a) Thes 1 8.2 8. fire when he comes to Judgment in his Kingdom and therefore his Eyes are represented as a flame of fire to signifie his Discerning Judgment and All-seeing Wisdom which he will then most peculiarly manifest 21 Christ had a Kingdom from his very Resurrection and has had all along many Conquests over his Enemies in the Administration of it and is therefore very fitly represented with many Crowns as David a Type of Christ put on his Head the Crowns of the several Kings conquered by him 2 Sam. 12.30 1 Chron. 20.2 See also 1 Maccab. 11.13 He has also many Crowns because of his Kingdom as the Eternal Word and as Mediator which he hath administred under the Father ever since his Resurrection represented by the first Seal and as he now enters upon the Administration of his Glorious Kingdom as he is also King of Kings and Lord of Lords he hath all the Crowns of the Kingdoms of the Earth belonging unto him and now as it were put upon his Head 22 His Name Emmanuel God made Flesh or God in our Nature seems to be here more particularly understood as being peculiar to him as distinct from the Father and the Spirit Judg. 13.18 Isa 9.6 Prov. 30.4 13 And he was cloathed with a vesture dipt in the Blood of his Enemies Psal 68.23 Is 63 1-6 and his Name is called or he is the Word 23 of God John 1.1 23 That is the Eternal Word of God by whom God spake when he made the World and spake also to our Fore-fathers under the Old Testament and unto us in the Gospel And he may also be called The Word because in him the whole Word of God Prophecies and Promises are Yea and Amen that is constant and not changeable punctually fullfilled unalterably confirmed and ratified 2 Cor. 1.19 20. See Grot. on Joh. 1.1 Bishop Pearson on the second Article of the Creed and Dr. Bull 's Defensio Fidei Nicaenae 14 And the Armies which were in Heaven i. e. Christ's mighty Angels and the Saints which shall accompany them when he comes to Judgment in his Kingdom Dan. 4 35. Zech. 14.5 Matth. 22.7 1 Thes 4.14 1 Cor. 15. Phil. 3.29 2 Thes 1.7 Jude 14.15 See the Notes on Rev. 14 14 15. and chap. 20. and on verse 11. of this Chapter followed him upon white 24 Horses as Companions and Partakers with Christ in his Glory and his Kingdom cloathed in fine 25 Linen white and clean i. e. they were Justified and Sanctified by the Righteousness and Holyness of Christ imputed unto them See on verse 8. 24 This Battle is a Judgment as appears from Verse 15. So that these Armies of Heaven must be the Angels and the Saints who shall come with Christ in Judgment to his Kingdom with glorified Bodies as the Scriptures quoted in the Paraphrase do plainly declare and they are represented as on White Horses to shew the Glory they shall appear in and their joynt Rule and Reign with Christ it being the custom for Kings Favorites Nobles and Rulers to be clad in White Garments and ride on White Beasts as hath been already observed on Rev.
manner and restrained from all sorts of Mischief but because he was to be let loose after the thousand years therefore he is said to be only shut up in the bottomless pit and is not cast into the Lake until afterwards when he is made utterly uncapable of any manner of power or Action against God and his Kingdom for the least season and that to all Eternity And here end the first Triumphs and Conquests of Christ in his Kingdom which begins with the reducing of his Enemies viz. Antichrist the Wicked Nations and the Devil so as to make them his Footstool whom his Father had been subduing for him from his Ascension as is evident from Psalm 110.1 1 Cor. 15.25 5 The duration of this Season is no where determined in Scripture and therefore cannot be positively assigned only if the Tradition of the seven Thousand Years duration of the World prove true it must comprehend that space of Time which will be found wanting to compleat the 7000 Years after the Expiration of the 1000 Years of Christ's Kingdom 4 And I saw 6 Thrones i. e. solemn and glorious preâ—arations for Rule and Judgment Dan. 7.9 and 7 they i. e. the Saints of the most High who come with Christ Chap. 19.14 Dan. 7.13 18 21 22 26 27. Zech. 14.5 1 Thes 4.14 sat 8 upon them i. e. were invested in a Regal and a Judicial Office and 9 Judgment i. e. Power of Governing Sentencing and Punishing was given unto them who sat on the Throne by God and Christ Dan. 7.22 27. and I saw the separate 10 souls of them or of the Persons that we e beheaded for the Witness of Jesus and for the Word of God i. e. the Souls of the Martyrs under the Pagan Emperour of Rome Rev 6.9 10 11. and 11 I saw also the 12 Souls of them which had not worshipped the Beast neither his Image neither had received his Mark upon their foreheads or in their hands i. e. the Faithful Witnesses killed by Antichrist Chap. 6 11. 11 7. 13 15 16. and they i. e. all these Saints and Martyrs 13 lived again in Spiritual and Heavenly Bodies 1 Cor. 15 42-50 and 14 reigned with 15 Chr st a 16 thousand Years 6 This Representation is taken from Dan. 7.9 in allusion to the (a) Mede's Works p. 762. Grot. in Matth. 19.28 Thrones or Seats of the Jewish Consistory or rather in the Opinion of (a) Mede's Works p. 762. Grot. in Matth. 19.28 Grotius to the ancient Custom of the Jews amongst whom the Princes of the Tribes were wont to sit with the King ih publick Assemblies And accordingly This Court of Christ's Kingdom and Grand Assizes of the Day of Judgment is represented as having many Thrones as 1. The Throne of God the Father Dan. 7.9 2. The Throne of Christ in which he was enstated Dan. 7.13 14 upon the Judgment passed upon Antâ—ehrist to shew that Christ's Glorious Kingdom begins not until after that Judgment and Destruction as in this Prophecy the Thousand Years do not enter until after the Battle of Decision which is also called a Judgment Chap. 19. 3. Many Thrones of Saints Dan. 7.10 18 22 26. where the Saints are called The Judgment and are said to he set in Judgment and many Thrones to be set down pitched or erected as the Word ought to be translated at the 9th Verse which Thrones do not belong to the Angels who are not represented as sitting but standing as Ministring and Assisting Spirits 1 Kings 22.19 Is 6.1 Dan. 7.10 7 By a diligent compare of Dan. 7.13 18 c. with Rev. 19.14 17. and this Verse it will plainly appear that the Saints those Armies of Heaven who come with Christ in the Clouds to Judgment are the They here referred to the very They Dan. 7.13 where the like Phrase is used who come with the Son of Man upon the Clouds of Heaven to whom Thrones a Kingdom and a Judicatory are ascribed in (a) Matth. 19.28 Luke 22.30 1 Cor. 6 1-4 Scripture over the Wicked Angels and the World and who have here Thrones given them as a Reward for their Attendance upon Christ in the foregoing Battle to whom alone yet the Victory is ascribed Chap. 19.21 8 To sit upon a Throne denotes in Scripture a continuance in an undisturbed possession of Soveraignty and Dominion with a Right of Judicature as Expositors of the Creed have shewn on the Article concerning Christ's sitting on the Right Hand of the Father 9 This Word signifies Rule and Government in Scripture as well as a Judicial Power Gen. 15 14.19 9.1 Sam. 4.18 Psalm 72.1 2. 10 From this place it may be observed 1. That these were the Souls of the very Martyrs whom he had seen before under the Altar Chap. 6 9-11 the same Expressions being used in both places 2. That they were particularly the Martyrs under the pagan Roman Emperours because they are said to have been beheaded which was a (b) Grot. in locum Roman Punishment 3. That the Soul is Immortal and sleeps not in its separate State because they cry with a loud Voice have Robes given unto them and are admonished to rest for a little season 6 9-11 11 These are distinguished from the former by the interposition of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or And and are evidently as appears from comparing this place with Rev. 6.11 the Witnesses martyred under the Reign of the Beast or Antichrist who were to fill up or compleat the Number of Martyrs and then to Live and Reign together with the Martyrs under the Pagan Emperours 12 Pareus supposes an Ellipsis in this place which may be thus supplied 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. although separate Souls are often spoken of in Scripture in the Masculine Gender Luke 16 19-31 13 They lived that is in their Persons in Bodies suited to the State of the Blessed Milennium for this cannot refer to the Souls here-mentioned which lived before as hath been already observed See also the Notes on the following Verse 14 This as well as almost all the other Expressions in the New Testament concerning the Great Day of Judgment is taken chiefly from Daniel who in the second and seventh Chapters of his Prophecy foretells that during the Times of the Fourth Kingdom evidently proved by several (a) Mede 's Works pag. 711. Dr. Moor'â— Sâ—â—ps Proph 2.13 Dr Gressener s Demonstr B. 2. 6-8 and the Append. Authors to be the Roman the God of Heaven should set up a Kingdom which from small beginnings or an Infant-State likned by Daniel to a (a) Mr. Mede 713 743 c. Stone should by a Divine and Supernatural Power increase so far that at last in the Days of the Ten Kings who are the Ten Toes of the Feet of the Great Image Dan. 2.43 44. it should become a Mountain filling the whole Earth that is a Vniversal and an Everlasting Kingdom after it had put an end to all other Kingdoms particularly that
of Antichrist upon whose destruction this Glorious Kingdom or Glorious State of Christs Kingdom is to begin And that there shall be a glorious state of Christs Church such as hath not hitherto been is a Truth so apparent in Scripture that those (b) Pocock on Micah pag. 24 29 32 42. who are most wary of interpreting the Scriptures to this Sense lest thereby any advantage might be given to the Jews cannot but confess that many Passages of the Prophets which relate to this State are not as yet clearly nor fully compleated but that they are still in fulfilling and more may be expected in the latter times which Dr. Pocock extends to the second Coming of Christ. And although we ought to be cautious how we administer occasion of hardening the Jews in their Infidelity by forcing Texts of Scripture to this Sense which may be meant concerning the first Coming of Christ yet the want of due distinguishing betwixt his first Coming in a way of Humiliation and Sufferings and his second Coming in Glory and that to erect a Kingdom upon Earth and under the Heaven as is expresly affirmed Dan. 7.27 Rev. 5.10 in a State of perfect Righteousness Peace and Prosperity has been no mean cause of Offence to the Jews and is the occasion of many Errors amongst Christians But that there shall be such a Kingdom of Christ which may be called his Mediatory Kingdom distinct from the Kingdom of Eternity of which the Man Christ Jesus is the Eternal King as he is united to the Eternal Word and from his Spiritual and Evangelical Kingdom will appear evident from these following Considerations 1. Because the many (a) Psalm 2.8 Isa 2 2-4 Micah 4.1 Mr. Mede Disc 25. 29. 36. Prophecies foretelling a Glorious Constant and uninterrupted Visibility and Vniversality of Christ's Church not yet accomplished do require such a Future State For the Church hath been seldom gloriously visible never constantly and uninterruptedly so neither hath it been at any time in possession of much above the sixth part of the known World so far hath it fallen short of the Vniversality prophesied of in Scripture 2. Many (b) Isa 11 6-9.65.17-25 Ezek. 48.35 Micah 4.3 Justin Mart. Dial cum Tryphon Dr. Burnet's Theor 4.5 7. Jurieu's accomplishm of prophec Tom. 2. Chap. 18 24. Grot. de Verit. Relig. Christ 5.18 Quaedam vero etiam definite sine conditione promissa si impleta nondum sunt adhuc possunt expectari Constat enim etiam apud Judaeos Tempus sive Regnum Messiae durare ad finem seculorum Prophecies relating to the Temporal and Spiritual Happiness of Christs Church are not yet at all fulfilled or only in part and therefore there must be some Future State in which they are to be accomplished Such as those which foretel its perfect peace prosperity holiness and the divine presence resting and remaining in it which can by no Art be so interpreted as to make out that they are already fulfilled 3. Many of the (c) Jurieu T. 3. Ch. 19. Types of the Old Testament prefigure and signifie such a State of Christ's Church and Kingdom such as Paradice the New World after the Flood the coming of the Israelites into Canaan out of Aegypt the Type of the Antichristian Apostasy their Return from their Captivity in Babylon into a peaceable possession of their Land the Kingdom of (a) 2 Sam. 7 8-29 and 23 3-8 See the Notes on Chap. 14.1 David in which he was established upon his Conquest over the Heathens and not until after many Troubles and Distresses wherein it was an Eminent Type of Christ's Kingdom as it proceeded from weak small and troublesome beginnings to strength and a lasting Peace after great Victories over the Sons of Belial and the Heathen Nations This Kingdom is also Typified by (b) Psalm 72. Solomon's Kingdom and his Marriage in the Book of Canticles and most eminently by the (c) See on Chap. 1.4 and what follows in the next Note Sabbatism or Rest of God in the seventh day after six for finishing his Works wherein the seventh Thousand Year designed for Christ's Kingdom is evidently prefigured for Christ's Kingdom being the main design of God to be accomplished in order to his Eternal Kingdom and the chief means conducing to it was the primary thing in his intention from the beginning and was not only foretold by all the Prophets but was prefigured by the (d) Ezek. Chap. 40 c. Heb. 8 5.9 9 10.10 1. Types which shall be perfectly and fully compleated in that State 4. (e) Dan. Chapters 2 and 7. 2 Thes 2.8 Burnet 's Theory B. 4. 8. Antichrist is not yet destroyed neither are the (f) Isa 11. and 14.1 2.25 8.56 8. Chap. 60.65 17-25 Ezek. 28 24-26.36 25-38 37 15-28 Hos 3.4 5. and Dr. Pocock on the place pag. 162. Zech. 9 9-17 10 5-12 and Chapters 12 13 14. Amos 9 11-15 Mic. 2.12 13. Rom. 11.2 Cor. 3.16 Grot. in Luc. 21.24 Mr. Mede Ep. 17. and pag. 891 Mons Jurieu's accomplishm of prophec Tom. 2 Chap. 17. Jews called nor is the (f) Isa 11. and 14.1 2.25 8.56 8. Chap. 60.65 17-25 Ezek. 28 24-26.36 25-38 37 15-28 Hos 3.4 5. and Dr. Pocock on the place pag. 162. Zech. 9 9-17 10 5-12 and Chapters 12 13 14. Amos 9 11-15 Mic. 2.12 13. Rom. 11.2 Cor. 3.16 Grot. in Luc. 21.24 Mr. Mede Ep. 17. and pag. 891 Mons Jurieu's accomplishm of prophec Tom. 2 Chap. 17. fullness of the Gentiles as yet come in nor are (a) Psalm 110.1 Cor. 15 24-29 Heb. 2 5-9 all things as yet subdued unto Christ all which yet according to plain Scripture are to come to pass some of them before Christ's Kingdom others before it be delivered up to the Father whence it is evident that this Kingdom is not yet come much less already past as some imagine 5. Christ is not yet come in his Glory and therefore his Kingdom is not yet come For the (b) Compare Isa 53. and 63. with many other places of Scripture For there are twenty Texts which speak of his Second Coming to Glory for one which speaks of his First Coming See Mons Jurieu and Dr. Burnet's Theory Scriptures evidently distinguish betwixt Two Comings of Christ the one in a State of Humiliation already past the other in a State of Glory and most commonly (c) Matth. 16 28.25.31 Luke 19 13 15.23 42. 2 Tim. 4.1 joyn his Second Coming and his Kingdom together 6. The Scriptures joyn the Resurrection and the Coming and Kingdom of Christ together Whence it is evident that this Kingdom is not come because the general Resurrection is not past For thus 1 Cor. 15.23 24. Christ's coming plainly refers to his coming to the Kingdom at the General Resurrection he having all the while from his Ascension sat at the Right Hand of the Father in the patient Expectation of this his Glorious Kingdom Psalm 110.1 Heb.
10.12 Rev. 1.9 7. There must be such a State in which all things even the inanimate parts of the Creation are to be restored to their pure primitive State that Christ's Redemption might be perfect and compleat For Christ died and made an Attonement and Reconciliation by his Blood that he might carry on the great work of Redemption through the several Ages of the World to its full perfection Now that (a) Rom. 8 19-24 1 Cor. 23 21 22. Redemption consisting in restoring whatsoever the First Adam lost there must be a Restitution of the whole Creation to its first State or else Christ's Redemption will not be perfect But of this more hereafter 8. If the General Resurrection and the Kingdom of Christ are the same then the Arguments from the Justice and Wisdom of God and all the other general Topicks which are commonly brought for the proof of the former will conclude as strongly for the latter to which may be added that it is agreeable to the Wisdom Justice and Goodness of God that he should reserve some Age of the World for his own entire Reign in Righteousness who had permitted the Devil and Antichrist to domineer in so many Ages of it and that his Son should be visibly glorified in the sight of that very Earth where he had been humbled even to the Death of the Cross and the last Act or Period of the Oeconomy of his Exaltation should be accompanied with the greatest Glory and Majesty as the last Act of his Humiliation was attended with the greatest Misery and Reproach and that his Saints who had undergone a long state of Misery and Persecution should inherit (a) Rom. 8 19-24 1 Cor. 23 21 22. the Earth in prosperity according to the promises of God and the Wicked should suffer in a Visible State of Shame and Ignominy and that for some long space of time and not only for a single Day of Judgment that Men might be deterred from sinning here by the length of the punishment and (b) Burnet's Theor. 4.5 by the dishonour of it which shall be notorious to the whole Creation whereas the Eternal State of the Damned is an hidden State besides which according to the general current of Scripture there must be a Visible Appearance of the Wicked and the Good at the general Retribution when God will display to the whole World the Reasons and Grounds of his procedures and the whole Scene and Contexture of his Providence that his Wisdom Justice and Goodness towards his Creatures might be seen acknowledged and admired by all of them to which the continuance of Mankind under a Visible State for some considerable time according to their Demerits in the Reverse of what they enjoyed here will very much contribute Psalm 73. Isa 65.13 25. Dan. 12.1 2. Phil. 2 9-11 9. It is agreeable (a) See Dr. Home 's Resurrection revealed lib 3. 5. to the wonted procedures of Almighty God that there should be a state of prosperity to his Church upon Earth For he hath generally in all Ages punished on Earth feirce Tyrants and Persecutors of his Church and given to it a general Rest after long and tedious Troubles Afflictions and Persecutions and that most commonly in the Churches Extremity whiCh is God's Opportunity and accordingly we may justly expect such a State upon the Destruction of Antichrist and that his Fall is not far off because the two special Witness-Churches of France and Savoy have been reduced to the utmost Extremity 10. The Oeconomy Dispensation or Fatherly Administration af this Kingdom which is God's Houshold is placed by the Apostle Ephes 1.10 in the Fullness of Times that is of All Time which not being as yet expired we may thence conclude that this Kingdom is not yet come For from the Consideration of Mark 1.15 Gal. 4.4 Ephes 1.10 and Isaiah 2.2 it seems there were as if a Line of Time in Scripture commencing from Christ's First Coming called the Fullness of Time and ending in his second Coming called the Fullness of Times or of all such Times 11. The Monarchick (a) See Dr. Beverley's Kingdom of Jesus Christ entring its Succession and Dan. 2 and 7. Image in Daniel is not yet broken to peices but continues in its Feet and Ten Toes under the Papacy and its Ten Kings and therefore the Kingdom of Christ is not yet come which is to destroy it VVhich Kingdom also as it is there described cannot be Christ's Evangelical Kingdom because that destroyed not Kingdoms but converted them nor his Kingdom of Eternity because according to Prophecy this Kingdom is to be under the Heaven and to fill the whole Earth Dan. 2. 12. Very many Texts of Scripture cannot possibly be explained at least in their Fullest and most compleat Sense and Latitude without supposing some such State For even the first and great Prophecy Gen. 3.15 concerning the bruising of the Serpents Head is not yet fully compleated nor will be until Christ's Second Coming when Sin and Death shall be utterly abolished 1 Cor. 15. Japhet's Tents according to Noah's Prophecy Gen. 9.27 have not been yet enlarged through the whole Extent of the Northern parts of the World neither hath God yet perswaded Japheth and Shem Gentile and Jew to live together in the same Tents or Church The Promises to (b) Dr. Homes Resurrect revealed B. 3. 2. Abraham as they are explained by the Apostles of such a Numerous Race as shall possess almost the whole VVorld are not fulfilled in their utmost Latitude as neither (a) Dr. Homes Resurrect revealed B. 3.2 some of Jacob's Prophecies to befal his Posterity in the last Days Gen. 49. particularly that Remarkable one Verse 10. for the universal and compleat gathering of the people both Jews and Gentiles into one Body is not as yet come to pass And who can say that the (b) Nâ—mb 24.17 Deut. 30 3 4 5.32 36 43. Psalm 2 8.22 27-31 45.47 7 8 9.49 14.67.68 22-35 72.86 9.110.149 Very many places in the Prophets already quoted The places in the New Testament which speak concerning Christ's Kingdom and the World to come of the Messias and Luke 19.11 12.23 42. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in thy Kingdom Acts 3 19-26 1 Cor. 15.24 c. Eph. 1.21 Heb 3 5-9 2 Peter 3.13 Revel 11.15 See a Treatise written by Alstecius entituled The Beloved City or the Saints Reign Mr. Archer of the Personal Reign of Christ Dr. Homes 's Resurrection Revealed Dr. Burnet 's Theory B. 4. Dr. Beverley against Mr. Baxter Monsieur Jurieu and Mr. Claude Oevres Posthâ—m Tom. 3. Le Ciâ—quieme Empire Prophecies contained in the places quoted in the Margent are as yet compleatly fullfilled or that the First (c) See Dr. Beverley on the Lords Prayer Mede Ep. 52. Petitions of the Lords Prayer can be well understood without the supposal of such a Kingdom 13. VVhen the Apostles had received power in which all necessary Gifts Knowledge as well as
others is included Luke 24.49 by the Holy Ghost's coming upon them the knowledge of Times and Seasons was bestowed upon them by God which indeed it was not for them to know before of themselves and without the Spirit which alone knoweth the Secrets of God for which they were rebuked by our Saviour Acts 1 6-8 and not for supposing such a Kingdom and Restauration For in the first Sermon which the Apostle Peter made after the descent of the Holy Ghost Acts 3 19-26 he plainly makes mention of the Times and appointed Seasons of d Restitution or Restauration and Refreshment to Israel determining also the precise Time when this should come to pass viz. at the second Coming of Christ from Heaven foretold by all the Prophets when the sins of the converted Israelites were to be blotted out and they should have great comfort and refreshment from the presence of God by Christ's return referring to the Prophecy of Moses Deut. 18.15 18 19. where it is foretold that at the raising up or coming of Christ the Israelites shall hear or obey him in all things whatsoever he shall say unto them which perfect Obedience hath not been as yet paid unto Christ's Doctrine by them and therefore the Words must refer to some Second Coming when according to the Tenor of that and other places of Scripture the faithful Jews shall be restored comforted and rewarded and the Disobedient shall be destroyed from among the people Lastly The Apostle 1 Cor. 15 24.-29 plainly asserts that Christ shall have such a Distinct and Peculiar Kingdom to himself as that he may be said in the Exercise of it not to be subject to God the Father and God the Father during that Kingdom not to be all in all Which cannot be understood concerning him whilst he was upon Earth because he was then in a State of Humiliation and Sufferings being made lower then the Angels and having taken upon himself the Form of a Servant Phil. 2.7 8. Heb. 2.9 nor concerning him as he is now in Heaven because he is represented in Scripture in his present State as sitting on the Right Hand of God whereby is denoted his enjoying and possessing as the Son (c) 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Acts 3.2 the same word used Acts 1.6 by the Apostles when they proposed this question to our Saviour of Man a Glory and Authority next to that of God the Father and the Exercise of his Regal Office as a Branch of his Mediatorship as in subjection and subordination unto him and as in expectation of having his Enemies subdued by the Father Psalm 110.1 Heb. 10.12 13. Nor can this be understood concerning the Kingdom of Eternity because then God will be All in All And although Christ must Reign in his Humane Nature to all Eternity yet that is not as Mediator but as God-Man (a) John 13 32.17 5 24. glorified with the Glory which he had with the Father before the World was in which State his Humane Nature is not to have a proper and peculiar Glory of it self but one in and with God from him and him alone And therefore this must be understood concerning some State of his Kingdom called 1 Cor. 15.24 The Kingdom in which Christ as Son of Man and Mediators shall appear to Reign so gloriously with such Evidences and Manifestations of Glory in and from himself as that he may be said not to be subject to the Father but to have a distinct Kingdom of his own although communicated from God the Father in which he Reigns freely and absolutely as King and net as a Vice-Roy limited by a Commission and which was not to be One with his Fathers Kingdom until all things become One in him when Christ's Mediatory Kingdom is to cease A Mediator not being a Mediator of One. Now if there be such a Kingdom and that Kingdom be not his Mediatory nor Eternal Kingdom what Kingdom can it be but that Glorious Kingdom we have been treating of which is to begin as the Apostle there intimates and shall be shewn hereafter at the Resurrection and is to end when all things are subdued unto the Son when he shall deliver up his Kingdom in which the Saints had been sanctified by him and prepared for Union with God according to the Tenor of that admirable Prayer of our Saviour John 17. the Pattern of his Intercession Q. E. D 15 It is no where expresly said in Scripture that Christ shall come down upon the Earth at the Day of Judgment but only that he shall appear in the Clouds (a) So 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 may be rendered compare Rev. 5.10 and Matth. 25.21 See Mr. Mather de Signo Filii Hominis and Dr. Homes Resurrect revealed 2.2 over the Earth in the lowest part of the Heavens into which be descends from the highest Heavens Judging the World and Reigning there with his Saints 1 Thes 4.16 17. 16 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The Thousand Years which are to be understoood of a definite space of time as appears from the Epocha and Period assigned to this Line of Time which is dated from the binding of the Devil and ends in the loosing of him And the Thousand Years are to be understood Literally and not Prophetically reckoning each Day for a Year because all Prophetical Time will be at an end before the Blessed Millennium begins according to Christ's Oath Rev. 10.6 that Time should be no longer after the expiring of the 1260 Years the Times foretold by the Prophets Now if Propheticall Time be at an end before the Thousand Years enter then they must be Literally and not Prophetically understood in which sense if they were to be taken the Glory of the Divine State in which God is all in all would be deferred to so vast a length of Time as could not rationally be supposed But that this State is to last such a precise Number of Years seems to be plainly asserted by the Apostle Peter 2. Ep. 3.8 who discoursing concerning the Day of Judgment delivers this remarkable Axiom of which he charges those he wrote to to take special notice as of a thing very observable viz. That one Day is with the Lord as a Thousand Years and a Thousand Years as one Day In which place the Apostle answers an Objection which he foresaw would be made by some Scoffers in the last Days against the coming of Christ to dissolve this present World and make a New One and tells the that this should certainly come to pass at the Day of Judgment But least his meaning should be mistaken he says that by the Day of Judgment he does not mean a single ordinary Day but a Day in the mysterious Account and Reckoning of Almighty God who made all things in Number as well as in Weight and Measure and had ordained accordingly that a Day in his Account should be reckoned as a Thousand Years and a Thousand Years as One Day and therefore that the Day
of Judgment being One of the Lord's Days called frequently the Day of the Lord in Scripture must consist of a Thousand Literal Years and a Thousand Years when spoken of with relation to some mystical Day or Time of the Lord must be accounted as One mystical Day comprehending a Thousand Years of common Account And also he further intimates that the Days of the Lord in which he perfected the Work of the Creation and rested from it being Seven there must consequently pass before the Day of Judgment six Thousand Years or six mystical Days and that the Day of Judgment must accordingly last a Thousand Years which should be a Day of Sabbatism or a Thousand Years of Rest or Peace and of Sanctification or Righteousness in correspondence to Gods resting on the Seventh Day and blessing and sanctifying it And this Interpretation of the place is not only agreeable to the Traditions (a) Mede 's Works pag. 609. Grot. in loc Ainsw on Gen. 1.31 Burnet's Theory B. 3 5.4 3 6. of the Jews to whom the Apostle wrote and to the Sentiments of the Primitive Christians but also may be stongly enforced from the Circumstances of the Text it self For if this were not the sense of the VVords and it contained only this plain Natural Truth that Time is nothing to Eternity why should so solemn an Admonition be prefixed to it VVhich is also a sense nothing proper to the scope of the Apostle who was to answer the Objection of the Scoffers and to comfort the Christians under the delay and long suffering of God and to excite them to look for it and hasten unto it to which end it was no ways proper to tell them that each Natural day of the Year was with the Lord as a Thousand Years which would but have encreased their impatient expectation and would withal not have answered the Objection of the Scoffers because there might be for all the Apostle had asserted many Thousand Years before the Promise of his coming should be fulfilled VVhereas the other Interpretation affords Hope to the Christians that things should not always continue as they were but that this wicked World should be at last destroyed and a New One succeed it wherein they should be found of Christ at his coming in peace that is in a state of rest and peace to their good and prosperity according to what the Apostle Paul had written unto them in his Epistle to the (b) Especially in the 3d and 4th Chapters Hebrews where besides the Rest from the VVorks of the Creation and that promised to the Israelites in the Land of Canaan he makes mention of another Rest which he calls a certain limited Day wherein another kind of Rest is to be expected plainly intimating the Day of Rest in the Times of the Messias or a Sabbatism as the word ought to be translated verse 9. that is a seventh Thousand Years of Peace and Righteousness after six Thousand of Labour Misery and Sin for according to the Key of Mystical Knowledge given by the Apostles Peter and John after a (a) Bp. Fell 's Sermon on 2 Pet. 3.3 Millenary Week the Everlasting Sabbath shall commence And further this Number is to be taken literally because by it is signified a State of Perfection a Year being the perfect Revolution of the Sun and a Thousand being a perfect Number and the perfection both of Time and Numbers concurring in a Thousand Years For a Thousand Years is a Cube (b) For it arises out of the multiplication of Three Tens Two Tens multiplied making 100 Years and 100 Years multiplied by the Third Ten amounting to 1000 Years which is a Cube of Time See Meursii Denar Pythagor and Dr. Moor's Cabbala Oper. Philosoph Tom. 2. pag. 500 501 530 532 557 558 559 561. of Time whose Root is Ten whereby is signified a steddy uninterrupted and permanent State of which a Cube is the Symbol and withal a perfect one to which no other State is to succeed but is to be swallowed up in the perfection of Eternity as the Number Ten is a perfect Number beyond which there is no simple Number and comprehends all simple Numbers in it Whence it is that Man being a sinful and imperfect Creature could never arrive to the Term of a Thousand Years as Jachiades a Jew has observed on Dan. 7.25 the period of a perfect State upon Earth which the First Adam could not reach for if he had he had been probably translated into an Immortal State nor any of the Sons of Adam during the Old World but is proper only to the Sons of the Resurrection in the New World of the Second Adam or the Messias 5 But the 17 rest or remnant of the dead i. e. those who weâ—e slain by the Sword of Christ's Mouth Chap. 19.21 lived 18 not again 19 until the Thousand Years were finished This living again of the Saints and Martyrs 20 is the first Resurrection of Life John 5.29 1 Thes 4.15 16. 17 It is plain from what hath been observed in the foregoing Annotation that the Day of (a) See Mr. Mede pag. 531-537 571-573 577-580 602-619 Ep. 15.2 and Book 5. And Dr. Beverley of the Universal Christian Doctrine of the Day of Judgment Matth. 25.31 34. Luke 19 12-27 Judgment mentioned in the Doctrinal parts of Scripture is the same with the Thousand Years Kingdom of Christ Day (b) John 16.26 Heb. 3.8 9. See Mr. Mede in the places quoted and pag. 86. and Mr. Mather de Signo Filii Hominis often signifying in Scripture a long space af Time and not only a single Day And therefore seeing that the Wicked are to be judged as well as the Good they must be here meant by the rest of the Dead who are evidently the same with the Wicked People slain with the Sword of Christ's Mouth Chap. 19.21 the same Expressions being used in both places 18 The Wicked indeed live again when they are raised to Judgment but because they rise only to Shame and Everlasting Contempt as the Prophet Daniel speaks Chap. 12.2 and lye as dead or slain under the condemning power of Christs Gospel the Sword proceeding out of his Mouth and shall never live a Life of Happiness therefore are they represented here as dead (c) See Matth. 8.22 Luke 15.32 1 Tim. 5.6 2 Peter 3.7 Jude 12. Men which lived not again and accordingly they are seldom mentioned in the general Discourses in the (d) Neither in the 15th of the Corinthians nor 1 Thessal 4. New Testament about the Resurrection 19 They are represented during the Thousand Years as in a dead spiritless and unactive State lying under the Judiciary Sentence of Condemnation and the perdition which the day of Judgment shall bring upon ungodly men 2 Pet. 3.7 upon the expiring of which they become active gather to Battle and compass the Camp of the Saints Verse 8 9. 20 This refers to the Resurrection and living again
that the Apostle might not seem to contradict what he had said just before concerning the Dead rising first the surviving Saints should be caught up in the Clouds to meet the Lord in the Air to be with him to all Eternity in Heaven Which is also asserted by the Apostle at the 15th Verse where he says that the Saints who shall be alive at the Day of Judgment shall not prevent them which are asleep that is shall not rise before them or shall not (a) 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 nequaquam assequemur sive attingemus Ludov. de Dieu attain the same State of Incorruptibility and Immortality they shall enjoy at the very moment of the sounding of the last Trump until afterwards which distance of Time is not determined by the Apostle and may be many Years for ought that is asserted in this place by him because the same word is used 1 Cor. 15.23 concerning the distance betwixt Christ's Resurrection and that of the Dead Saints which is now almost the space of seventeen hundred Years And although the Apostle 1 Thes 4.17 seems to assert that the Living Saints shall be caught up together with the Dead Saints yet those words must not be so understood as if the Living Saints were caught up at the same moment that the Dead Saints rise for then the Apostle would contradict himself but must be understood according to the acceptation of the word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Rom. 3.12 viz. that they shall be caught up in their own Order and Time as well as the other and be in the like State with them or else do rather refer to the last joynt Ascent of both together into the higher Regions of the Air the appearance of Christ hitherto having been perhaps in some lower parts of it in order to their being for ever with the Lord. This and such like Parallels betwixt the Doctrinal and Prophetical parts of Scripture as to this Point of the Resurrection did incline me to understand it in a litteral Sense which I was for a long while averse to as I since find Mr. (a) Pag. 770. Epist. 20. Mede was until by a more close consideration of what Dr. Beverley hath discoursed on this Point I was fully convinced 22 By Second Death is meant Final Eternal Punishment to distinguish it from the First Death of the slain with the Sword of Christ's Mouth for at the very beginning of Christs Kingdom the Wicked are slain by the Conviction Sentence and Condemnation of Christ's Gospel and Appearance which is called the making of his Foes his Footstool Psalm 110.1 1 Cor. 15.25 Rom. 16.20 Heb. 2 5-9 whereby the first Act of Christ's Regal Power at his first sending of the Rod of his strength out of Zion to bring his Enemies under the Footstool of his Throne seems to be signified under which they lie in a state of Death that is Condemnation and Inability to act any thing against Christ's Kingdom until the Thousand Years are accomplished when they are permitted to break forth into open Enmity and Hostility and are at last utterly subdued and cast into the Lake to suffer Eternal Punishments and the Son shall put down 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or abolish and bring to naught all his Enemies even Death it self the last Enemy to be subdued 1 Cor. 15.24 26. But those who are partakers in the first Resurrection being found alive at Christ's first appearing in his Kingdom are continued in that State and suffer no Death at all neither the first proceeding from the Convictions of Christ's Gospel and Judgments nor the second of final Condemnation 23 They may be said to Reign with Christ in the sense that we are said to be crucified with Christ and to live with him for the Personal (a) See Dr. Homes and Mr. Mather de Signo Filii Hominis Reign of Christ upon Earth cannot be proved from Scripture whatsoever Glorious Appearances may be of his Humanity from his Throne in the Clouds and the possession of the Kingdom is given to the Saints in Daniel of which more hereafter as occasion offers 24 Here it may be observed 1. That the same individual Thousand Years are meant throughout the whole Chapter as appears from the Greek Article 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 whereby reference is made to each foregoing Thousand Years and it is shewn that they are the same For Satan is bound a Thousand Years Verse 2. and is restrained Verse 3. from deceiving the Nations 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 during the same thousand Years The Dead Saints and Martyrs live and Reign with Christ 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 for the same space of Years Verse 4. during which also the Wicked are in a state of Death Verse 5. The Living Saints are partakers in the first Resurrection during a Thousand Years Verse 6. at the End of which very Thousand Years Satan is loosed Verse 7. Whence it will follow that the Thousand Years during which Satan was bound are the same with those during which the Living Saints Reigned with Christ and that they are the same with the Thousand Years assigned to the Dead Saints raised and the Dead State of the Wicked because they which agree in one Third must agree amongst themselves 2. That there are but three sorts of Mankind to whom the Thousand Years are assigned viz. The Dead-raised Saints and Martyrs The Dead Wicked raised to a Spiritual and Political Death and the Living Saints changed for there are only so many parts or sorts of Mankind in the state of the Thousand Years and it is not assigned to any Living-Wicked who shall live wickedly and then die because whatsoever liveth at all shall live Ezek. 47.9 7 And when the foregoing Thousand Years during which he had been bound and restrained from deceiving the Nations Verse 2 3 were expired Satan shall be 25 loosed out of his Prison i. e. his close Restraints from all power and liberty of Temptation shall be taken off 25 Satan who was always a Prisoner and in everlasting Chains under Darkness unto the Judgment of the Great Day was more peculiarly restrained during the Thousand Years from all power of Temptation which he had exercised notwithstanding his Chains of Darkness from the time of his Fall from his first Estate until then when he was closely confined by the Glorious Appearance of Christ and his Kingdom in the New Heaven and Earth but when that Appearance was withdrawn from the New Earth then Satan was as it were loosed and at liberty to tempt which he could not do whilst the Holiness Righteousness Truth and Justice of Christ's Kingdom appeared in their full Power and Glory 8 And shall go out of his Prison and Restraints to and fro in the Earth seeking whom he may devour to deceive the 26 Nations which are in the four * quarters or Corners of the Earth Gog 27 and Magog i. e. the Enemies of God and his Christ Ezek. 38.2 3.39 8. Rev. 19.18 19 21.
to gather them together from all parts to 28 Battel i. e. to oppose persecute and destroy Christ's Kingdom upon Earth the 29 number of whom is as the Sand of the Sea i. e. exceeding great Ezek 38.8 9 15 16. 26 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 (a) Grot. in Matth. 5 7. Eph. 2.11 12. that is Gentiles or Aliens from the New Jerusalem State banished as it were from that happy Society into the Four Quarters or Corners of the Earth and living there as without God in the New World of the Messias beleiving indeed but as the Devils do with trembling which is a Spiritual Death who were typified by the Hamonah and Multitude of Nations Ezek. 38 8 9 15 16.39 11 16. who are to come up against the New Jerusalem in the latter Days after the Resurrection Conversion and Return of the Jews and their Vnion with the Gentiles into One Church as appears from Ezek. Chapters 36 37 38 39. Now whatsoever is meant by these Nations in Ezekiel it is plain that in this place they can be no other than some of those to whom the Thousand Years are here assigned who are the whole of Mankind and seeing that it cannot be supposed that the Saints of any kind can be possibly engaged in such a design against Christ's Kingdom as being the saved and healed the Living the Sons and Partakers of the first Resurrection and secured by Christ the Second Adam in a State of Righteousness who will lose none that are his as the first Adam did it will follow that by these Nations must be understood the remnant slain the rest of the Dead who lived not again or the Dead-Wicked raised to a state of Condemnation and continuing under the Awe and Terror of it during the Glories of Christ's Kingdom who are now stirred up by Satan their Head and Ringleader to attack the Camp of the Saints upon Earth whom he thought he might easily overcome now the more immediate Presence and Assistance of Christ was withdrawn from them And to this sense agree many Expressions in Ezekiel who calls them the Multitude or Nations of the Dead Chap. 39 8-17 and also the general scope of this Chapter which has a relation as is granted by all Interpreters to what will come to pass at the last Judgment and the Resurrection * In the Four Corners or Angles of the New Earth which is represented as a square City or Camp without which as it were at the Four Angles and Corners of it the Wicked are placed here and Chap. 22.15 in allusion to the Custom amongst the Jews of executing Offenders without the Camp and City and of excluding and excommunicating all unclean persons out of it Numb 5 1-4 Heb. 13.11 12 13. 27 This is a plain proof that these Nations are typified by the multitude of the Dead in Ezekiel who calls them Gog and the Land of Magog by which the (a) Ezek. 32 26.38 15.39 2. The Mogul-Tartars above the Wall of China are called so by the Arabian Writers Dr. Hyde Epist de mensuris Sinens See Mr. Mede pag. 574. and Ep. 41. Northern and Scythian Nations are understood in Scripture a Type of the Enemies of God's Church and Kingdom prophesied of in Old Time by the servants of God the Prophets of Israel under the Names of such Nations as were the Chief Enemies of the Jews in the particular Times of each Prophet Ezek. 38.17 So that Gog and Magog seems to denote the whole multitude of God's Enemies in each Age which admirably agrees with what hath been discoursed already to wit that these Nations are the Wicked dead of every Age of the World raised to Condemnation 29 This Battel is distinct from that at Armageddon which was before the Thousand Years Neither will it appear incredible that the Faln Angels and the Damned should again attempt such a Design and that after they had experienced the power of Christ's Wrath for a Thousand Years If we consider that the Devils retain the same Enmity against God notwithstanding their many Ages of Punishment and their Expectation of an Eternal Doom and that this Attempt was under the wise Permission and Order of Almighty God at a time when his more immediate Glorious Presence was withdrawn from the New Earth of his Saints and the Laodicean state of Coldness and Indifferency to the Glories of Christ's Kingdom began For the Wicked Nations as they went down to Hell according to the Expressions of Ezekiel Chap. 32.26 27. with their Weapons of War that is with the same Enmity to Christ in which they lived and laid their Swords under their Heads in a readiness to act the same Wickedness over again so are they raised with the same Passions only the more enraged for their Punishments and may very well be supposed out of Envy and Revenge for their long confinement under a State of Punishment and Infamy to engage in this Attempt 29 Although the Number of the Wicked who shall be raised to Condemnation will be very great yet there will not be any inconvenience to our Assertion from thence as if the Earth would be incumbred with so vast a Number of wicked persons because no very great space will be required for their confinement if that be true which is asserted by Sir William (a) See his Essay in Political Arithmetick concerning the Growth of the City of London Petty That half the Island of Ireland would afford not only Footing to stand upon but Graves to lye down in for the whole Number of Men now living and also for those that have died since the beginning of the World To which may be added that their Bodies shall be spiritual they being to partake of the spirituality of the Resurrection although not of the Purity and Blessedness of it 9 And they went up in Battle array 1 Kings 10.1 from the Quarters and Corners to which they were confined on the breadth of the Earth i. e. to assault the Kingdom of Christ which had spread it self over the whole Earth Isa 8 8.49 6. Psalm 72.8 and compassed or besieged the Camp 30 of the Saints who reign with Christ Verse 6. and the 31 beloved City i. e. they endeavoured to destroy Christ's Kingdom and the New Jerusalem State on Earth See on Chap. 21.2 3. and 32 or but Fire came down from God out of Heaven and devoured them i. e. they were suddenly and miraculously discomfited by God and most severe Judgments were inflicted upon them by God's fiery Wrath and Indignation Ezek. 38.22 23.39 6 9 10. 30 A Metaphor from the Camp of the Israelites in the Wilderness a Type of the Church and Kingdom of Christ See Ainsworth on Numb 2.27 31 Jerusalem is called God's Beloved Psalm 60 5.108 6. which was a Type of the New Jerusalem State the Holy City the Bride and Beloved of her Husband Chap. 21. 32 The Israelites are represented by Ezekiel Chap. 38.11 as living in unwalled Villages without Bars and Gates
safely and at rest when they shall be invaded by Gog that is the Heathen Nations out of whose Captivity they are to be brought And in such a Posture may the Saints upon Earth be well presumed to be after the Thousand Years when the Laodicean State as hath been before observed on Chap. 3 14-21 begins in which through a long continuance of Glory and Prosperity the Saints upon Earth began to be less Zealous and did not so ardently desire to be caught up to Christ and be for ever with him as they had before done 10 And the Devil that deceived them or the Deceiver of them and that from the beginning John 4.44 1 John 3.8 was without any Tryal as being taken in the very Fact and having been a notorious Murtherer and Lyar from the beginning and the Father of all Sin and Enmity to Christ's Kingdom cast immediately into the 33 Lake of Fire and Brimstone where the 34 Beast and the False Prophet are who were before cast into it Chap. 19.20 and shall be tormented day aad night for ever and ever i. e. he was adjudged upon undeniable Evidence of Fact to a State of utter inability of acting against God and Christ and to extreme Torments to all Eternity without intermission 33 He and his cheif Agents are condemned to the same punishment having no remains of any Power left no more than there is of a thing which is consumed by Fire for the Devil shall not be only held in Chains as formerly but all his Power and Authority shall be utterly abolished Grotius in locum in Cap. 19,20 34 From hence it appears that Gog and Magog is not Antichrist as some have thought because Antichrist was in the Lake before their Discomfiture and Condemnation 11 And I saw a 35 great white 36 Throne i. e. a Representation of the last and great Act of Judicature in which all Enmity was destroyed and the living remaining Saints were caught up to the Lord to sit with him on his Throne and all which belonged to Christ's Kingdom were fully sanctified and glorified and prepared for Union with God to all Eternity 1 Cor. 15. 1 Thes 4. Rev. 3.21 and him that sat on it i. e. Christ Matth. 25.31 Acts 17.21 from whose 37 Face or Presence upon the Declaration of his Will the 38 New Earth and the 38 New Heaven sled 39 away or disappeared at his Rebuke and Command and there was found no 40 place for them i. e. they were utterly abolished and annihilated Psalm 37.10 Dan. 2.35 Rev. 12.8 35 It was a great Throne because all who had overcome were to sit with Christ in it and the whole World was to be finally Judged at it and it was White to shew the Glory Sanctity and Purity of Christ's Justice and of the State in which the Saints were now to be invested who at this great and last Session are caught up together into the Air to be with Christ for ever after they had Judged the World with him 36 From the Appearance of this Throne and the following Judgment it may be concluded that this was the Laodicean State of the Church according to the importance of the Word which signifies the Judging of the People See on Chap. 3. 37 Face signifies a stedfast Will and Purpose shewn by Gestures or other Signs and Circumstances as the word is taken Luke 9 51-53 38 38 These must be the New Heaven and New Earth whose Description is given in the following Chapter because they fly away after the Expiration of the Thousand Years which is the space of Time allotted to the Duration of the Reign and Kingdom of Christ and of the Holy City prepared as a Bride the New Jerusalem which are to be not in the Old but the New Heaven and Earth as will plainly appear to any one who compares this Chapter with the following wherein as is all along observed are such Descriptions given of the Thousand Years Kingdom of Christ as can agree to no other but a New Heaven and New Earth in which dwelleth Righteousness 39 This New Earth flies away but the Old One is to be dissolved by Fire of which flying away is not a proper Expression 40 The Psalmist expresseth the Death of a Man by his place knowing him no more Psalm 103.16 But when it is said That no place is found for a thing thereby seems to be denoted its utter annihilation and withal the impossibility of any other thing succeeding in its place because there is no place remaining into which it should succeed Whence it follows that this is the last Heaven and Earth and that no New Ones are to succeed it and that nothing else shall remain after it but the Eternal Kingdom of God All in All in the highest Heavens and the Lake of the Damned 12 And I saw the 41 Dead in Trespasses and Sins who had lain in an unactive State of Infamy during the Thousand Years and were afterwards discomfited by the Fire of God which came down from Heaven Verse 5 9. small 42 and great i. e. all sorts and the whole Race of them Chap. 19.18 stand before God to be judged by him and the 43 Books of God's Omniscience Mens Consciences and the Law were opened i. e. Mens Actions and God's Knowledge of them were made manifest and 44 another Book was opened which is the Book 44 of Life viz. the Lamb's Book of Life from the foundation of the World Chap. 3 5.13 8.17 8 21 27. and the Wicked Dead raised to Condemnation and discomfited by God's severe Judgment and Indignation and now brought all together to receive their final Sentence were judged out of those things which were written in the books according to their own wicked Works which were not also found written in the Book of Life Verse 15. 41 Hence it appears that this is the Judgment of the Nations the Gog-Magog who were discomfited Verse 9. because they are called the Dead in Ezekiel and the Slain and Dead in this Prophecy 42 Hence it also appears that these are the Kings and their Armies mentioned Chap. 19.18 19. who are the slain and the all men small and great viz. the whole Race of wicked Men. 43 A Metaphor (a) Dan. 7.10 Esth. 6.1 Isa 65.6 Malach. 3.16 taken from the Rolls and Records of Courts of Judicature and from the Registers kept by the Eastern Kings of the Actions of their Reigns whereby God's exact Justice and the perfect Knowledge which he hath of all Mens Actions is set forth and the evident Conviction which will attend the procedures of that Great Day Matth. 12.36 1 Cor. 4.5 44 44 This is is the Book of Election and Predestination belonging to the Living in the New Jerusalem State which is represented as One single Book because it depends upon One single Decree of God and One single Cause of that Decree viz. the free Grace and Good Pleasure of God in Christ Acts 13.48 Rom. 8.28 c.
12 the New things i. e. Graces and Blessings of my New Kingâ—om under which is comprised all that is really desirable and all the Promises made to the Churches Chapters 2 and 3. and I Christ God-Man 12 will be his God and Father as having begotten him to this New Life Eph. 2.10 and he shall be my Son i. e. the Promises of the New Covenant and the Priviledges of Adoption shall be bestowed upon him in the highest and fullest Sense of them Sâ—e on Verse 3. 12 12 Here is declared that the (a) Rom. 8. Restauration of all things and the Adoption to the Inheritance and Redemption of Bodies will be fully compleated only in the Kingdom of Christ who is the Father of the New World the World to come 8 But all the 13 fearful of the Antichristian State especially who dare not hold fast the Profession of their Faith without wavering but for fear forsake the assembling of themselves drawing back unto Perdition Heb. 12.23 25 38 39. and unbeleiving in the Promises of Christ's Coming because of his long delay and who upon that draw back from the true Faith and scoff at it Heb. 12 35-39 2 Pet. 2 and 3 Chapters the abominable and defiled in their Mind Conscience and Practises and to every good work reprobate Tit. 1.15 16. and murderers especially of the Witnesses and Saints Chap. 18.24 and Whoremongers who practise and advance Doctrines which promote uncleanness Chap 2.6 15 and Sorcerers who bewitch Souls Chap. 18.23 and Idolaters as the Antichristian Party are by way of Eminence and all Liars who belâ—eve and make a Lye especially the great one of Antichristianism Rev. 3.9 2 Thes 2.9 1 Tim. 4.2 shall have their part not in the first Resurrection to Blessedness and Holiness but in the Lake which burneth with fire and brimstone which is the second Death and that Eternal See on Chap. 20.6 10 14 15. 13 All sorts of Sinners are here understood but most especially the Antichristian to whom the Characters agree Antichrist being the Man of Sin and Shinar or Babylon which is Antichristian Rome being the very House and Base of all Wickedness Ezek. 5.8 11. Rev. 18.24 9 And there came unto me 14 one or the first and principal of the seven Angels which had the seven Vials full af the seven last plagues the very same who shewed me the Jâ—dgment of the Great Whore Chap. 17.1 and talked with me saying Come hither I will shew thee the (a) Chap. 19 7-9 Bride the Lamb's Wife i. e. the New Jerusalem State and thou shalt plainly and more distinctly see the Nature of it and the vast difference there is betwixt it and the Antichristian State which I before shewed thâ—e Chap. 17. 14 The same Angel that shewed him the Judgment on the great Whore shews him also the New Jerusalem State to manifest that the Destruction of Antichrist and the pouring forth of the Vials are highly and immediately preparatory to Christ's Kingdom 10 And he carried me away in the Spirit i. e. I was in a Spiritual Extasie and was carried in Vision Chap. 1 10.17 3. to a great and high mountain to denote the State of Christ's Church and Kingdom now become a Mountain Dan. 2.35 established in the Tops of the Mountains and exalted above the Hills and to shew that this was the City seen by Ezekiel when he was set upon a very high Mountain Isa 2.2 Ezek 40.2 and shewed me not the Antichristian City of the Whore Chap. 17.3 but that truly great City the (b) Burnet's Theory 4.9 general Assembly consisting of all true Believers and of the Spirits of all just men made perfect Heb. 12.22 23. the Holy and Heavenly Jerusalem the City of the Living God and not the impure Idolatrous City of the Whore descending out of Heaven i. e. the highest Heavens into the lower Regions of it Verse 2. from God by whom it was built and the Kingdom was set up Dan. 2.44 Heb. 11.10 16. 11 Having the Glory of God i. e. the 15 glorious Presence of Christ and of his Saints Matth. 17 2. John 1.14 Heb 1.3 and her Light (c) 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or that which enlightned her was like unto a Stone most precious even like a Jasper Stone clear as Chrystal i. e. the Presence of Christ was (a) Of which the Jasper is an Emblem See Grot. on Chap. 4.3 and on this Verse firm and lastâ—ng dwelling and abiding in it and it was full of Glory Purity and Holiness See on Chap. 4 3. 15 For this is the most proper Representation of the Divine Glory of which the Glorious Appearances of Fire Light and Bright Clouds the Schekinah under the Old Testament were but faint Images and Types 12 And had a Wall great and high i. e it was under the immediate protection of Divine Omnipotency and those which were without were excluded from it Isaiah 26 1-5 60 18. Zech. 2.5 Rev. 22.15 and had twelve Gates for free access to all true Israelites or Saints and at the Gates Twelve Angels as Cherubims to guard this New Paradise that nothing which had not right to Life might enter therein Gen. 3.24 Ezek. 48.31 and Names written thereon which are the Names of the Twelve 16 Tribes of the children of Israel to shew that none but God's People the true Israelitism had a right to this New Jerusalem State See on Chap. 7 4-10 16 These are the very 14400 who were sealed Chap. 7. 13 On the East three Gates on the North three Gates on the South three Gates and on the West three Gates i. e. there were Twelve Gates answerable to the Twelve Tribes Three on each side of the Four square City towards each Corner of the Heavens to shew that the whole Israel of God or all true Believers from every quarter of the World have a right to the Kingdom of Heaven Luke 13.29 See Ezek. 48 31-35 14 And the Wall of the City which was the Security and Protection of it and excluded every thing which was unclean had Twelve Foundations and in them thâ— Names of the Twelve Apostles of the Lamb slain from the Foundation of the World to shew that the Kingdom and Church of Christ was secured and protected by the Apostolical Doctrine upon which it was built Jesus Christ the Lamb of God whose Blood is the Blood of the Everlasting Covenant by which all things are secured unto us ratified and confirmed being the chief Corner-stone Eph. 2 19-22 15 And he that talked with me i. e. the 17 Angel Verse 9. had a golden not a common Reed to shew that this was the glorious pure precious and refined State of the Church of which that measured by Ezekiel with a common Reed was but a Type Ezek. 40.3 to measure the Dimensions and Contents of the Holy 18 City or whole Visible Church which was now rescued out of the hands of the Heathens and Antichristian Enemies and might therefore be measured as being
iâ— was the Measure of the Prophetick Temple and City in Ezekiel Cubits the Root of which is Twelve the Apostolical Number to shew that the Safety and Security of the Church consists in its conformity to the Doctrine and Discipline delivered by the Apostles Acts 2 42. See the Notes on Chap. 7 4.13 18. according to the measure of a Man i. e. this Church-State was highly 30 rational and exactly agreeable to the Intellectual Capacities of Mankind and such as Men of Understanding may find out when â—hey make use of that part of Wisdom by which the Roots of Numbers are extracted See on Chap. 13.18 that is the Angel to shew that this was a State of Men above this present mortal State in which the children of the Resurrection are made equal unto the (c) Grot. in loc Angels Luee 20 35 36. and that it was not Beastian or Antichristian but Angelical 29 The Wall is measured to shew that Apostolicism signified by Twelve the Root of its measure contains all things in it necessary to a Church as the Wall does inclose the whole City and is the fixt and unmovable Dimensions of it 30 Whereas the Antichristian State is irrational disagreeable in its self and from the Divine Rule in correspondence to its Root 25 which is a surd and irrational Number uneven and irregular in the Product arising from it as well as in its self See Mr. Potter and the Notes on Chap. 13.18 18 And the building of the Wall of it was 31 Jasper i. e. it was firm and impregnable and withal glorious Verse 11. and the City was pure Gold like unto clear Glass i. e. this was a precious and pure State and (a) The gawdy Whore had only External Ornaments but this State is transparent pure and clean within as well as without Forestus in locum See Chap. 4 6.15 2. throughly enlightned by God Verse 23. 31 This Stove is not to be subdued by the knocks of the Hammer but is so strong that it breaks all that strikes against it Dr. Moor. See Grot. on Chap 4.3 and Verse 11. 19 And the Foundations of the Wall of the City were garnished with all manner of 32 precious Stones to shew the Excellency of Christ the b corner-stone of this Spiritual Building and of the Doctrine of the Gospel upon which it was buiâ—t by his Apostles and the great variety and compleatness of the precious Gifts and Graces of this State The first Foundation was Jasper the second Saphire the third a Chalcedony the fourth an Emerald 32 The Precious Stones hereafter particularly mentioned are the same with those in the Breast-plate of the High-Priest (c) See Verse 14. and Braunius de Vestit Hebr. 2.26 Exod. 28.17 21. but placed in a different Order from them but for what Reasons I am not able to determine as I neither can precisely and positively the particular signification of each of them Only in general they may signifie 1. Perfection of Glory Prosperity and Happiness in the highest manner the Creation is capable of in its renewed State much beyond the choicest and most precious things of this World or even of Paradise it self whose Rivers flowed from the Land of Gold and Pearl 2. Perfection of Gifts and Graces Divine Presence and Illumination Doctrine and Truth and whatsoever else may be justly thought to be the true meaning of the Stones and the Vrim and Thummim in the Oracular Breast-plate of the High-Priest For which see the Commentators on Exod. 28. and 39. Lev. 8. Deut. 33.8 and Braunius de Vestit Sacerdot Hebraeor See also 1 Chron. 29.2 2 Chron. 3.6 Isaiah 54 11-14 Ezek 28.13 Tobit Chapters 13 and 14. and Dr. Moor's Paraphrase and other Commentators on this place 20 The fifth Sardonyx the sixth Sardius the seventh Chrysolite the eighth Beryl the ninth a Topaz the Tenth a Chrysoprasus the eleventh a Jacinth the twelfth an Amethyst i. e. this was a glorious State in which all true Israelites of the Twelve Tribes whose Names were engraven on the Twelve (a) See Ainsw on Exod. 28. Stones of the Breast-plate were joyned and united into one Body with the True Christians who kept and professed the Doctrine they had received from the Twelve Apostles of the Lamb Christ 21 And the Twelve Gates were Twelve Pearls every several Gate was of one Pearl to shew the inestimable value of the Gospel that one Pearl of great price and the pure 33 conversation and unity 34 of all who are to enter into Christ's Kingdom by him the only Door and Way to Eternal Life Matth. 13.45 46. John 10 1-14 and the Street of the City was pure Gold as it were transparent Glass i. e. the Conversation 35 of the Saints of this State was pure and incorrupt as refined Gold and sincere as if their Thoughts and Hearâ—s were transparent to each other and the very places of concourse were free from all manner of defilement contrary to what was in the Antichristian great City which was defilâ—d with Uncleanness and the Blood of the Witnesses which lay dead in the Streets of it Chap. 11.8 33 For they are of a White colour Grot. in loc 34 Pearls are called Vniones because they are always found united together and never separate from each other Plin. Histor 9. 35. 35 For the Street is the Forum Urbis as Grotius notes the publick place where Men meet and transact Business Moor 's Paraphr 22 And I saw no (a) Templi appellatione destinato abstinebant Christiani Grot. in Act. 7.48 Temple therein i e. no one particular place in which alone God would be worshipped and manifest his Presence as in the Temple of Jerusalem 1 Kings 8. for the Lord God Almighty and the Lamb are the Temple thereof i. e. do afford their Presence immediately and after a glorious manner in this State whereby each pious Soul becomes a Temple for God and Christ to dwell and manifest themselves in Exek 48.35 John 4 23.20 23. Acts 7 46-50 Rev. 3.20 23 And the City had no need of the Sun neither of the Moon to shine in it who were as it were ashamed anâ— confounded at the greater Glory of the Divine Kingdom and Presence Isa 24 23.60 19. for the 36 glory of God the Father the Fountain and Original of all Being whatsoever and of all Light Knowledge Life Love Grace and Comfort did lighten it by a Light communicated froâ— him and the Lamb Christ who is the Glory of God Light of Light and very God of very God is the light thereof by the Glory of the Godhead appearing illustriously in his Humane Nature See Verse 11. 36 God is not subject to the Son in this his glorious Kingdom 1 Cor. 15.27 and therefore he is said to be the Light of it and Christ the Son is said to be the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or the Lamp as shining by a Light communicated from the Godhead and residing in him who is the
side of the River was there the 5 Tree of Life i. e. this was a Paradisiacal State in which the Saints raised and changed could dye no more but were made equal to the Angels Luke 20.36 1 Cor. 15. which bare Twelve manner of Fruits i. e. afforded perfect 6 Pleasures and Consolations to this 6 Apostolical Israelitism and yeilded her Fruit every Month i. e. Variety and Fullness of Joy for 7 evermore Psalm 1. and 16 11.92 12 14. Ezek. 47.7 12. and the 8 Leaves of the Tree were for the healing of the Nations of the saved who were to walk in the Light of the New Jerusalem State that is the Living Saints were to be preserved during the Thousand Years in Bodies changed which should afterwards be made incorruptible See on Chap. 20. and 21.24 5 Or A Tree of Life viz. one on each side at just and convenient distances for they were very many as appears from Ezek. 47.7 12. and from the Expression here used at the Bank of the River on the one side and on the other and yet they are here represented as One Tree because they were all of One Kind viz. of the same kind with the Tree of Life in the midst of Paradise by which Life was Sacramentally conveyed to our first Parents and a Symbol was given of the Immortality of the renewed Paradisiacal State of Christ's Kingdom 6 For the Number Twelve is a Symbol of Perfection of Apostolicalness and of the True Israel of God now united into one Body in this State 7 The Year being the measure of all Time bearing Fruit as oft as there be Months in the Year must needs signifie the continual constant fruitfulness of it Dr. Hammond on the place 8 The (a) Ezek. 47.12 to which place this Verse alludes Fruit of this Tree is for Meat i. e. for solid Nourishment and ordinary Food but the Leaves of it are only for medicine or healing from whence it follows that the Nations here mentioned had some Remains of Corruptibility left which required Care and needed Preservation by Medicines by which is admirably set forth the different State of the raised Saints caught up immediately to Christ into a State of Incorruptibility and that of the living Saints on Earth the very Nations mentioned Chap. 21 24 26. whose Bodies are only changed but not made incorruptible at first as hath been (b) 451 452. already frequently observed and therefore are represented as living indeed Chap. 20.6 but with some Principle of Corruptibility in them which stood in need of Healing whereas the Dead Saints being raised to a Life of Incorruptibility are very aptly represented as fed and nourished with the very Fruit of she Tree of Life that is by immediate Communications of Incorruptibility from God and Christ who is Life John 1 4.5 26. and Chap. 6. 3 And there shall be no more curse or no Effects of Sin in this New Paradise as there were in the first Gen. 3.14 c. but the Throne of God and of the Lamb shall be in 9 it by glorious Manifestations and Communications and his 16 Servants which were sealed See Chap. 7.4 shall serve him perfectly in this State and never fall from it as our first Parents did but shall be Kings and Priests to God for ever 9 This whole City or State as well that on Earth as in the Heavens shall be replenished with Communications from the Throne of God and of the Lamb which shall be in the City on the New Earth by its Light shining on it from the New Heaven Chap. 21.24 10 This Relative Particle respects both God and the Lamb and yet is of the Singular Number to shew the Vnity of the Godhead and the Equality of the Father and the Son the Lamb as one with the Eternal Word 4 And they shall see his Face i. e. partake of the Nature and Glory of God and of Christ Matth. 5.8 1 Cor. 13.12 1 John 3.2 and his Name shall be in their Foreheads i. e. they shall be manifestly known to be his Servants who were wont to be marked on the Forehead and they shall be Holiness to the Lord according to the Inscription on the High-Priests â—râ—ntlet See the Notes on Chap. 7 3 4.14 1. 5 And there shall be 10 no night there i. e. no impuriâ—â— and 〈◊〉 interruption of Happiness and Comfort â—sâ—lâ— â—6 ◠〈◊〉 Johâ— â— 5 6 7. and they need no Candle 〈…〉 â—ither â—ighâ—â—f the Sun i. e. no Natural Light of which the Sun is the Fountain for the Lord God giveth them Light i. e. affoâ—deth them hiâ— glorious Presence and Consolations and thâ—◠〈…〉 for ever and ever i. e. after the Thousand Years Mâ—diâ—â—oâ—y Kingdom they shall reign with Christ for ever in the highest Heavens for Christ's Kingdom is an Eternal Kingdom and of it there shall be no end Luke 1.33 See Chap. 3 21.5 10.20 4 6. 10 This and the foregoing Verses contain a Repetition of what had been said before either by way of (a) Gen. 41.32 â—hil 3.1 Assurance and Confirmation as is usual in Prophecy or with reference to the Saints upon Earth upon the mention of them Verse 2. or with respect to the Persons to whom that is now accommodated which had been before spoken concerning their City or State Compare Chap. 21.23 25. with the fifth Verse of this Chapter 6 And he i. e. the first of the Seven Angels which had the Seven Vials Chap. 21.9 said unto me 11 these sayings of the Prophecy of this Book Verse 7. are faithful and true i. e. important certain and infallible Truths See on Chap. 19.9 And the Lord 12 God of the Holy Prophets i. e. Christ who spake by them and whose Spirit inspired them Acts 3.21 1 Pet. 1.10 11 12.3 19. 2 Pet. 1.21 sent or did send at first Chap 2.1 and all along in this Prophecy his Angel or Minâ—string Spirits to shew unto his Servants the things of this Prophecy which must shortly after the Day of the (b) See the Notes on Chap. â— 1â— Resurrection the time when this Vision was seen and from whence it commences begin to come to pass in order one after another See on Chap. 1.1 11 Here begins the Conclusion or Epilogue of this Sacred Drama wherein the Angel says Dr. Hammond in his Paraphrase on the place began to conclude and fold up his Discourse and to sum up what I had seen in this Vision telling me that all this as strange and as glorious as it was should certainly come to pass And the Vision ends as it began with a Declaration of the (a) Chap. 1.5 Truth and Importance of the Prophecy and of its (b) Chap 1.1 speedy issuing into Event and of the most remarkable things contained in it 12 Here is a plain Assertion of the Divinity of Christ concerning whom these words are to be understood as is manifest by comparing them with Chap. 1.1 and Verse 16. of this Chapter 7 Behold
13 I Christ come 14 quickly in Judgment to my Kingdom for the 15 Vials are now ready to be poured forth Blessed therefore and this admonition is at this time of all others the most seasonable when the severest Judgments of God are ready to be executed is he that keepeth the Sayings of the Prophecy of this Book See Chap. 1 3.3 11. 13 Here Christ himself speaks this being a Sacred Drama in which according to the Nature of such Representations several Persons are introduced and there are many interlocutory passages as is observable in the Song of Solomon which is a Dramatick Poem in the Form of a Pastoral Eclogue 14 This Epilogue or Conclusion seems to refer to some of the most important and remarkable passages of the whole Vision which it behoved all to take the chiefest notice of according to the Method observed in the first Chapter which is as it were a Prologue or Introduction to it And accordingly the sudden Coming of Christ to take Vengeance of his Enemies in the pouring forth of the Vials being one of the most remarkable Events foretold in this Vision is here again mentioned as it had been before Chap. 1.7 15 For it seems probable from Chap. 21.9 that this part of the Vision was seen and heard by John just before he had the Representation of the pouring forth of the Vials when the Admonition to keep and observe the Words of this Prophecy was most highly seasonable For by a close consideration of Chap. 17 1.19 7-11 21 9. it seems as if the first or principal Angel of the Vials which shewed John the Judgment of the Whore and the New Jerusalem gave him also this Conclusion at the same time aptly fitted to the time just before the pouring forth of the Vials when it was necessary that the Saints should not only have a comfortable View of the blessed State but also be assured of the sudden coming of it that they might be sustained under the dismal Tribulation then approaching whereupon they are again assured of his quick coming Verse 12. 8 And I John the Apocalyptick Apostle and Servant of Christ See on Chap. 21.2 saw these foregoing things relating to the New Jerusalem and heard the Voice of Jesus and of his Angel Verse 6 7. and 16 both saw and heard all the Sayings and Vision of this Book and therefore am worthy of belief as having been an Eye and Ear-witness of them And when I had heard and sâ—â—â— the glorious State of the New Jerusalem I fell 17 down to worship before the Feet of the Angel which shewed me these things and who had also brought me the glad tidings of a Judgment on God's Enemy the Whore Chap. 17.1 and of the Marriage-Supper Chap. 19 9. 1â— Although these Words have an immediate reference to â—hâ—â— had been seen just before yet they may also refer to all the 〈◊〉 going Visions of this Book 17 It is something difficult to determine whether this passage be the same with the former related Chap. 19 7-21 and only twice repeated to shew the Importance of the Matter and the great danger of falling into the sin of Idolatry although the Relation be something different from the former according to the manner of the Evangelists the latter of whom deliver some things more fully and compleatly than the former and the Two Representations although of the same thing are very different the one being upon the View of the New Jerusalem State in its full Glory and compleat Description the other Chap. 19. only upon the sight of the preparation of the Bride and her coming down out of Heaven 9 Then saith he unto me immediately in great haste and with great Zeal and Vehemency See Chap. 19 10 See thou do it not for I am thy Fellow-Servant and therefore am not to be worsh pped and the Fellow-Servant of thy Brethren the Prophets and of them which keep 18 the sayings of this Book i. e. I although an Angel of so great Rank and Ministry am yet but a Fellow-Creature with thee and the Holy Saints and Witnesses and their Fellow-Servant also in the New Jerusalem State in which you and they shall be equal unto Angels and therefore I am nâ—t to be worshipped Worship being due to Superiors not Equals Creatures and Servants See on Chap. 19.10 Worship therefore God and him alone Matth. 4.10 18 Here the Angel seems to intimate as if the sayings of this Book were a Caution against the Apostatical State and the Worship of Angels and also the Rule and Model of Divine Worship from the first Apostolical State of the Church typified by Ephesus to the highest State of it in the New Jerusalem according to which as he could not receive such Worship so ought not John also to have given it unto him And this passage also affords a clear proof of the Divinity of Christ in Humane Nature because Divine Worship is paid unto him all along in this Book 10 And he i. c. Christ Ver. 12 13 16 20. saith unto me Seal 19 not the Sayings of the Prophecy of this Book for the time of the completion of all the Sealings mentioned in this Book is now at hand 19 These words must refer to the times of the seventh Trumpet when all the Thunders were unsealed Chap. 14. just before the pouring forth of the Vials until when it could not properly be used it being expresly commanded that every one of the Thunders should be sealed 11 He that 20 is unjust let him be unjust still and he which is filthy i e. guilty of any other sin all of which defile a Man Mat. 15.18 Jam. 1 21.3 6 let him be filthy still and he that is righteous or justified let him be righteous still and he that is holy or sanctified let him be holy still i. e. the time and place of Repentance is no more to be found but he that is unjust and filthy will not repent and he that is just and holy shall continue so still 20 These words seem to have a respect to the Times just before the pouring forth of the Vials when those Men who had been proof against the preaching of the Everlasting Gospel were judicially delivered over to punishment because of the willful Obstinacy and Hardness af their Hearts whereupon they blasphemed and repented not See Chap. 16.9 12 And behold I come 21 quickly to Judgment in my Kingdom and my reward is with me to give every man according as his work shall be good or bad Matth. 16.27 Rev. 10.18.20 12-15 21 This must be supposed to be spoken before the pouring forth of the Vials in which the Wicked receive their Reward in Punishments 13 I am Alpha and Omega the Beginning and the End the First and the Last i. e. I am the Eternal God who as I gave Being to all things so do I put an end to them too and I am more especially shewing this my Divine Power in bringing all things to perfection